Home

"Structural data" in 3D GeoModeller Reference

1. 2 ao D S S 2 2 2 2z D a giai a o a lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel Controls in this wizard page Control Purpose CSV Separator Character separating the fields in the import file Text qualifiers Character denoting that a field contains text Data begins and ends with the selected character Decimal separator Character used as the decimal separator separating the whole number part from the fractional part of a number Data start at row Skip all import file text lines or rows at the beginning of the import file until the one you specify here which is the first line or row of data For example if you specify 4 3D GeoModeller ignores the first three lines rows of the import daa file Treat consecutive When checked if 3D GeoModeller encounters delimiters as one consecutive field delimiter characters with no other characters between them it treats them as a single field delimiter Skip leading spaces When checked 3D GeoModeller ignores all spaces at the start of lines rows in the import file Data table Based on the settings you have made 3D GeoModeller in this table how it will parse the data Column width Column size Auto EA ka Reset controls See Column width controls Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 156 Content
2. gt 7D G5 Data to Section Fi Interfaces 2D Geology to Section gt Y Orientations 3D Geology t ss Apparent Dips 31 Section Create te Dykes with Topography as Depth Reference Drillhole 3D Interface and Project to Sections Grid and kieh 3D Orientation and Project to Sections Semic As indicated by the submenu menu options above the following methods are available for importing 3D data into 3D GeoModeller All of these import options are handled by the CSV Import wizard see CSV data import wizard Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Contents Help Top Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 139 lt 4 Back gt SubMenu Option Description 3D Interface Import geology contact data associated with selected formations and faults This data remains in 3D space and is not visible on a section unless it is exactly on the section or you project it onto the section 3D Orientations Import geology orientation data associated with selected formations and faults This data remains in 3D space and is not visible on a section unless it is exactly on the section or you project it onto the section Apparent Dips Import 3D Apparent Dip data ie from 2D Seismic sections Dykes with Import 3D Dykes derived from Intrepid s Naudy Topography as AutoModeller Depth Reference 3D Interface and Import geology contact
3. g LaSi S amp AxialSurfaceB H My Drillholes EJ N se 4 Topography W Surface Meshes pa Hide Shading 2 Appearance E Plot the model Reset view CS Image Manager f Export ee Properties Delete Delete Data gt 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd Geology data Geology orientation data Axial surface orientation data Axial surface data axial traces Hinge line data Background 2D E TutorialA4 1 i Formations At Faults J g Models A Sections ae Topography Viewer main shortcut menu u Create a Section from its Trace Ctrl T F7 Create a Horizontal Section Ctrl U Geology data Geology orientation data Axial surface orientation data Axial surface data axial traces Hinge line data Background 4 Topography EJ N Project Explorer Topo graphy shortcut menu a Hide F Q Shading 2 Appearance w Plot the model Reset view iW Drillholes w Surface Meshe f Export Cs Image Manager amp Properties Delete Data gt Geology data Geology orientation data Axial surface orientation data Axial surface data axial traces Hinge line data Background 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 168 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt See the following t
4. Elevation location computation On topography profile At constant elevation f At constant distance to topography This dialog box enables you to set model computation parameters and choose whether to compare the predicted profile with the observed or modelled grid In the example screen shot that appears above we have chosen to compare the profile from the forward model of the section with the profile from the observations grid that we loaded We did this by selecting Intrepid measured Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 352 Contents Help Top Contents Help Top 4 Back gt In our example 3D GeoModeller calculates the model response at a constant distance of 0 to Topography in other words at the surface You can also specify The number of stations along the modelled profile The half extension distance perpendicular to the section in length of profile multiples Choose OK 3D GeoModeller calculates the forward model and displays the profile in the Geophysical Profile Computer window 1O x Geophysical Profile Computer Cross Sections Method Geophysics Forward gravity model Section_EW Computed at constant distance from topography 0 0m 2 1 2 D extension 5 0 length of profile Anomaly mGal Modelled Section X m Tree View Edit Grid
5. 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 247 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt From Individual Mesh Grid Context Menu Parent topic An Irregular Vertex Mesh or Point Cloud aarti Right clicking on an individual mesh grid in the Explore tree produces the following dialog of choices for the DrillHoleFields irregular vertex mesh Ji ry GeomodellerTolsatis DrillholesFields H i Formations Hide All Views of this Mesh Grid 5 Dykes fi Faults Add Current Model Field H Sections Fe Create Coordinates Y Z Fields ar Drillholes oe g AL Geology i Export Grids and Meshes g EE E ET H 3 DrilholesFields n 2 Empty Grid Ae Multi Crossplot with i re_Krigint t Nearest Neighbour Analysis IronIso J B IronPot Group Fields en 3 MnAniso Flow Rate Pressure Plot 4 Model_Grid_2D_Isopach Delete H f Model_Grid_2D_IsoHypse e Properties ct Model_Grid_2D_FmTops e Hide All Views of this Mesh Grid e Clears from view any field of the current Mesh or Grid displayed in the 2D or 3D viewers e Add Current Model Field e Adds an integer field for each formation lithology in the current model pile to the current mesh or grid Each formation lithology is assigned an integer starting from 1 at the base of the pile and increasing upwards The formations are sampled at the mesh vertices or grid ce
6. A vertical section has a dip of 90 If required The origin of the section using specific u v coordinates of the first point of the trace in the section ZMin and ZMax parameters are the vertical extents of the defined section They must be within the project extents of the 3D GeoModeller Project Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 83 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Create a Horizontal Section dialog box dialog boxes Parent topic Use this dialog box to specify a horizontal section in the model Section menu toolbar and i x Section Name SectionName zZ of horizontal plane 2000 m Section Limits Min 100000 XMax 110000 m Min 2000000 YMax 2010000 m Help wf OK Fd close Controls in this dialog box Section name name Name Name of the new section the new section bea of horizontal Z value or RL Ce the section It must be between the ZMin plane and ZMax of the project See Project Properties dialog box XMin XMax YMin and YMax are the extents of the defined horizontal section in the X east and Y north directions They must be within the project extents of the 3D GeoModeller Project Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald
7. Automatically update coordinates below in this table Polarity If the geology at the orientation point is overturned select Reverse If the geology is not overturned select Normal see Overturned geology Automatically re edit When checked 3D GeoModeller does not empty the Points List when you choose Edit or Create This enables you to continue editing the data See Editing geological data with the Points List for more information Automatically update When checked 3D GeoModeller automatically coordinates e Updates X and Y with the coordinates of the most Update now recent point in the Points List Updates Dip direction with a direction that it calculates using the most recent two points in the Points List When not checked e 3D GeoModeller does not automatically update X Y and Dip direction from the Points List e When you choose Update now 3D GeoModeller updates X Y and Dip direction from the Points List as described above Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 112 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Create a Section from an Axial Surface dialog box Parent topic 3D GeoModeller normally requires that you create a section from an axial surface Geology menu after you have defined it You can specify the extents of the section and dialog boxes 3 Create a section from an axial surf
8. Axial Surfaces Fim a E Observation ID Section Topography Z Provenance Unspecified ka I Automatically re edit P Help yf Edit Close Controls in this dialog box Axial surface associated with the axial surface data Observation ID Your label for the data 3D GeoModeller provides this space for your notes It does not use the data in calculations Section The section containing the axial trace data points Provenance Source of the geology data See Provenance Editor dialog box to see the default settings or to create or edit new categories Automatically re edit When checked 3D GeoModeller does not empty the Points List when you choose Edit or Create This enables you to continue editing the data See Editing geological data with the Points List for more information Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 110 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Create or Edit Axial Surface Orientation Data dialog box Parent topic Use this dialog box to enter or edit orientation data for axial surfaces Geology menu and dialog Note that 3D GeoModeller associates the data with the whole axial series not with boxes any individual axial surface Zi Create axial surface orientation data X Axial Series tPA Aaa aa h Observation ID AA Section Topography ka Provenance Unspecified ka
9. Coordinates AA AAA A x 107434 43 Y 2009421 188 Direction Dip direction 331 193 Dip 20 Plunge 40 Polarity f Normal f Reverse Overturn Automatically re edit W Automatically update coordinates E Update now Help undo yf Create x Close Controls in this dialog box Axial series associated with the geology orientation data Observation ID Your own reference number for this data 3D GeoModeller provides this space for your notes It does not use the data in calculations Section Section containing the geology data points Provenance Source of the geology data See Provenance Editor dialog box for the default settings or to create or edit new categories Coordinates X Y u v coordinates of the orientation point This point is at the intersection of the baseline and pointer of the symbol You can enter coordinates automatically from the Points List See Automatically update coordinates below in this table Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Control Purpose Dip and Dip direction of the orientation point See Orientation data plot symbols for further information Plunge is the dip of the hinge line in the axial surface showing an overall slope of the folded geology You can enter Dip direction automatically from the Points List See
10. D Testing Geomodeller CapelFaust capel faust CF_CretRift_Nav asc 3 Click Next gt to move to next Page Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 144 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Select data type to import Parse CSV file Map CSV columns to data Add a field add Remave Load a ddf File reading parameters Date start et row if Treat consecutive delimiters as one W Skip leading spaces UNASSIGNED 1001271418 715 1600556 5E 1002271418 205 1600547 SE 1003271417 005 1600546 50E 1004271417 165 1600550 0356 1005271416 625 1600551 25E 1006271416 0851600552 E L6 302 04 A With these separators we don t have enough columns We need at least 4columns Wizard Step 2 4 Set the file format to Fixed Columns and select Preview entire file 5 Click Add to add a field then enter the fixed format column positions for each variable Use an editor to obtain the column positions before the import run Do not attempt to edit the automatic column position for last field as this usually corrupts the previous field and turns the previous field rows red Parse CSV file Step 2 of 4 The fields required for the navigation import and their possible data types are listed in the table below Field Description Data type Line The Seismic line identi
11. GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 181 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt 3D Viewer Presentation dialog box Parent topic Use this dialog box to specify the publishing annotations for a 3D view including Viewmenuand title position of title and axis properties dialog boxes q 3D Viewer presentation X Title 1 M Title Font Position a MMMMMl x o v 0 ie o Axis system Jv Axis system J 3D arrow J 3D bounding box Axis Origin Length of axis x 99000 1000 Length 200 Y 1999000 1000 Radius 50 Z 8000 1000 Colour Axis diameter 12 5 Axis graduation Graduation Labels Titles Font Axis Step Decimal number Axis title yf x Vf Apply Close Controls in this dialog box eena T e a C Number of decimal places in axis tick number Note Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 182 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Load Surface Mesh Parent topic You can load triangulated surfaces and volumes as visual layers View menu and dialog boxes Supported formats TSurf GoCAD e Vulcan gt DXF gt BRep Show Orientation Data in 3D Viewer dialog box Parent topic Use this dialog box to select formations whose orientation data points you want to see View menu and in the 3D Viewer You can also specify the appearance of the points
12. Import Export View Window Research Help 2D GIS Data to Section a f i a 20 Geology to Section 2D Section Create 3D Geology d Drillhole d 3 3 Files Collars Surveys Geology Grid and Mesh Seismi i a l AEII BRGM ASCII Format BRGM GDM Format Cee Assay Data into Existing Drillholes e Stepl Select data type to import Browse and select the ASCII file to load then click Next gt A CSV Data Import Steps Select data type to import Step tof O 1 Selectdatatypetoimport Fie to Load 2 Parse CS file 3 Select Calumns to mapt 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 369 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt e Step2 Parse CSV file e Select the correct CSV separator and the Data start at row parameter CSV Data Inport OEE mmen F comma FF Debie quote FF E o0t F 1 Spee M 1 bet Poe PM Sndegute I Comma Fie reading paramebers sta startet row 1 Preview mire fie Ficed columns Treat omane delimiters as one fe Son leading mo He Se eee eee MA T T a F E Reet e Choose any other CSV Data Import wizard options required to correctly parse the incoming file and click Next gt LSV Date Inport Select Columns to Im Step 3 of 3 Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzg
13. Options in these menus Option Description See Save a project and Save As See Project Properties dialog box Project Explorer Formations shortcut menus Parent topic The Project Explorer shortcut menus for Formations generally individual series and Project individual formations enable you to work on those objects at different levels of Explorer erouping El E TutorialA4 E Gad TutorialA4 E E TutorialA4 i 8 i H Formatio aj Formations Eh jag Formations A ij Formations fe ig Faults H i Models EERS Granite i I UpperSerie i f LowerSerie E MW Drillholes InterFace H f Orientati TET Attributes Ay Appearance 8 Delete E S2 TutorialA4 a H BasalSerie tag Formations wL o EH i IntrusiveSeries I B UpperSeries Dy Appearance Options in these menus Option Description Create a formation See Create or Edit Geology Formations dialog box Appearance Edit the appearance of the object or group of objects See Appearance of objects dialog box family Attributes See Edit Geological Formation Attributes dialog box Delete the object or group of objects or data Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 17 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Project Explorer and 2D Viewer Faults shortcut me
14. TCE DriholesFialds Regit _Fe_Regij_RhoTheta_20Dnaw e Toggle the Filled Unit Formation to interpolate e Select a Unit from the Geometry Used drop down Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 319 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt e Select the Variogram Analysis to use from the drop down lists e Normally you would select the Unit that was modelled in the Variogram Analysis for the Filled Unit and Geometry Used e There are Toggles available to select All Units and or to use the Same Variogram Analysis for all the selected Units Formations e Click Next gt to continue to Step 4 Step 4 Interpolated Field and Standard Deviation Field Definition Enter interpolation output names in the Field Name and Standard Deviation Field Name data boxes e Click Finish button to run the interpolation The 8D output grid will be available for visualisation in the Grids and Meshes section of the Explore tree Feld Name FeRegi LNTii Standard Deviation Field Mame gi UVT11 Siy The usual Visualisation options are available in 2D and 3D e Domaining Cross Validation e Select a variable for domain kriging from the Grids and Meshes context menu OR G ua Grids and Meshes ig Nearest Neighbour Analysis G a DrillholesFields Variogram Analysis Y DrillholesFields_Reg1
15. gt The formation lithology index numbers are assigned from the bottom of the Pile upwards as shown below in the red box pg Stratigraphic Pile Viewer Reference Top TOP Ontap OREZ Onlap WASTE Onlap OREI Onlap SUB Onlap pg Color Table 100 a te ie ip Trag EF g fan on Sapa Sy 1 5 0 0 yf oo eel fal 5 T a jj eee 0R Y 600 40 lt 300 etic Sl ST pot wea ri Sh 6m SHS r000 91500 hp Fe Cok Table Gm in ms ORA 1 5 o g ape TEB 7 O0 f 600 ALG iP _ _ EO _ OO jets Doo _ Hi m i von Sh sh SH SB 5 Fe 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 294 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt e Colour LUT Tool showing colour stretch for the above two 3d views with colour bar scale showing values in Fe Adjust Color Curve FeReg1l0_Isol_Ore2 FeReg10lso S0 15 24405567 To 68 8598714 Visibility Clip Data Clip 45 24405567 To 68 85987148 Colour B 1 rainbow2 ransformation Custom 4 Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 295 Contents Help Top q Back gt e Colour LUT Tool and 3D view showing the Fe values masked below 60 Fe a
16. i Variogram Analysis Kriging Domain Kriging Fl PE Gaussian Anamorphosis Transformation ey Gaussian Simulation on a Domain Mesh Grid DrillholesFields Rea 10 Field e Choose the Mesh Grid and Field to be simulated e Chick OK Step 5 Define New Simulated Grid Step 1 in Simulation Dialog e Define the Grid name to hold the new simulated Fields 7 Se m i wrt Se ee kmi Irait y TOC Em ITF 1 Sheps Defne Hew Simulated Grid Grid Definition New Gre Grid Name GnuesSim_ eReg eat BO 3 Define Unit Where Simulanon 4 Define Simulation Parameters Add to an Bastng Grd Grid Fee ideo Step 6 Grid Definition Step 2 in Simulation Dialog Define the Grid neighbourhood for the Simulated grid e Grid Cell Sze Fixed or Variable e 38D limits Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 328 Contents Help Top Contents Help Top lt 4 Back gt Define the Neighbourhood search parameters Maximum Points in neighbourhood The algorithm does a radial search for points from the centre of the cell to be interpolated It stops searching once the Maximum Points limit is reached Limiting the Maximum Points in the neighbourhood minimises smoothing if the local data mean is known to fluctua
17. 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 62 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt 3D GeoModeller main menus Parent topic 3D GeoModeller has the following main menus User interface averwiew Project menu Project toolbar and dialog boxes e Section menu toolbar and dialog boxes e Geology menu and dialog boxes e Model menu toolbar and dialog boxes e Geophysics menu and dialog boxes e Import menu and dialog boxes e Export menu and dialog boxes e View menu and dialog boxes e Window menu and dialog boxes e Help menu and dialog boxes Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 63 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Project menu Project toolbar and dialog boxes Parent topic 3D Use the Project menu to manage 3D GeoModeller data at the project level The GeoModeller Project toolbar contains frequently used options from the File menu E e BE main menus Project Edit Section Geology Model Geophysics Interpolation Import Export View Window Research Help c New Ctrl hy New Propect from Voxet Open trig Close Ctr W Save Ctri 5 Save Ag Auto Save b ao xo Delete Current Propect Delete a Project Print Ctrl P Properties Px ae Language F De G30_RP1_Intrep _Mar3_2012 G3D0_RP1_IntrepS_Mar3_2012 xml D
18. Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 304 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt pot variogram pot 0 uv varlogram 0 dg If both nugget effects are equal to zero we have pot dg C Mod por r dg r C C Mod 0 dg r 3 Giving y pot 0 C Mod por r 0 C Mod 0 0 C Mod pot F y 0 dg C Mod 0 dg r C C Mod 0 dg ry C Mod dg r When the variability of the parameter to study is mainly correlated with the pot coordinate the variogram in the space pot dg 0 is in reality a function of pot and we have In this case we have pure zonal anisotropy and the variogram is pot dg 0 pot C P Mod pot lot General case pot dg 0 pot dg dgy Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 305 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Where dg dg represent respectively the geodesic distance along the u axis and the v axis which are the axes representing the anisotropy in the xy plane dg and dg are the projection on the principal axes u and v of the geodesic distance dg and u and v are the direction of anisotropy on the plane xy rotated with an angle 0 from axis x
19. Help Top 4 Back gt The use of a heuristic model however implies two limitations e The choice is usually not the best one e More importantly This precludes any evaluation of the magnitude of the interpolation error A means to infer the covariance is thus a core issue of that approach Since K cannot be inferred from the potential increments it is inferred is from the gradient data This is possible because the covariances of the partial derivatives can be derived from assuming a potential field In the case of an isotropic covariance K h which for simplicity will be denoted K r as a function of r h the covariance of say 0OT x u and 0T xth dou is K h when h is parallel to the u axis K h 1h when h is orthogonal to the u axis Isotropy vs anisotropy The assumption of an isotropic covariance model is the standard starting position It can become too restrictive and with V1 3 3D GeoModeller options for anisotropy are more available This allows you to model more reliably thinner bodies such as dykes In practice the covariance K h is the sum of several cubic components Kp h each one possibly displaying a zonal or geometric anisotropy With the initial formulation of this capability the main anisotropy axes u v w are common to all the components Current development work allows for each geological series to have its own definition of anisotropy Using the formulae for the s
20. Hexahedrons 3D These grids are used to represent 3D fields The unique regular hexahedron is the cube This is the most common element in GeoModeller 3D grids Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt Contents Help Top GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top Grid types in 2D or 3D e Regular grids e Semi Regular grids Non regular unstructured grids Unstructured Regular grid Mesh and Grid Topological Structure Mesh and Grid Topology description 3D GeoModeller Reference 239 q Back gt Semi regular grid Structured manifold and regular 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 240 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Mesh and Grid Examples amp Application Flow Chart Mesh and Grid Types amp Application Examples PointSetTopology Scattered data points 2D 3D EdgeSetTopology QuadSetTopology Geophysics DTM Section 3D Shanes Fault Network HexahedronSetTopology TetrahedralSetTopology Column Model semi Regular3DGndTopology 3D Volumic Mesh Rock Properties Inversion result Temperature Mesh and Grid element field datatypes implemented in mesh grid objects Integer Real Boolean String Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald a
21. see CSV data import wizard Report Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 155 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt CSV data import wizard Parse import file Parent topic Use this page to specify the field and text delimiters and decimal separator in the CSV data r import data and the spaces and records to skip at the beginning of lines and of the OPOLU ER file 3D GeoModeller the resulting interpretation of the data in a table 3P CSV Data Import xj Steps Parse CSV file Step 2 of 4 1 Select data type to import CSV separator Text qualifiers Decimal separator 2 Parse CSV file 3 Map CSV colums to data FF t Tabulation I Semiclon M E T S FF JDouble Quote F L 1Dot structure 4 Map geologic objects in project M Space M Dot J Other i I Single Quote I Comma data File reading parameters Data start at row 4 J Treat consecutive delimiters as one JV Skip leading spaces North Elevation Geology 5896887 50 307 69 UpperMansfield a 5896072 00 301 02 UpperMansfield 5895341 50 307 08 UpperMansfield M 5894621 50 333 07 UpperMansfield 5894113 00 370 92 UpperM 5892980 00 71 37 UoperMansfield_ 5892450 50 360 05 UpperMansfield 5891497 50 339 43 Uppe sfiel 5891233 00 337 34 Upper 5890152 50 304 99 Uppe sfiel 5888809 00 281 69 Upper 5887623 00 296 66 Upper sfiel
22. 2 Ged Definition 4 interpolated Field and Standard Deviation Field Pek haere Variogram Analysis Parent topic e Selecting variogram analysis opens a wizard which takes the user through the Mesh and Grid steps required to produce a sensible variogram model prior to running the Field kriging interpolators Interpolation The wizard contains four steps e Selection of the variogram analysis type The user can modify an existing analysis or create a new one The analysis can be saved as an attribute of a field of a mesh of vertices We define the maximum radius to compute the pairs for building the variogram and the coordinate space within which the variogram will be computed In 2D we can work in x y or in r sqrt x 2 y 2 In 3D we can work in x y in this case we don t take into account the z coordinate or Inr sqrt x 2 y 2 z 2 For the moment the x y z analysis user interface is not implemented and is turned off or e using the space coordinate of a potential or e using the space coordinate of the potential plus curvilinear distance along the potential e Computation of the variogram e Analysis Fitting of the variogram model e Saving the analysis Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 284 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt gt Step 1 New Variogram Analysis e Choose a
23. 2D Viewer Geology orientation data shortcut menu e Faults Project Explorer and 2D Viewer Faults shortcut menus Not available from 2D Viewer Create or Edit Faults dialog box e Drillholes Project Explorer and 2D Viewer Drillholes shortcut menus e Axial surfaces 2D Viewer Axial surface shortcut menu e Axial surface orientation data 2D Viewer Axial surface orientation data shortcut menu Hinge lines 2D Viewer Hinge line shortcut menu 2D Viewer Geology data shortcut menu Parent topic 2D The geology data shortcut menu appears when you right click a set of geology data Viewershortcut that is visible in the 2D Viewer It enables you to edit and configure the set of data menus LowerCover E Edit D Fip Associated Dip Direction 3 Delete TEY Attributes 2 Appearance Options in this menu Option Description Edt 8822 see Create or Edit Geology Data dialog box Flip Associated Dip If the data has associated orientation data that is not Direction Orthogonal Reverse the order of points This reverses the automatically calculated orientation data See Create or Edit Geology Data dialog box for further explanation Delete the object or data Edit the attributes of the associated formation See Create or Edit Geology Formations dialog box Appearance Edit the appearance of the associated formation See Appearance of objects dialog box family Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp De
24. Contents Help Top The Points List contents are not part of the geology observations though they may be a copy of an observation or set of observations They are simply a list of points They are linked together in an order that you can reverse or rearrange The order affects The way 3D GeoModeller displays the points gt The way 3D GeoModeller converts them or some of them to observation points on the section In the 2D Viewer display e 3D GeoModeller shows line segments between points in the display but does not use them when computing the geological model e The Points List has a current point or selected point shown by the red circle See How the Points List coordinates with the 2D Viewer for details To insert new points navigate to the required location then click to insert after the current selected point You cannot move points directly To move a point insert a new point and then find and delete the incorrect point In general when the points in the Points List have been used for some purpose such as being used to enter geology observations 3D GeoModeller resets the Points List to empty those points that were in the edit layer are now cleared away Otherwise to clear the list use the trash can icon J 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top Points List too Parent topic Points
25. Define as an horizontal plane K i ay Properties P ri Create a Section from its Trace Ctrl T FF Create a Horizontal Section Ctrl U as gjsiaji ty Eh 4 ao Regenerate all section intersections Y Create Section Map See the following table for an overview of the Section menu Option Description Teei keys Topography gt See Load Topography from a DTM dialog CT rR Load from a DTM box Topography gt See Define Topography as an Horizontal CTRL U Define as a Plane dialog box horizontal plane Topography gt See Topography Properties dialog box Properties Create a Sector See Create a Section from its Trace dialog from its Trace box Create a See Create a Horizontal Section dialog box amp Horizontal Sector Regenerate all Occasionally after you have added new section data 3D GeoModeller may not fully intersection update the relationships between sections If the relationships do not appear correctly choose this option to regenerate them map Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top Load Topography from a DTM dialog box Use this dialog box to import the Digital Terrain Model DTM for the Project and create the Project s SurfaceTopography Section Parent topic Section menu toolbar and dialog boxes Contents Help Top 3D GeoModeller Reference 77 4 Back g
26. Gedlogicallog Geological Model Misfit 0 20 ata ee Remove Interval Split Interval Add Orientation Data Unrelax this Interface TOP OREZ The resulting Formation change is shown below in the first diagram describing the Remove Interval operation 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 37 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt e Remove Interval Double click next to the Lithology interval and select Remove Interval the current Formation will be cleared from the drillhole log in both right and left panels as shown in the second diagram below DrillholeS45 at X 1210 Y 1568 Geological Log Geological Model Misfit 0 28 a gt o 4 20 30 a ba 80 70 T 100 KT Remove Interval 120 Split Interval ie Add Orientation Data pi Unrelax this Interface TOP ORE2 150 120 170 180 120 200 210 DrillholeS45 at X 1210 Y 1568 Geological Log Geological Model Misfit 0 28 age iat lt 3 al q g A 10 0 4 6 10 5 p i Log Intervals S88 esse ses Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 38 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt e Split Interval Split an existing Lithology interval also used to Add an interval e Double click in the Model User Defin
27. Top 4 Back gt e Now choose the numeric fields to import move slider left to expose numeric columns in the upper pane and Click on DM DENS WET CALC in the Columns list Select Columns to Import Step 3 of 3 e Choose Field in the Treat as drop down list and complete the Field Properties pane dialog boxes DM _ViGHT_WET_I DM _VWiGHT_WET_T DM_HUM_PC DM DENS WET_C DM_DENS_DRY_CI DM_DATE Edit the Name of imported field to be as brief as possible ie Density Enter a Description of imported field ie Wet Density e Choose a field datatype Type from the drop down list be careful not to truncate your data Enter the data Units ie g cc kg m Enter the Null value for undefined unmeasured intervals ie 999 leave blank if represented by an empty string in the csv file ie Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 372 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt e Click Finish at the bottom of the main dialog to commence the Import On completion a Results report dialog will appear listing the holes for which the numeric data was imported and any problems encountered ie holes with numeric data which do not exist in the current project Hoke does not exist otal Eo PPC_CIR C_DHODO33 C CIRC DHODI J PFC CRC DHOO032 Hole does not eist Loaded Losded e Click Clos
28. VTKUnstructuredGrid file format 2D grids EKRMapper ASCII ESRI Geosoft grd Geosoft gxf Semi VTK regular 3D grids GoCAD Voxet CSV Voxet GoCAD sgrid semi regular UBC Noddy VTK rectilinear grid semi regular or regular Triangulations GoCAD Tsurf AutoCAD dxf CSV with Metadata VTK UnstructuredGrid file format Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 249 Contents Help Top Contents Help Top q Back gt Comma separated Values CSV with Metadata inti Output Directory Output Directory Input Mesh Grid Output Format Input Mesh Grid z Case4_ runi 30 initial Output Format fami sgrid K rectilinear grid semi regular or regular Output Name Case4 runi _3D_initial The sgrid format is presented as the default format for Semi Regular or Irregular 3D grids whereas the Gocad Voxet format is the default format for Regular 3D grids 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 250 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Input Mesh Grid z BIF Output Format CSV with Metadata Comma separated Values CSV with Metadata Output Directory Autocad DXE VWTKUnstructuredcrid File Format All supported Mesh Grid export formats are fully documented in t
29. You can project data onto a nearby section so that you can see it Use this dialog box to select 3 Project Data Onto Sections xX The sections onto which to project the data The formations whose data you want to project The distance from the section beyond which 3D GeoModeller will not project data The type of data to project Sections Geology Formations and Faults E Sw NE Fault Select All Deselect All Invert Select All Deselect All Invert Parameters Maximum distance of projection 10 Data to Project J from 2D Sections J from Hingelines J from Drillhole Contacts J from 30 Points Iv from Drillhole Trace _P i vox wf Apply Close 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 128 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Controls in this dialog box Control Purpose Sections onto which you can visually project data Select one or more Geology formations Geology formations and faults whose data you can and faults visually project onto sections Select one or more Maximum distance of Data needs to be within this distance of the section to be projection visually projected Data to project Types of data to project Select the data types using the check boxes Compare Model with Drillhole Observations dialog box Parent topic Use this dialog box to set parameters f
30. a a te Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 267 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt e Appearance The Appearance Menu dialog provides the following Mesh and Grid functions 2 Appearance of Field FeReglOPot Appearance Colour Curve Transparency Display Made Vertex Symbol Size i vertex Symbol Line Width Line Type Sold Grid ng a of u Tsolines a a of Isalinas a Cr Ee e Colour Curve opens the Colour lookup table tool Adjust Color Curve dialog which is normally accessed from the Field context menu or from the Field Visualisation Manager e Transparency controls the transparency of a mesh in the 3D viewer or a grid projected to section and displayed in the 3D viewer It does not function in the 2D Viewer e Display Mode changes the display of a triangular mesh from points nodes to a wireframe It has no effect on the display of a vertex mesh which is currently fixed to the shading mode e Vertex Symbol Size Changes the point size of a triangular mesh when it is in the Points Display Mode e Vertex Symbol sets the vertex symbol used to display points The Line options and the Gridding isolines do not work in the Mesh and Grid context e Edit Colour and Clips e Opens the Colour lookup table tool Adjust Color Curve dialog The main functions of this tool
31. for example Faults to interpolate Faults available for the model calculation If Faults only is checked you can select the faults to include in the model calculation Select click the faults that you want to include in the model computation or use Select All Hold down SHIFT or CTRL in the normal Windows manner to select a range or number of separate faults If Faults only is not checked 3D GeoModeller automatically includes faults were appropriate and you cannot select or deselect them individually Select All Deselect If Faults only is checked use these buttons to select all or All deselect all faults Sections to take into Sections available for the model calculation account Select click the sections that you want to include in the model calculation or use Select All Hold down SHIFT or CTRL in the normal Windows manner to select a range or number of separate sections As you select and deselect sections 3D GeoModeller includes or excludes faults and series according to their presence in the sections that you are selecting SelectAll Include all sections in the model calculation Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 119 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Control Purpose Model limits Limits of the model calculation space in the project Specify the extents xMin xMax yMin yMax ZMin Yo
32. formations using filled polygons in their assigned colours Formations available for plotting See How to select items from a list Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 122 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Control Purpose When checked 3D GeoModeller plots The interface or contact lines of the selected geology formations in the assigned colours of the formations according to the Top or Bottom setting for the series to which they belong See Create or Edit Geology Series and the Stratigraphic Pile dialog box The selected faults in their assigned colours Formations Faults Formations and faults available for plotting See How to select items from a list Show trend lines When checked 3D GeoModeller plots geology trend lines for the selected series in the assigned colours of the formations through which they pass Trend lines are contours based on the model s isopotential curves Number of trend lines Specify the number of trend lines to plot for each series Show within series When checked 3D GeoModeller plots trend lines only within the series to which they belong Show everywhere When checked 3D GeoModeller plots the specified number of trend lines for each selected series but spreads them evenly through the whole plot area Series available for trend line plotting See How to selec
33. g cm ESR hormal 5 0 100 xMin 25700 00 xMax 31000 00 m Puserot YMin 59500 00 YMax 61200 00 m Puserants Min 100 00 Max 620 00 m Use Foints ve Ede The mesh grid is created from the current computed model pile and is randomly initialised using the geophysical properties and statistical distribution defined for each formation Mode Mono Bi Tri Modal Population Mean Standard deviation and Statistical law Normal Log normal Dansty Mode Mode 2 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 245 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt From Meshes and Grids Context Menu Parent topic Right clicking on the Meshes and Grids menu in the Explore tree produces the Mesh Grid following dialog of choices Operations ata Meshes and Grids J Hide All Views U Create Grid with Zero Value Field ioport ES 2D 3D Observations Delete 4 20 Grid te JD Grid Voxels all Triangulations e Hide All Views e Clears from view any meshes or grids displayed in the 2D or 3D viewers e Create Grid with Zero Value Field e creates a 2D grid at the resolution defined and fills it with zero s Useful as a starting point for a new computation e Import Import external or internal meshes and grids in a variety of formats Supported formats are fully documented in
34. model no matter how far away an observation may be However it 1s now recognized that the majority of the influence is from those observations that are local to that part of your model This turns out to be a local radial basis interpolator using classical geostatistics A very similar outcome can also be arrived at with alternate mathematical thinking One candidate is the use of the biharmonic equation and thin plate theory from engineering science to interpolate the geology This can be easily formuated as a radial basis function In this case there is no attempt to honour observed characteristics of how geology bodies should be modeled just the condition that all observed contacts are honoured Where there are many observations of geological contacts say in an in mine context with lots of bore holes this method will produce a satisfactory prediction of each geological contact surface Surface vs Volume The important point to make here is that one should interpolate volumes rather than surfaces and this is central to the 3D GeoModeller potential field method Thin plate surface interpolations do not naturally have this property As the number of observations become sparser the breakdown in being able to produce realistic geological bodies will become very pronounced for the thin plate spline methods There is no natural constraint to have Top and Bottom surfaces for a unit follow the same trends if using surface splining Not coinci
35. rigqgd Ig Pap dd tex II i piel F Kl rid i r 1 l Jog J I I 1 r 1 i i i Fi roy l T r Pi a I P r r 1 Figure 2 representation of a geological model by combination and truncations of several potential fields Internal structures are represented by a set of isovalues of these fields Computing distance When the two points A and B are on two different isovalues of the potential field for example potA and potB there are two ways to define the dg A B coordinate e We can define dg A B as the distance along the isovalue potM where e potM potA potB 2 If we call Am the projection of the point A on the isovalue potM and Bm the projection of the point B on the isovalue potM We can define dg A B as the value gt dg Am Bm Alternatively if we call Ab the projection of the point A on the isovalue potB and Ba the projection of the point B on the isovalue potA e We can define dg A B as the mean of the two distances dg Ab B and dg A Ba The first solution needs the computation of two projections and one distance along an isovalue the second one needs the computation of two projections and two distances along two isovalues Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 302 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Here we will work on the first solution which requires less computation ti
36. the sequence entered except for the current point and the point before it To hide the lines joining each pair of points set the slider to Off Current point and previous line segment remain unchanged Colour and thickness of spline line showing the smooth curve through the sequence of points To hide the spline line set the slider to Off Spline degree Degree of spline in spline line Degree 1 follows the lines exactly and is not visible as a separate line in the display Degrees 2 5 show smooth curves of increasing generality higher degrees following the lines less closely 3D display Show in 3D Viewer When checked 3D GeoModeller displays the points and lines in the 3D Viewer Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 192 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Window menu and dialog boxes Parenttopic 3D The Window menu has options for the 3D GeoModeller workspace and user GeoModeller interface main menus Window Help Reset workspace Restore last workspace Manage workspace Show Keyboard Shortcuts ty Show Popup Tips Again Wr Show research menu See the following table for an overview of the Window menu Reset workspace Reset the workspace so that the 2D Viewer and 3D Viewer are of equal size and the 2D Viewer contains the Topography Restore last Reorganise the workspace to match its layout
37. 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 21 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt The following functions are available from the main Explore gt Drillholes gt DrillholeName context menu ie RightClick on an individual drillhole in the list Explore SS New Project Formations TH Dykes 2 at Faults A Sections wy Drilholes Fih oF ar ff Hide Hide F 7 ro Wireframe lt a gt Shading 2 F Edit Appearance a 2 Appearance amp Properties Delete Delete es Properties k Properties Appearance of Drillhcles i Mi pect oS Radius P Options in the individual Drillhole context menu Option Description Show Hide See Common shortcut menu options Shading Wireframe See Common shortcut menu options Appearance Accessible in Shading Mode only change the Drillhole radius in the 3D Viewer See Appearance of Drillholes dialog box Edit Edit an individual drillhole Delete all drillholes from the project Display the selected drillhole in the Drillhole Viewer Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 22 Contents Help Top lt 4 Back gt The following functions are available from the context menu of a sel
38. Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 52 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Drillhole properties dialog box Parent topic 2D The Drillhole Properties dialog box appears when you choose Properties from a Viewer shortcut drillholes shortcut menu menus 3 Drillhole Properties X Drilhole DDH3 em e e roe eee O ae e m 5 400 ve E aoM Bottom Controls in this dialog box From To From is the distance down the drillhole from the collar to the start of the interval To is the distance down the drillhole from the collar to the end of the interval Lithology The formation name for the interval From To Type Nature of the From or To data Top Top contact of formation Bottom Bottom contact of formation Constraint Not a top or bottom contact of a formation Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 53 Contents Help Top Points List lt 4 Back gt Parent topic In this section User interface overview Introduction to the Points List Points List toolbar docked Points List Editor floated Importing GIS and other binary located data Points table How the Points List coordinates with the 2D Viewer Editing geological data with the Points List In other sections Poi
39. I Select Background paint Select Orientation Horizontal DrillholeS45 at X 1210 Y 1568 Feological Log Geological Model Misit 025 Geology Elodel Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 35 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt e Other Set the Drillhole log Background paint colour see dark erey background in the example above Series Paint No editor implemented Series Stroke No editor implemented Series Outline Paint No editor implemented Series Outline Stroke No editor implemented Cancel Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top 3D GeoModeller Reference 36 4 Back gt Menu options available when double click in the Geology Model User Defined or Assay Field columns are described in detail below e Edit the Formation for a From To Interval e Double click in the Model User Defined or Assay log columns to choose an interval A dialog will open as shown above and a Red line will appear in the Geology column to highlight the depth interval selected Right click on the top dialog menu and select the new Formation ie ORE2 gt SUB Drillhole logs 120 Depth 5 Contents Help Top DrillholeS45 at X 1210 Y 1568
40. Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 153 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt a be UET A G ah 3D view of horizon orientations Dip Dip Direction computed at section intersections for the Basement horizon Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 154 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt CSV data import wizard Parent topic Use the CSV data import wizard to import data in ASCII columns equivalent to the Import menu comma separated value CSV format and dialog hoses e Stepl Browse to datafile to import Select data type to import Step 1 of 4 Select data type to import File to Load Parse CSV fle Map CSY colums to data structure Hap ic objects in Jerth_ Inversion Training 4 TUTORIAL_E_ PROJECTS Tutorial ES Data Tops _MewGranite csy Browse Import steps The wizard steps you through the import enabling you to 1 Parse import files see CSV data import wizard Parse import file 2 Map import fields to project fields see CSV data import wizard Map import fields to project fields 3 Ifyou are projecting 3D data onto sections Select sections on which to project data see CSV data import wizard Select sections for projecting data 4 Create and select objects whose associated data you want to import see CSV data import wizard Create and select objects to receive data 5 View a report of the import
41. Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 95 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Create or Edit Geology Data dialog box Parent topic Use the Create or Edit Geology Data dialog box to Geol l l e dislos e Create a set of geology contact points from the points in the Points List boxes Set the properties of a set of geology contact points q Edit geology data X Geological Formations and Faults LowerCover Observation ID Section Section ka Provenance Unspecified ka Associated orientation data i Associated Compute Orthogonal f Dip Constant Dip Plunge Dip and Direction Dip 0 Direction 0 Dip and Dip direction constant Dip 20 Direction D Polarity i Normal Reverse Overturn Automatically re edit Help yf Edit Fd close When you create a set of geology contact points 3D GeoModeller takes them from the Points List Before When you edit a set of geology contact points 3D GeoModeller loads them into the Points List When you choose Edit 3D GeoModeller replaces the set of points with the ones from the Points List Before you choose Edit you can edit the points using the Points List Editor See Editing geological data with the Points List for more information If you are working on a number of different sets of geology contact data you can leave this dialog box open in your 3D GeoModeller works
42. Variogram Analysis Kriging d Domain Kriging I Gaussian Simulation gt Step 1 New Variogram Analysis e Choose a new variogram analysis or modify an existing variogram model e Choose from the two Domain variogram types e Potential thickness t quick to calculate The distance between two points perpendicular to the potential ie the absolute value of the difference between pot A and pot B ref pot distance P251 e uv potential u v and thickness slow to calculate Incorporates the distance and direction along the potential as well as the thickness two separate variograms ref TBD e Choose the Maximum Radius for the neighbourhood search Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 312 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt ia feed Medify Name Dr hokiFiekt Regi Fe Reg ii_AhoTheta aren Varboapran Chelew thor Type of Warko Fobertal B fire polii e Step 2 Compute Variogram e Select Series or Unit Constraints e Select one Series or Unit Formation from the list ORE2 Alternatively toggle No Constraints e When done click on Compute to calculate the variogram map This is a very cpu intensive process and takes a long time to compute depending on the search radius and the number of observation points in the model The distances between the points must be computed in the uv pot
43. a Misfit estimate of the Logged versus Modelled geology ig Crillhole Properties 5415 Unithole Edit Format Help eae a DrillholeS45 at X 1210 Y 1568 Gestegical Log iieclogical Model Misi 0 28 0 Ee The Drillhole Properties Viewer has a set of dropdown menus which provide the following functionality The Help menu is inactive Drillhole Properties 345 Drillholes Edit Format Help Undo Single View Load closed Delete Generalize Fields Colour Save Save a5 Print Exit Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 24 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Options in the Drillhole Properties menus Option Description Drillholes gt Open a Drillhole log for the selected drillhole Drillholes gt Load Load gt Select a Drillhole Drillholes gt Select Drillhole within specified distance of the current drillhole Load closed Drillholes gt Load Closed gt Select a Drillhole within Range Drillholes gt Inactive in this Mode See Drillhole Edit Save an interactive Save Edit operation Drillholes gt Save the current Drillhole log to a PNG file Save as Drillholes gt Print the current drillhole log view to the selected Printer Print Drillholes gt Exit Exit from the current drillhole properties viewer Edit gt Undo Inactive in this Mode
44. amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 195 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Help menu and dialog boxes Parent topic 3D The Help menu has options for viewing the 3D GeoModeller manual website GeoModeller readme licence and version Main menus Help a Manual amp Tutorial PDF Licence Manager View ReadMe GeoModeller Website About See the following table for an overview of the Help menu Manual and tutorial PDF See User manual and tutorials View ReadMe Choose this option to view the 3D GeoModeller readme file which contains installation and configuration instructions and last minute updates GeoModeller website Choose this option to visit the 3D GeoModeller website http www geomodeller com About See About 3D GeoModeller dialog box User manual and tutorials Parent topic The PDF version of the user manual contains all reference instructions and case Helpmenuand tudy tutorials The same reference information for 3D GeoModeller windows and a ae dialog boxes also appears as context sensitive help when you press F1 or choose a Help button Fob g ologique 3D GeoModeller software 3D GeoModeller User Manual and Tutorials 15 May 2009 Copyright and acknowledgmants 3D GeoModeller Reference 3D GeoModeller Operations 3D GeoMfodeller Forward modelling and inversion 3D GeoModeller Forward modelling and Inversion README 3D GeoModeller Forward mo
45. amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 51 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt 2D Viewer Axial surface orientation data shortcut menu Parent topic 2D The axial surface orientation data shortcut menu appears when you right click an Viewershortcut axjal surface orientation data point that is visible in the 2D Viewer It enables you to menus edit and configure the point y mrfaxial Dip 40 towards 35 El Edit 8 Delete E Appearance Options in this menu Option Description See Create or Edit Axial Surface Orientation Data dialog box Delete the object or data Appearance Edit the appearance of the associated axial series See Appearance of objects dialog box family 2D Viewer Hinge line shortcut menu Parent topic 2D The hinge line data shortcut menu appears when you right click a set of hinge line Viewershortcut data that is visible in the 2D Viewer It enables you to edit and configure the set of menus data i MiddleCover i E Edit Delete TET Attributes Dy Appearance Options in this menu Option Description Edt 8 2 See Create or Edit Hinge Line Data dialog box Delete the object or data Edit the attributes of the associated formation See Edit Geological Formation Attributes dialog box Appearance Edit the appearance of the associated formation See Appearance of objects dialog box family Contents
46. an alternative DTM Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 204 Contents Help Top q Back gt Spatial extent DTM import checks Parent topic How 3D GeoModeller imports the DTM Contents Help Top 3D GeoModeller performs spatial extents checking when importing a DTM toa project as follows 1 Ifthe DTM does not intersect the project extents 3D GeoModeller warns you and does not perform the import 3D GeoModeller displays feedback on the actual DTM extents compared to the project extents lt E Load topography fro na DTP x Name SurfaceTopography Filename 21TM Geothermal_SRTM_NZMG_new ers Browse Projection NZGD49 New Zealand Map Grid Unit m Project bounding box AAR xMin 1630000 xMax 1750000 m yMin 6210000 YMax 6350000 m zMin 10000 zMax 1000 m Grid bounding box xMin Max 2749975 m Yin YMax 6349975 M x cell size 50 Y cell size 50 m No of points on X 2400 No of points on 2800 E x This DEM does not intersect your Geomodeller project Cannot proceed with import ate 0 co Description pam aN The bounds of your DEM are Topography of the model Mink 2630025 Maxx 2749975 Mint 6210025 Max 6349975 p Help a OK x Close a i 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Asso
47. and heat production rate distribution laws for each formation Seismic Velocity distribution law for each formation Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt 3D GeoModeller Reference 132 GeoModeller User Manual 4 Back gt Contents Help Top Import menu and dialog boxes Parent topic 3D Use Import menu items illustrated below to import data from supported formats into GeoModeller your 3D GeoModeller project Main menus Contacts Structure BRGM Contacts MIF CSV Y Orientations CSV Fi Interfaces bi Orientations Apparent Dips te Dykes with Topography as Depth Reference 3D Interface and Project to Sections Import 3D Onentation and Project to Sections 2 2D GIS Data to Section 3D Geokar bo Section t 333 3 Files Collars Surveys Geology 30 Geology b BRGM ASCI Format 2D Section Create w BROM GDM Format Drillhole 333 Assay Data into Existing Drillholes Grd and Mesh E GeoSciML Borehole Seismic E gt 2D 3D Observations 9 2D Grid tall Triangulations ee 3D Grid Voxels Seismic Navigations Seismic Horizons Micro sermic Micro sermmic Flow Data Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top 3D GeoModeller Reference 133 q Back gt See the following table for an overview of the Import menu Control Import 2D GIS
48. and y If we have a geometric anisotropy on the plane xy and zonal anisotropy along the pot coordinates and two different nugget effects for the pot coordinate Cy and the xy plane Cy dg the variogram will be y pot dg dg Cy C Cy Mod pot r 20 00 CP C CE yMod pot Vee AE Vagus AE y Fagy Coe 0 C2 C Mod 0 dg Tau dg Tap y pot dg dg CP Mod pot r a dZu Nagy dE Tan C C Mod 0 dg rz dz 4 In case where nugget effect is null we will have y pot dg dg C Mod pot r dz Tag dz Tap C C Mod 0 dz r4 d2 Tag Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 306 Contents Help Top Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Filling physical properties using pot dg 0 space We use regular grids as support for the kriging Any kind of grid or mesh could be used since kriging properties are independent of the supporting grid and refer directly to the implicit formulation of the model Tetrahedral meshing of multi volumes described by implicit functions with discontinuities is now a well addressed problem in the frame of De launay triangulation Boissonnat et al 2008 Boltcheva et al 2009 We propose to further use this technique in our particular case since most tools for simulation can use tetrahedrons As an examp
49. anisotropy Anisotropic Azimuth gt Pitch zene C ae Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 221 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt The following illustrations show the model in 3D perspective looking north west and views of the front looking north top and right looking west 3D axial view north west Front looking north Top looking down Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 222 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt oS aS QHx eens Right looking west Interpolation example 6 Anisotropic with Azimuth and Dip Rotation Parent topic In this example the Y axis has a 90 clockwise rotation Azimuth a 30 Dip and a Model larger Y range 6000 m interpolation parameters The following illustrations show the model in 3D perspective looking north west and views of the front looking north top and right looking west Aase Ouse nae 3D axial view north west Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 223 Contents Help Top q Back gt Front looking north Top looking down Right looking west Contents Help Top 2013 BRG
50. any number of navigation data files or horizon files Horizon Input Data The horizon input file format is very similar to that used in the navigation step and both Navigation and Horizon data can be in the same file It is a flat ASCII fixed width file with the LINE ID and SHOTPOINT columns followed by N columns for the horizon pick depths where N is the number of horizons As with the navigation data all picks for a line must be contained within the one file In other words data along a line may not be split across several files However there may be several input files each with different seismic lines 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 149 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt 1 Tocommence the import of horizon pick data choose Import gt Seismic gt Seismic Horizons option from the 3D Geomodeller main menu and select the fixed format ascii horizon file to import The GeoModeller project containing the previously imported Navigation data and the generated seismic line sections must be open Wizard Step 1 ype to im Step 1 of 4 Iy cet datatype to mpor File to Load Parse CSV Map CSV colums to data i i s E E i structure hte Een Sn Biel p E E Pa 2 Click Next gt to move to next Page i CSV Data Im ot sei srt I arzon Add a Field Atty pteme sn Load a DDF File reading parameters Data start at r
51. applications are sequential Gaussian simulation for continuous variables like porosity and sequential indicator simulation for categorical variables like facies The basic idea of sequential Gaussian simulation SGS is very simple Recall that kriging gives us an estimate of both the mean and standard deviation of the variable at each grid node meaning we can represent the variable at each grid node asa random variable following a normal Gaussian distribution Rather than choose the mean as the estimate at each node SGS chooses a random deviate from this normal distribution selected according to a uniform random number representing the probability level The basic steps in SGS algorithm are listed below Deustch C V Journel 1992 e Calculate a histogram and summary statistics of the raw data Transform data into Gaussian space Gaussian Anamorphosis e Calculate variogram model of Gaussian transformed data e Define a grid to contain the simulation results e Generate a random path through the grid nodes e Visit the first node along the path and use kriging to estimate a mean and standard deviation for the variable at that node based on surrounding data values e Select a value at random from the corresponding normal distribution and set the variable value at that node to that number e Visit each successive node in the random path and repeat the process including previously simulated nodes as data values in the kriging proce
52. are e Colour Choose a colour lookup table from the drop down list e Data Clip Manually adjust the data range for the colour mapping using the numeric Data Clip boxes e Data Clip Auto adjust the data range using a population clip from drop down list e Graphics window Manually adjust the colour mapping by dragging points on the transform line until the required colour distribution is reached Transformation Use an automatic colour stretch such as Linear Histogram Equalisation Step user sets number of steps and LogNormal e Visibility Clip Set the visible data limits of the display by choosing a population clip from the drop down list or by typing the min max values in the numeric data boxes this is useful for looking at data with upper and or lower cutoffs applied Data outside the chosen clip range is removed from the display Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 268 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt ve FeReglOPot FeReg10 Pot T 23 49963763 20 20 30 40 42 20 a2 60 Data Clip Data Limits 18 92217445 To 68 62034607 18 92217445 To 68 62034607 e Data Limits and Visibility Clip Drop Down list Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 269 Contents Help To
53. as GeoTIFF for easy use in most GIS and Remote Sensing software applications In addition a binary Data Mask file is available for download allowing you to identify the areas within each DEM that have been interpolated Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 208 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Model interpolation parameters Parent topic 3D GeoModeller Reference This section explains how you can control the way 3D GeoModeller interpolates data and includes examples For details about how to set interpolation parameters in 3D GeoModeller see Model Interpolation Parameters dialog box In this section e Introduction to interpolation concepts and parameters e Interpolation examples Introduction Interpolation example 1 Isotropic Interpolation example 2 Anisotropic No Axes Rotation Limited Z range e Interpolation example 3 Anisotropic No Axes Rotation Large Z Range Interpolation example 4 Anisotropic no Axes Rotation Large X Range Interpolation example 5 Anisotropic No Axes Rotation Large X amp Z Range e Interpolation example 6 Anisotropic with Azimuth and Dip Rotation Interpolation example 7 Anisotropic with Azimuth Dip and Pitch Rotation Interpolation example 8 Using Anisotropy to connect widely spaced outcrop data e Notes about interpolation anisotropy Intro
54. cell centroid values of the grid extremities 3D GeoModeller dispays this for your information You cannot edit it here Cell size of the grid cells in the X east and Y north directions respectively 3D GeoModeller dispays this for your information You cannot edit it here Number of grid cells in the X east and Y north directions respectively according to the subsampling rate that you specified 3D GeoModeller dispays this for your information You cannot edit it here Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top Contents Help Top Control Subsampling Rate Subsampling Output Description 3D GeoModeller Reference 79 4 Back gt Purpose By default 3D GeoModeller subsamples a DTM grid to a resolution of approximately 100 x 100 grid cells in the East and North directions Rate specifies the subsampling interval in terms of number of grid cells 3D GeoModeller uses only every nth grid cell where n is the specified Rate to create the surface topography section Note During import by default 3D GeoModeller subsamples an imported DTM to a resolution of 100 x 100 cells It does this for performance reasons but this action can seriously degrade DTM quality You can override this by adjusting decreasing the parameter We recommend that you do not exceed a resolution of 250 x 250 cells To
55. computed a mathematical model from the geology and structural data of your project you can build various forms of 3D shapes of the model geology for each of the formations of the project When built these 3D shapes will be rendered in the 3D Viewer see 3D Viewer The displayed shapes will vary according to the type of 3D shape built 8D Volumes for example will be rendered as closed volumes for each formation each defined by triangulated surfaces Tips for faster model plotting Parenttopic 3D A large project that contains a lot of data may take time to plot These tips will help GeoModeller you reduce the time required Operations e Only plot on the section intersections This may give you a satisfactory view of the model See the option in Model menu toolbar and dialog boxes e Limit the plotted area See the Plotting limits controls in Plot the Model Settings dialog box e Reduce the density of imported GIS and binary located data See Filtering threshold in Importing GIS and other binary located data Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 348 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Geophysics operations Parent topic 3D For reference information about this area see Geophysics menu and dialog boxes GeoModeller Operations In this section Defining physical properties for a forma
56. currently in use for the Field profile column When the Appearance Editor is reopened for a chosen field then the Vertex Symbol reverts to its default type in the Field column display Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 31 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt e Hide Display a Numeric profile Right Click on Assay field and select Hide Display Histogram Histogram Hide e Display Appearance Appearance Delete this Field Delete this Field e Histogram Calculate and Display the histogram of a Drillhole numeric field Right Click on Field and select Histogram The histogram and summary statistics for the selected field in the current drillhole are displayed Histogram Hide Appearance Delete this Field gt E Ti T k a ra T a gi Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top 3D GeoModeller Reference 32 4 Back gt Drillhole logs Right Side Panel columns Drillhole interactive editing in the right side panels of Drillhole Properties of the Drillhole Properties dialog by left right mouse clicks and context menu selection supports the following operations e Right Click Menu
57. data enables the exchange of data between File formats several 3D GeoModeller projects It is an ASCII file and contains structural data organised in the following manner SSS SSS SS a a Start of file lt integer gt INTERFACES INTERFACE lt string gt lt string gt lt integer gt POINTS lt real gt lt real gt lt integer gt ASSOCIATEDORIENTATIONS lt real gt lt real gt lt real gt lt real gt lt integer gt lt string gt lt integer gt FOLIATIONS lt real gt lt real gt lt real gt lt real gt lt integer gt lt string gt SS SS End of file Description The following sections describe this format lt integer gt INTERFACES Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 232 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Total number of different geology horizons or interfaces for which geology data are defined includes geology contacts and faults An integer number followed by the keyword INTERFACES INTERFACE lt string gt lt string gt The keyword INTERFACE followed by the names of the 2 geology formations on either side of this interface geology contact or fault The geology data which follow are associated with the second named of the two formations lt integer gt POINTS Total number of points in the following list of geology data points lt real gt lt real gt Fo
58. dialog boxes k Show Orientation Data in 3D Viewer xj To show orientation data in the 3D Viewer select the Formations and Faults that you wish to display and press OK or Apply Geology Formations and Faults SS E Granite Zz LowerCover Basement E Sw NE Fault Select All Deselect All Invert Parameters Radius 141 421 m Thickness 70 711 m m y x wf Apply Clase Controls in this dialog box Geology formations Geology formations and faults with orientation data and faults available for display See How to select items from a list Parameters 3D GeoModeller shows orientation data using disc symbol You can set the Radius and Thickness of the symbols in Project distance units Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt 3D GeoModeller Reference 183 GeoModeller User Manual 4 Back gt Contents Help Top Show Drillholes in 3D Viewer dialog box Parent topic Use this dialog box to select drillholes for display in the 3D Viewer and specify their View menu and appearance dialog boxes y Show Drillholes in 3D Viewer q x To show drilholes in the 3D Viewer select the Drillholes that you wish to display and press OK or Apply Drillholes Select All Deselect All Invert Parameters Radius 100 m P Help wf OK wa Apply x Close Controls in this dialog box Drillholes Drillholes ava
59. e The objective is to obtain a good quality fit to the data If the data is erratic and a reasonable fit is not possible then re examine your data distribution if uneven then regularise or decluster If the data exhibits a lognormal distribution transform to log space ie susceptibility If nothing works then there may be very little spatial correlation and inverse distance will be the best solution To Fit a variogram curve click the Adjust button red highlight and proceed as follows a Choose a variogram model type from the drop down list E Y2 Examples of the most common variogram models are illustrated below Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top 35 Yluretaim 3D GeoModeller Reference 286 q Back gt Yia Ani Contents Help Top Ytunifarn lt Total Sill q _ Nugget Sill Vaenogren Model Mesbed Lomo ani Mugget effect ay Gaussa YZ Daha cal Feil wari undor Yo Y1 Y total b Toggle Nugget effect enter Sill value where curve intersects Y axis c Toggle y1 and enter Range h value where curve levels out X axis then enter the Sill y value Y axis intercept where the curve levels out spherical or reaches the mid inflexion gaussian See model examples below Model sill values are cumulative so enter the y1 Sill as y1 Sil
60. gt To create geology formations Geol hei ae ang 1 From the main menu choose Geology gt Formations gt Create or Edit The payee Create or Edit Geology Formations dialog box appears See Create or Edit operations Geology Formations dialog box 2 Enter the name of the geology formation in the Name field 3 Select the colour for the formation Click the Colour field and select the colour from the Colour Palette dialog box See Colour Palette dialog box 4 Choose Add Repeat steps 2 4 as required 6 Choose Close Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 342 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Editing geology formations Parent topic gt gt To edit geology formations Geol l i Paane Ge ang 1 Fromthe main menu choose Geology gt Formations gt Create or Edit The series Create or Edit Geology Formations dialog box appears a 2 Select click the formation that you want to edit Choose Attributes to edit the attributes of the formation Use the Project Properties dialog box 4 Choose Appearance to edit the appearance of the formation Use the Appearance of objects dialog box family 5 Repeat steps 2 4 as required 6 Choose Close Deleting geology formations Parent topic gt gt To delete geology formations ee anq 1 From the main menu choose Geology gt Formations gt Create or Edit The seri s
61. in 3D GeoModeller V1 3 but will be imported if present in 3D GeoModeller V2 0 to improve the validation of depths in the Survey and Geology files Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top Survey file 3D GeoModeller Reference 357 q Back gt The Survey file must contain the following fields Field HoleID 1 SurveyDepth P Azimuth Example Description Name of Drillhole Dip of the drillhole path ve down 90 to 90 degrees Dip direction of the drillhole path 0 to 360 degrees Distance down the drillhole path to the survey point HoleID Dip Azimuth DownHoleDepth Mansfield1 90 0 0 0 0 0 Note The default convention of Dip ve down can be flipped using the toggle switch at the base of the survey dialogue window highlighted in red below x y CSV Data Import Steps 2 a sm Select data type to import Parse CSV collar File Map CSV colums to collar data structure 4 Parse CSV survey file 5 Map CSV colums to survey data structure Parse CSV geology File Map CSV colums to geology data structure Map geologic objects in project data Verify imports Map CSV colums to survey data structure Step 5 of 9 D 1 Mansfield soo OC oo O 2 Mansfield 0 0 o O O O isao oo o o O Bo Mansfield 0 0 tO 39000 Pe Mansiz 5 0 tO Pe mansfielss jooo We
62. in TXT TAB or CSV format a single BRGM style ASCII file or a GDM binary data record BRGM software format an XML file formatted according to the GeoSciML standard You can import geophysical logs and assays into existing drillholes using an ascii file in TXT TAB or CSV format 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 3D GeoModeller Reference 354 GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 355 Contents Help Top Importing a set of 3 ASCII files Collar Survey amp Geology Parent topic Importing drillholes and drillhole geophysical logs and assays Contents Help Top lt 4 Back gt The 3 ASCII files are parsed using an import wizard similar to that provided with the Excel Data tool Text to Columns The import wizard is able to handle fixed width or space comma or tab delimited files or a combination of both Examples of the first two steps in the wizard import dialogue are shown below 1 Select the data to import 2 CSV Data Import x Steps Select data type to import Step 1 of 9 1 Select data type to import 2 Parse CSV collar File 3 Map CSV colums to collar data structure 4 Parse CSV survey file 5 Map CSV colums to survey 3D Orientation data structure s 7 Map CSV colums to geology C Werd Baorehales data structure 8 Map geologic objects in project f 3 tables boreholes data 9 Verify imports 3 1134 tutorial CaseStudyH Data SyntheticDr
63. menu and the toolbars e 3D GeoModeller main menus e Toolbars e Project menu Project toolbar and dialog boxes e Section menu toolbar and dialog boxes e 2D Structural sub menu and Structural toolbar e Points List toolbar docked e Model menu toolbar and dialog boxes e 2D Viewer toolbar e 38D Controls sub menu and 3D Viewer toolbar The Project Explorer which presents in a tree structure all of the data objects managed within the project Each node of the tree has a shortcut menu for common operations on the object it represents The 2D Viewer for the display of the map and sections and for presentation of 2D model objects The 2D Viewer has a shortcut menu for common operations See 2D Viewer sub menu and main shortcut menu Project Explorer Section menus The 3D Viewer for the display and presentation of 3D model objects The 3D Viewer has a shortcut menu for common operations See 3D Viewer sub and shortcut menu The Points List enables you to enter data or specify parameters by clicking points in the 2D Viewer 3D GeoModeller workspace Parent topic In this section User interface avetetee 3D GeoModeller workspace Introduction Status bar and conventions for spatial coordinates Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 12 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt 3D GeoModeller workspace Introduct
64. model Plot the model on the currently selected on the current section according to the current model settings section See Plot the Model Settings dialog box Plot the model Plot the model on all sections according to the on all sections current model settings See Plot the Model Settings dialog box Build 3D See Build 3D Formation and Fault Shapes formations dialog box and faults Erase all Erase display of the model from the currently gm model selected section geology Project data See Project data onto Sections dialog box CTRL I onto sections Plot the model In the 2D Viewer display model geology CTRL F along section colours along section intersections This intersections enables you to check agreement between sections Compare See Compare Model with Drillhole model with Observations dialog box drillhole observations Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 117 Contents Help Top lt 4 Back gt Compute The Model lInterpolate Geology and Structural Data dialog box Parent topic Model menu toolbar and dialog boxes Contents Help Top Use this dialog box to e Select the project elements and the region of the project space that you want to include in the model calculation e Using the Simplification radius specify how much you want to reduce data density in the model calcu
65. new variogram analysis or modify an existing variogram model e Choose the variogram type Two component variogram for modelling 2D anisotropy only geometric anisotropy is supported Sill fixed for both axes available for 2D and 3D kriging and simulation e One component variogram for isotropic data available for 2D and 3D kriging and simulation Bg variogram Alesse Sheps Hew Modify Variogram Analysis 1 of 4 L Variogram Analysis Conmule Varian Analez Varig am Hodiy Mase OGrillholesFields Aieg10_ Fe _Reg10_RhoTheta Minen 7 Mew variogram DeSnition Type of Varingram 1 Component r Patenty 5 uv potential e Step 2 Compute Variogram e Choose the geological constraints for variogram modelling and Compute Sp Variogram analyser Jb Compute the warogran mage Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 285 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Toggle Series constraints and choose one series only Toggle Unit constraints and choose one lithological unit only Toggle No constraints All formations are modelled Step 3 Adjust Variogram 1 e Experiment with the number of lags to find a suitable data distribution for variogram fitting Analyse variogram 3 of 4 Vanogramn itunitorm Orechonal Vanogram Aho Lag Cistance Step 4 Adjust Variogram 2
66. not present in Collar file H Ha om MBH BMH H HH BW H amp bi HH H H OO Total Detailed Info Not Imported Duplicate HoleldD Not Imported Overlapping Litho interval Not Imported HoleID must begin with a letter Imported Missing Litho interval Imported Missing Litho interval Not Imported Overlapping Litho interval Imported Imported Imported Missing Litho interval Not Imported Illegal data format Not Imported Missing litho name Imported Imported Missing Litho interval Not Imported Survey Depths not sorted Not Imported Illegal data format Imported Missing Litho interval Imported Imported Missing Litho interval Imported Imported Tannanrtanl Micoinea I itha iantertrsal You can Copy Paste from the above window into a document to save the validation summary The results are not currently written to a file Validation rules for drillholes 3 Files CSV format Parent topic e Drill Hole Collar location must be inside the project area I ti l i i P eee and Any Hole outside the project area will be reported to the user in the Validation drillhole report geophysical The hole will not be imported logs and assays e Normally a Drill Hole Collar RL will be very close to the terrain surface except in an underground mining situation characteristically however the terrain model is often less accurate than the Drill Hole collar survey Currently no test is done to warn th
67. number of navigation files to a prexisting GeoModeller project independent of the requirement to have GeoModeller running Explo re I Seemic_Import_Test 8 Formations E Dykes fy Faults pa Sections ais SurfaceTopagra jy 20201 lm 302402 Ry 302 03 ly 302 04 my 02 05 ly 302406 i 302 07 iy 302 08 i 302 09 hy 302 Di iy 302 11 My 302 12 iy 302 13 lj 302 14 bing 352 15 ly 302 15 iy 302 17 k 302 18 ly 302 19 hy 302 20 iy 302 21 i 302 22 iy 302 23 Ui Drilholes g 30 Geology wa Gide and Meshes T I Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 148 Contents Help Top Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Horizon Import The horizon import creates a Geomodeller formation and series for each horizon in the input dataset Interpreted horizon picks are imported into Geomodeller as 3D interface points True dip is calculated from a regression plane fitted to all points within a user specified radius of seismic line intersections Apparent dip can be imported as a separate step using the ASCII import wizard within Geomodeller In order to determine the 3D coordinates of a pick point the navigation database files are required These are generated when the navigation data is first imported using the Navigation Import option in GeoModeller or at another time via the Intrepid import tool There can be
68. o 001 m 3D Deflection o 001 Simplification radius fio m P Help y OK Close Controls in this dialog box Wome Name the GeoModellr pets Authors Nemesofthe pets thors Date Daten tine fection ofthe pea Projection Coordinate system datum and projection of the project You can define only a rectilinear coordinate framework such as a projected coordinate system in m km or feet You cannot use geodetic coordinates latitude and longitude Height datum The height elevation datum of the project The unit of measurement of the coordinates and elevation data of the project Precision to which 3D GeoModeller computes the model Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 69 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Control Purpose Dynamic selection in Viewers Enable checked or disable clear dynamic selection See Precision in representing curves and surfaces Project limits XMin XMax Minimum and maximum extents of the project in the X or East direction Project limits YMin YMax Minimum and maximum extents of the project in the Y or North direction Project limits ZMin ZMax Minimum and maximum extents of the project in the Z or Up direction Specify all vertical measurements in 3D GeoModeller in terms of elevation positive upwards measured relative to the specified Height Datum See Precision i
69. objects Parent topic If 3D GeoModeller can match import formations and faults with project ones it CSV data displays a match up list In the following illustration most data matched up with the nee a oe existing formations and faults but some data had formation or fault name with a select objectsto typographic error and 3D GeoModeller failed to match some data with the existing receive data objects One of the formation names was different in the data Sediments instead of Sediment and some of the data belonging to the formation VolcanicBreccia had VolcanicBrexcia CT xi Steps Map geologic objects in project data Step 4 of 4 1 Select data type to import Geological objects mapping 2 Parse CSV file Map CSV colums to data Geologic object Action Merge to Colour Stri e 3 t 4 ae geologic objects in Import d fus VolcanicBrexcia po not import v port Sediments Do not imi ClayBreccia import ClayBreccia Be Hornblende fimo PorphyriticAndesite import PorphyriticAnd v SilicaBreccia SilicaBreccia Import Qt 4141 ap ayia VolcanicBreccia Ej 5 Q ii T lt re PurnamaFault Import Here is a segment of the import data X Y Z FormationFault 506411 167799 52 6939 Sediments 506316 167799 52 6939 Sediments 507719 166901 96 5455 VolcanicBrexcia 507573 166768 143 465 VolcanicBrexcia 507616 166790 104 999 VolcanicBrexcia 507666 166851 93 1114 VolcanicBreccia 50
70. of pointer indicates angle of dip points Long surface has shallow dip Short surface has steep dip Non horizontal section Marker direction represents the pole to the geological surface Baseline of symbol shows the orientation of the contact between the section and Length of pointer represents projection of the i the geological surface pole to the geology surface onto the section You can create the baseline by clicking Long surface almost orthogonal to section l points Short surface almost parallel with section You can change the symbols if required See Appearance of objects dialog box family Entering orientation data points using the Points List You can use the Points List to create an orientation point 3D GeoModeller creates the line component not the arrow parallel to the line joining the two most recent points in the Points List This has a different significance in horizontal and vertical sections see following sections You can edit the line later in the Create or Edit Orientation Data dialog box or the Create or Edit Axial Surface Orientation Data dialog box at any time See e Create or Edit Geology Data dialog box e Create or Edit Axial Surface Orientation Data dialog box See also Editing geological data with the Points List Horizontal section orientation markers If you use the Points List to create an orientation point in a horizontal section 3D GeoModeller sets the dip d
71. of the Seismic Import tool e Navigation and Horizon data are imported in two separate import steps e Navigation and Horizon data from each seismic line must not be split over multiple files e Horizon import requires the navigation data to be available e The shot id is used to look up the LAT LON or UTM coordinates for each horizon pick in the navigation database files e Data is thinned before importing to Geomodeller using a Ramer Douglas Peucker like algorithm See below e All processing such as line intersection calculations true dip orientation etc is done on the full dataset not the thinned data e True dip is calculated at seismic line intersections during the horizon pick import Data Thinning In order to import dense seismic data into Geomodeller it must be thinned This is an automated processed which will search for the best N points that match the dataset The final N points will best match the data according to the runime behaviour of the Ramer Douglas Peucker algorithm http en wikipedia org wik1i Ramer K2 80 93Douglas H2 80 93Peucker_algorithm The best N points can be defined by the user however the defaults are generally sufficient Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 143 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Note Geomodeller is designed to work extremely well with sparse data Thi
72. options Properties Edit the Properties of the Drillhole logs column display the most siginificant of these is to change the vertical drillhole column layout to horizontal and to manipulate the axes scales and zoom Copy Copy the Drillhole log view to the Clipboard Save as Save the Drillhole log to a PNG Print Print the Drillhole log to a Windows printer Zoom In Zoom Out Auto Range e Menu options available when double click in the Geology Model User Defined or Assay Field columns Choose a Formation for the current interval from the drop down list top menu item Remove Interval Remove a Lithology interval from the drillhole log Split Interval Split an existing Lithology interval also used to Add an interval Add Orientation Data to the drillhole log Relax Unrelax this Interface Relax or unrelax the current interface None of these options are saved until the user selects the Drillholes gt Save option in the Top level menu as described above Any of these operations can be undone by selecting Undo in the top level Edit menu e Properties Right Click in Drillhole logs panel and select Properties Dnilhole logs Properties DrillholeS45 at X 1210 Y 1568 Geological Log Geological Model Misfit 0 28 Copy at pe y Sa r a os eer Print oom In d foom Out Auto Range Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt G
73. point in the Points List This is a display of values only You cannot edit the current point in this mode When the points table is selected and visible Enter coordinates of a new point in the boxes provided Choose Insert to add the point after the current point Select or edit point coordinates in the Points Table See Points table Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 58 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Importing GIS and other binary located data Parent topic You can import binary located data into the Points List and create sets of data points Points List in your project 3D GeoModeller supports at least the following formats Contact our support service for information about other formats e Arc Shape e MapInfo TAB e MapInfo MIF MID e ASCII CSV e INTREPID DIR databases Geosoft GDB databases 3D GeoModeller can only load one segment from the file at a time into the Points List fem Points List Editor a Section Navigation Points View SurfaceTopography T Point 2 fz was GS Oowrgd eo g gt CREB Gis and other Binary Located Data GIS and Other Binary Located Dats File D Testing Geomodeler em_test inversion_O24MTW_223_Model DIR Browse information Seen ee Threshald Fitering Sege3s oof 10 w lt fe j None Points List 551839 000 55
74. select the relevant tab i Section2 i Section3 F4 s Topography E4 Ta i Section E4 Removing a window from a set of tabbed windows To open a window tab in a new window drag the window tab to any window edge A new window icon activates Drop the tab into the new window 2 11 117 229 21874 414 2154 359 U V 1918 046 2154 3 i Case_B_Section1 x Section2 E ae x 23 837 825 3 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 333 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Adding a window to a set of tabbed windows Drag any window display onto any other window space The two window displays will share that window space Window tabs are created Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 334 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Use these to toggle between alternative displays Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 335 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Rearranging windows Parent topic Window Edges Organising the i l i pe i Drag any window edge to adjust the display of two adjacent windows CaM ONENG Rearrange Windows workspace To rearrange the window displays drag any windo
75. the edge cells to be given using xllcenter and yllcenter instead The origin of the grid is the upper left and terminates at the lower right ARC format grids are single band files TIF GeoTIFF grid format 16 bit Integer only TIFF is a public domain binary format for storage transfer display and printing of raster images GeoTIFF refers to TIFF files which have geographic or cartographic data embedded as tags within the TIFF file 3D GeoModeller imports 16 bit GeoTIFF images containing integer terrain heights to create the DTM such as those available for download from some public SRTM sites CGIAR CSI Other GeoTIFF images in 8 bit and 24 bit in which real height values are no longer preserved cannot be imported here SRTM GeoTIFF images are registered to the top left corner Edge of the image which is the top left corner of the first cell TIFF tag is PixelIsArea This is equivalent to the registration system used by ERMapper SEMI ASCIl grid format The SEMI format is an ASCII file The first line of a SEMI file has the following format W XMIN lt real gt YMIN lt real gt XMAX lt real gt YMAX lt real gt NUMBERX lt integer gt NUMBERY lt integer gt With the information in this line it is possible to build a 2D table of real coordinates coded on 8 bytes The remainder of the file contains the data for each point of the grid The data for each grid node are recorded on a separate line as follows lt real gt lt
76. the section Vertical radius Radius of the ellipsoid in the direction perpendicular to the section Influence radius Radius of the ellipsoid in the plane of the section in the direction perpendicular to the line of known contact points Methods of defining the centre of the ellipsoid Mean centre Coordinates of the ellipsoid centre are the means of the coordinates of the known contact points Databox centre Coordinates of the ellipsoid centre are the centre in the section of the rectangle containing all of the known contact points User specified Coordinates of the ellipsoid centre that you specify as X Y Z within the project space Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 104 Contents Help Top lt 4 Back gt Links Faults with Series dialog box Parent topic Geology menu and dialog boxes Use this dialog box to define the relationship of faults with the defined geology series You can instruct 3D GeoModeller to ignore or take faults into account when interpolating the geology series 1n your project The geology series in your project are designated by rows and the defined faults are designated by columns To specify that a fault be taken into account in the interpolation of the chosen geology series check the cell at the intersection of a series and a fault A fault passes through the geology seri
77. to perform on the data associated with the object in the import file See Global and individual match up actions Merge to Existing project object to which 3D GeoModeller will import the data This appears if both Project objects exist AND e You select Import or Merge to formation or Merge to Fault For individual objects If an individual import object exactly matches a project object and you select Import you are not able to select a different target project object If you want to select a different project object select one of the Merge actions See Global and individual match up actions Colour New object to create during import This appears when you select Create formation or Create fault See Global and individual match up actions For individual objects Its name matches the import file object To assign a colour to a new object click it See Colour Palette dialog box 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd Contents Help Top 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top 3D GeoModeller Reference 160 4 Back gt Global and individual match up actions You can specify a global action for all objects or individual actions for each individual object For global action use the Import all drop down list For individual action set Parent topic CSV data import wizard Create and select objects to receive data Contents Help Top it to User specif
78. voxels 0 from grid set them to Null e IF Density 0 nan Density e AND Null the values between 2 66 and 2 68 in Fld1 e IF Fld1 gt 2 66 AND Fld1 lt 2 68 nan Fld1 e OR Set Lithology 3 in Fld1 to Null e IF Fld1 2 OR Fld1 4 Fld1 nan e LOG transform field SusceptReg5d to log10 e LOG SusceptRegs EXP and LN Back transform LogSusceptReg5 from log10 space overcomes lack of inverse LOG or Power function e EXP LogSusceptReg5 LN 10 Examine changes in density for Fm 2 between the inversion starting density and the inversion final density subtracting two IF tests IF IF AIF InLith 2 InDen nan IF PinLith 2 FinDen nan 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 252 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt e As above but set the result to Null if the difference between the IF s is 0 IF IF InLith 2 InDen nan IF PinLith 2 FinDen nan 0 nan IF InLith 2 InDen nan IF FinLith 2 FinDen nan e Multi Crossplot with The Multi Crossplot allows the user to choose multiple fields from the current mesh grid for scatter plot and histogram analysis The Crossplot dialog is shown below The user can choose to complete a linear regression as part of the multiplot analysis ig Grids and Meshes EE FexIsalnt_Ore2 FexIsoint_Ore2 a Troniso Regression Analysis S IronPot S MnAniso ra Model_Blevat
79. zero index in the voxet or vice versa The user can also choose whether to load the GoCAD voxet into the Mesh Grid tree inside the project See the Load voxet into Project toggle switch at the bottom left This might be turned off to conserve memory and can then be imported and displayed on demand or interactively loaded for geophysical forward modelling and inversion Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 72 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt EE a Lithology Index Z Lithology Name Ore Swatches _ i m E i A Bas m ENN A E E a O a a EERE hha ee ERR BELL EEATT EEATT EHATE BREE BRB Pt ee Pt tt BREE a a a E a O E E EE EEE aa EE EHATE EESTE BRL EEE OCE a S a Preview m E Sample Text Sample Text ia a C Sample Text Sample Text wi OK Close e Dialog for editing the existing colour and or Lithology Name e When all the voxet formation options are set as required click OK to proceed The project extents are automatically set to the loaded voxet extents as shown below At this point the user proceeds to complete the new project dialog by choosing Project Name e Authors e Description e Projection Datum Projection pair e Height Datum e Measurement Units m k
80. 0 Kriging 2 13 Current_Model_Grid Domaining Estimation F CrossValidateInterp_FeRegi0Iso1 Inverse Distance Interpolation F CrossValidateVari_FeReg10Iso1 Cross Validation of Kriging Domaining Cross Validation Gaussian Anamorphosis Transformation Gaussian Simulation on a Domain Gaussian Simulation All Model d Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 320 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt e Select Domain Kriging then Cross Validation of Domain Kriging from the Interpolation drop down in the Main menu Interpolation Import Export View Window Research Help i Prepare Data t gt pP p TT i e3 Exploratory Statistics te Variogram Analysis Kriging K Domain Kriging i E Run Wizard Gaussian Simulation 1 ig Cross Validation of Domain Kriging e Step 1 Neighbourhood Definition Define the Neighbourhood parameters with which to run Cross Validation These parameters would normally match those used in the Variogram Analysis and subsequent Domain Kriging interpolation os ls da 39 45 po 65 75 S Yo J e Maximum Points in neighbourhood The algorithm does a radial search for points from the centre of the cell to be interpolated It stops searching once the Maximum Points limit is reached Limiting the Maximum Points in the neighbourhood minimises smoothing if the local data mean is known to flu
81. 000 m Grid bounding box xMin 1630000 XMax 1750000 m X cell size lk Y cell size lo m No of points on X o No of points on Y o 3 tLoading wireframe DTM i X Subsampling Loading wireframe DTM Rate 0 Output This DTM is in wireframe format and will be interpolated onto a regular grid Description Topography of the model Cellsize 50 P Help af OK Fd close wf OK Fd close Select the grid cell size for the output DTM grid DTM data sources NASA SRTM data Parent topic How 3D GeoModeller imports the DTM Contents Help Top If you do not have a DTM for your 3D GeoModeller Project then an excellent source of publicly available 3 arc minute 90m resolution NASA Shuttle Radar Topographic Mission SRTM digital elevation data is available from the CGIAR CSI CGIAR Consortium for Spatial Information website at http srtm csi cgiar org Data is available in 5 x 5 tiles in WGS84 Geodetic projection in both GeoTIFF and Arc ASCII format On the home page you can find the following detailed information on quality and value added processing of the available SRTM data adapted The text contains the alternative term DEM digital elevation model which is the same as DTM 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 20
82. 1 INTERFACES 2 INTERFACE XX UpperCover 3 6 PONTS 4 433 1 00766 13281250 1420 3272265625000 5 6268 754994531250 354 9811036 19141 6 7d60 416503906250 109 745 178227055 7 10335 735351562500 1302 609619140625 B 12295 6965289062500 206 1 630917368750 3 13772 68 7500000000 2546 659056 7968750 10 0 ASSOCLATEDORIENTATIONS 11 0 FOLIATIONS Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 135 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Contents Help Top Controls in this dialog box Section Section onto which to import the data Section onto which to import the data Browse File to load Import file Preview the import file with or without line numbers Submenu Item 2 e Contacts Structure MIF CSV Use the previous Import 2D Data dialog box to select the section and the data file from which to import the data If you select a MIF MID format file then you will see the following dialog Import 2D Data to Surface Topography Section SurfaceTopography File Geomodeller Tutorial A4 Vac9a4448 ExportMifMid EG Section 1 Interfaces mif Browse view Attributes Geology Data Top Formation Form Geology Data Interface Geology Orientation Data Geological Polygon Background Pi Choose the Data Type required for import and the Attribute s in the Mid file containing the Formation
83. 198 7 000 55206 1 000 552061 0 5 552206 000 6751088 000 552209 0 751080 9 437 i7 soon 992596 000 78 100 000 552355 0 5731030 0 89 225 Before you import GIS data ensure that the data is geologically relevant to the contact or surface to which you are importing or that you can eliminate irrelevant data by rejecting data segments during the import process If necessary prepare the GIS data beforehand Some imported data may have a higher density than you need for creating a geological model so3D GeoModeller can intelligently sample this data for inclusion It samples at different rates depending on the shapes of contact surfaces sampling more points where the shapes change Often you require as little as 10 to construct a satisfactory geological model If the import data is geodetic or has a specified datum and projection 3D GeoModeller automatically converts it to the datum and projection of the project 3D GeoModeller ignores data that is outside the boundaries of your project After you import the data 3D GeoModeller displays a summary report Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 59 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt GIS Import Status Report x 1 Project coordinate system GDAS4 MGA zone 55 LD File coordinate system GDA94 GEODETIC Projection conversion OK Datum conver
84. 1f Some data points or lines have been deleted or constructed or imported or you decide that recent work was in error The application has crashed after you have been working on a project for some time without saving the project A computer or network failure has occurred z AutoSave Preferences X Enabled Auto Saves per Project 10 Minimum Interval s 300 Duty Cycle 0 0 05 OK Cancel Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 66 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Controls in this dialog box Option Description Enabled or You can enable or disable Autosave using the toggle switch On Disabled installation the Autosave default is disabled Once Autosave is enabled it will remain on until you choose to disable it Autosave remembers its new default settings for multiple invocations of 3D GeoModeller not just the current session The project autosaves are stored beneath the current project in a folder called Autosave If you are 1s working on a fresh project that has not been saved and an Autosave is triggered by the timer 3D GeoModeller asks you to save the project first Auto Saves You can choose the maximum number of saved copies of a project per Project The default is 10 This enables you some control over the amount of disk storage consumed The choice will
85. 2008 pp 147 157 CHILES J P DELFINER P 1999 Geostatistics Modeling Spatial Uncertainty John Wiley amp Sons New York NY JAYR S GRINGARTEN E TERTOIS A L MALLET J L DULAC J C 2008 The need for a correct geological modelling support the advent of the UVT transform First break 26 LAJAUNIE C COURRIOUX G MANUEL L 1997 Foliation fields and 3D cartography in Geology 29 571 584 MALLET J L 2004 Space time mathematical framework for sedimentary geology Mathematical Geology 36 1 32 Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 311 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt e Domain Kriging Variogram Analysis Worked Example e Select a variable for variogram analysis from the Grids and Meshes context menu OR ty Grids and Meshes J BY DrillholesFields_Reg 10 z 13 Current_Model_ Grid fy CrossValidateInterp_FeReg10Iso1 Ur CrossValidateVari_FeRegi0Iso1 i Nearest Neighbour Analysis An Variogram Analysis Kriging L i wT i w TE Er Domaining Estimation Inverse Distance Interpolation Cross Validation of Kriging Domaining Cross Validation Gaussian Anamorphosis Transformation Gaussian Simulation on a Domain Gaussian Simulation All Model e Choose Variogram from Interpolation drop down in the Main menu Prepare Data d Exploratory Statistics
86. 5 0 98 104 7683 2 0202 505 4 551843 0 1501 2 551843 0 6751690 0 9 l 497 0 0 0 90 124 9143 2 0966 518543 0 1492 9 551843 0 6751690 0 8 Source Style Source Import All Import Selected Only Submenu Item 3 e Orientations CSV Selecting this submenu option opens the CSV import wizard See CSV data import wizard Parse import file The selected file must contain at least 6 columns or the importer will report an error iby With these separators we don t have enough columns We need at least 6columns Otherwise the final dialog will appear as shown below and the user must select the columns containing the following variables Data Source Style Formation File Column in File Project Choose a Fm from the project User Type in the Fm name File Column in File only File Column in File only Strike Column in File only Dip Column in File only Polarity File Column in File or User Type in the polarity used 0 or 1 normal or reverse Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 138 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Map CSV colums to data structure Step 3 of 5 Bers i 2 64 ko 50h 094 a p iee fe FP pvp O87 BAE B0 p55 67 Ou 06i 0O p pos Import Al Import Selected Only Import 3D Geology Submenu Options Import Export View Window
87. 7 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt The CGIAR CSI GeoPortal can provide SRTM 90m digital elevation data for the entire world The SRTM digital elevation data produced by NASA originally is a major breakthrough in digital mapping of the world and provides a major advance in the accessibility of high quality elevation data for large portions of the tropics and other areas of the developing world The SRTM digital elevation data provided on this site has been processed to fill data voids and make it easy for a wide group of potential users to use NASA provides this data in an effort to promote the use of geospatial science and applications for sustainable development and resource conservation in the developing world A DTM for the entire globe covering all of the countries of the world is available for download on this site The component SRTM 90m DEMs have a resolution of 90m at the equator and are provided in mosaic ed 5 x 5 tiles for easy download and use They are all produced from a seamless dataset to allow easy mosaic ing These are available in both ArcInfo ASCII and GeoTIFF format to facilitate their ease of use in a variety of image processing and GIS applications You can download data using a browser or access it directly from the FTP site If you find this digital elevation data useful please send e mail to csi cgiar org The NASA SRTM has provided digital elevation data DEMs for over 80 of the globe USGS currently distr
88. 7 811 2209_177 2172 039 403 375 259 479 152 404 Clear 4545 773 2296 125 698 655 6770 705 4545 773 2296 125 l Note the caution about xyZ and uv measurements in steep terrain See Status bar and conventions for spatial coordinates Operations that use this window Using the Tape Measure Options in this window Option Description Distance Bearing Angle More Less Text area Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd Location of the current mouse position relative to the last point clicked To view all data from your measurements choose More To view only the distance bearing and angle choose Less The text area shows the coordinates of the points you have clicked and the angles and distances between them 3D GeoModeller sets the coordinates of the first point you clicked as zero For details of the notation see Status bar and conventions for spatial coordinates Clear the current path and data from the Tape Measure 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 49 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt 2D Viewer shortcut menus Parent topic 2D For the main 2D Viewer shortcut menu see 2D Viewer sub menu and main shortcut Viewer menu Project Explorer Section menus You can view or change properties of the objects that you see in the 2D Viewer e Geology data 2D Viewer Geology data shortcut menu e Orientation data
89. 7300 166491 145 266 VolcanicBreccia 507351 166560 196 822 VolcanicBreccia 507407 166647 211 092 VolcanicBreccia In this example to correct this situation for each unmatched object select Merge to formation and then in the Merge to column select the required existing project formation Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top Parent topic CSV data import wizard Create and select objects to receive data Parent topic CSV data import wizard Create and select objects to receive data 3D GeoModeller Reference 159 q Back gt Creating new objects during import In the illustration below the 3D GeoModeller project had defined sections but no formations or faults We decided to create the formations and faults and assign them colours at the time of import Steps Map geologic objects in project data Step 4 of 4 1 Select data type to import Parse CSV file Geological objects mapping wn Geologic object Action Merge to Import all User specified v PurnamaFault Create fault Create formation Map CSV colums to data structur Fal Map geologic objects in project data bh v v v ion v ba v t A Columns in this wizard page The following table explains the four columns in this wizard page Geological object Object named in the import file Action
90. 85 95 Maximum Pants in hesgnborhood Minimum Points in Meaghbarhacd ianamum Regus of Neighborhood lt Back Next gt e Neighbourhood Definition options are e Maximum Points in neighbourhood The algorithm does a radial search for points from the centre of the cell to be interpolated It stops searching once the Maximum Points limit is reached gt Minimum Points in neighbourhood The minimum number of points in the radial search required to calculate a value for the cell If the minimum is not reached then the cell value is set to Null Maximum Radius of Neighbourhood The maximum radial search distance used to scan for points to include in the estimation of a cell value Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 291 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Step3 Define field names for Kriged and Kriged StdDev outputs e Click Finish button to run the interpolation The output grid will be available for visualisation in the Grids and Meshes section of the Explore tree as shown in red highlight below ed Field and Standard Deviation Field Definition Field Name Fefieg 10_Isol Standard Deviation FieldName Fefteg10_Iso1_Stj GS GeomodellerTolsatis i Sl Formations L 3 Dykes vo M Fautts H gi Sections H A Drilholes Wa Grids and Meshes i t PH FeRegi0 _Iso1 AA FeRe
91. 881 tutorial CaseStudyB TutorialB1 Completed_Project FieldGeologyWithCOVER jpg Section Map_DTM Browse File D GeoModeller GeoModeller1 3 1881 tutorial CaseStudyB TutorialB1 Completed_Project FieldGeologyWithCOVER jpg Image 400 x 370 i 7 Section i 333 716 j 16 505 u 10022 561 v 24252 744 x 10022 561 y 24252 744 z 0 000 Alignment Controls Preview ae Move point g gt Addpoint Delete point E Reset points Preview C Off On Continuous 1 0 000 0 000 10000 000 23700 000 10000 000 23700 000 0 000 2 400 000 0 000 14000 000 23700 000 14000 000 23700 000 0 000 3 400 000 370 000 14000 000 20000 000 14000 000 20000 000 10 000 y x Ed close Controls in this dialog box Elements Pupose ro Section Section with which the image is associated SS File Browse Path and file name of image being loaded Use Browse to navigate to the file For information about supported image file formats see File Formats Images Image panel The loaded image with source control points You can move the control points to the known locations in the image Section The image as it appears 1n the section You panel can move the target control points To match features visually or To match known coordinate values in the points data ares Image and Section panel toolbar Qal QlAal g E Zoom in Enlarge or reduce the image display Zoom out Contents Help Top 2013
92. Attribute Save as image 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 353 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt 9 Edit the text items as required in the panel Choose Tree view Use the Class View window to edit the items l O JPlotLayout Misfit Evolution ib Layer Layer 2 CaresianGraph Graph 2 i LineAttribute El p Layer Layer 1 LineKey Line Key SGLabel Line Profile Title SGLabel Second Title SGLabel Warning 2 Et CartesianGraph Profile Graph 1 H LineAttribute FI PlainAxis Bottom Axis 5 SGLabel xaxis title El PlainAxis Left Axis i SGLabel yaxis title Expand All Collapse All Edit Selected Close Tree View Profile panel EE x G JPlotLayout test layout El p Layer Layer 1 SGLabel Line Profile Title SGLabel Second Title SGLabel Warning 2 Et CartesianGraph Profile Graph 1 4 GridAttribute FI PlainAxis Bottom Axis 4d SGLabel xaxis title El PlainAxis Left Axis meme GLabel yaxis title Tree View Section or Grid panel When you select a label type and choose Edit Selected 3D GeoModeller displays a dialog box with editing options E SGLabel Line Profile Title Forward gravity model Sectin_EW Color red o green 0 blue ow Font Helvetica bold HeightP 0 25 Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates
93. BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top Contents Help Top 3D GeoModeller Reference 180 4 Back gt Elements Purpose i Ts Invert points Mirror the image and points in a vertical Mier he image end points ina vonioal pgg axis Reverse Mirror the image and points in a horizontal points axis Alignment controls mouse modes Add point Add new points by clicking required positions Note Additional points beyond 3 are not necessary for geolocation and will not straighten warped images Delete point Delete points by clicking them Reset points Preview Points data Move points to their original positions Points 1 2 3 in corners of the ee 2 Om Oe On Tase imase hiddes Target image hidden On Preview of target image refreshes at the end of each point movement Continuous Preview of target image refreshes continuously during point movements Table of point coordinates showing coordinates of each point in the Image and Section panels You can e Edit these values directly and 3D GeoModeller updates the panels Move the points in the panels and 3D GeoModeller updates the coordinates i j Pixel coordinates in the Image panel u V Section coordinates in the Section panel X Y Z Project coordinates in the Section panel 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt
94. Ba kriging a Steps Define Target Grid Define Target Grid i Grid Definiton New Grid Grid Name FeReg 101s 3 Interpolated Field and Standard Deviation Field Add to an Existing Grid Defnition 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 290 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Step 2 Grid Definition Define the output grid resolution and extents and neighbourhood search parameters e Grid Definition for Kriging Define output grid fixed or variable cell sizes or the number of grid cells in the X Y amp Z directions in the top panel Build 3D Limits Interpolate a subset of the 3D GeoModeller project by entering new X Y Z min max limits or accept the default of the full project area The project extents can be reset by clicking on the Project Zone button e Use Points You can use points digitised on a section in the 2D Viewer or captured in the Points list editor to set the X Y Z min max limits by clicking on the Use Points buttons eg Kriging Steps L Define Target Grid 2 Grid Definition 3 Interpolated Field and Standard Deviabon Field DeAnition 40 m Burd 30 Limit ein 131 3 iar 2193 80 I ae Use Pants min 8a miax 30715 80 P Use Paints Jin 250 00 Tias 850 00 P Use Points g Project Zone Meighbortood Definition j 2 li 23 55 45 35 63 75
95. Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 142 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Importing Seismic Navigation and Horizon Data Overview The Seismic Import tool provides a convenient way to bring both seismic navigation and interpreted horizon pick data into Geomodeller A two step procedure is used where seismic navigation data is imported as a first step followed by interpreted horizon pick data The two step procedure was chosen as it 1s expected that navigation data will change less frequently than the interpreted horizon picks Navigation data 1s imported as a section in Geomodeller for each seismic line Horizon picks are imported as 3D contact data with each horizon corresponding to a different formation in Geomodeller True dip orientation data is calculated automatically from seismic line intersections by fitting a plane to all points within a specified radius of an intersection from which the dip and dip direction are calculated This is then imported into Geomodeller as 3D orientation data Data files are Intrepid databases which can be converted from plain ASCII text files via the ImportAsc1i tool or the Geomodeller CSV ASCII import wizard Data Constraints A seismic line must be fully defined within a single file Data files must contain a unique set of seismic lines Each line will appear once and once only in the entire set of data files Summary The following points summarise the important aspects
96. Boat Geo Mean SRG 21799 000 5 Std Deveson B 454355 azs 5 Pur boats a W262 I a Shennan 20590 clita Variance 25 3855451 g2 200 gt m L iFa Lei i S5 125 WG 0 75 080 O25 o oo T T T T T T T z i5 a0 25 40 35 a 45 si 55 ao as 70 E Fertegi O_lsot 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 297 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt e Cross Validation of Kriging e The degree to which the isotropic kriging interpolation honours the observed data can be evaluated using cross validation scatter plots and linear regression Right Click on the Fe_Reg10 drillhole data points field and select Cross Validation of Kriging e Select the isotropic Rho variogram for validation Nearest Neighbour Analysis Vanagram Analysis ae Kriging Domaming Estimation Inverse Distance Interpolation Cross Validation of Kriging i Vanogram analysis DnllhobesFields_ReglO_Fe ReglO_RhoTheti Vanogram analysis OrillholesFields_ReglO_Fe_Regid_Unit_ORE Vanogram analysis Onllholes_Fe_ ReglO_ORE UVTL Gaussian Anamorphesis Transformation Variogram analysis DrillholesFields Fe Regl0_ORE2 Rheol Gaussan Sumulation on a Doman Gaussian Simulation All Model P TS 98 Th ie Domaming Cross Validation e Select the same neighbourhood options a
97. Create or Edit Geology Formations dialog box appears operato 2 Select click the formation that you want to delete 3 Choose Delete 4 Confirm that you want to delete the formation 5 Repeat steps 2 4 as required 6 Choose Close Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 343 Contents Help Top q Back gt Creating the stratigraphic pile Parent topic Main menu Geology gt Stratigraphic Pile Create or Edit Geology formations and series operations Set the Reference Top Bottom of the stratigraphic pile 1 e specify that geology data points will define the Top of a geology formation or the Bottom of the formation Using the geology formations previously defined group formations into geology series and assemble these series into the stratigraphic pile for the project Formations and series must be arranged in their correct stratigraphic order from the oldest at the bottom of the stratigraphic pile to the youngest strata at the top For each series specify the Relationship to older series to be either OnLap or Erode Defined on the basis of observed rock relationships in the field conformable contracts unconformities intrusive contacts etc Structural data operations Parent topic 3D For reference information about this area see GeoModeller Operations Struct
98. D GeoModeller Reference 134 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Import 2D Geology to Section Submenu Options Parent topic Import menu and dialog Export View Window boxes 2D GIS Data to Section 2D Geology to Section Contacts Structure BRGOM 3D Geology Contacts MIF CSV 2D Section Create Orientations CSV Drillhole Grid and Mesh Seismic If you have 2D contacts shapes or orientations geometry dip dip direction created with other software you can import the graphic objects into 3D GeoModeller When you import the 2D data to the Surface Topography section the imported locations are assigned the DTM elevation at each location x y coordinate Available formats for 2D Contacts and Orientation Data e ASCII BRGM e MIF MID MapInfo See MapInfo import Dialog e ASCII CSV See CSV data import wizard Submenu Item 1 e Contacts Structure BRGM Use this dialog box to select the section to which you want to import data and the data file from which to import the data You can preview the data in the import file before importing it The data will be in ASCII BRGM format see ie Import 2D Data to SurfaceTopography Section SurfaceTopography File Testing Geamodeler Tutorial At Vicdeda Datel Sectiont UpperCover dats Browse View i gg File Viewer D Testing Geomodeller Tutorial_A4_V2c9a4445 Datal Section1_UpperCover d 7 Show Line Numbers 1
99. D GeoModeller Reference 263 4 Back gt Mesh and Grid Visualisation Parent topic 3D The following functions are available in the Field context menus for visualising GeoModeller meshes and grids on sections in the 2D Viewer and in the 3D viewer Reference Contents Help Top f AL203 w Hide Field from All Views Field Visualisation Manager Dy Appearance is Edit Colours and Clips Display Color Table Hide Field from All Views Removes all views of the Mesh or Grid from the 2D and 3D Viewers Field Visualisation Manager Manages where the Mesh or Grid is displayed and the display mode 3D point wireframe volume etc The Visualisation Manager is sensitive to the field type selected for display e 8D Points irregular Vertex Mesh from drillhole assays or geophysical logs 30 Wirefare 30 Volume View Grid in 3D Sector view View an Secian Wew on Secten nm 30 u y j Protectors OBE 5 Display Color Table Edt Canus ard Oya w E o Ee e Example 3D Drillhole vertex mesh Fe projected onto 2D section 50m projection distance and in the 3D viewer in 3D Volume mode 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 264 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt gt 2D Grids DTM measured observed geochemical or geophysical grids or geophysical output grids from forward modelling and inversion e Dis
100. Data Section Trace I Drillhole Geological Contact Geological Polygon Potential P Help af OK yf Apply Fd close Controls in this dialog box Section Section from which to export data File format Export file format You can export in MIF MID or ASCII BRGM Browse File Export filename and path name Type of data Types of data for export Check the boxes as required Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 164 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Exporting 3D models Parent topic You can export the model as Export menu and dialog Summary voxets from inversion boxes e Shapes in the following 3D vector formats gt BREP gt VRML 2 gt TSurf STL ASCII gt DXF gt IGES gt STEP gt VTKPolyData e VULCAN Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 165 Contents Help Top lt 4 Back gt View menu and dialog boxes Parent topic 3D Menu submenus and related menus GeoModeller main menus View menu cascades shortcut menus and toolbars Dialog boxes related to View menu submenu and related menu options 2D Viewer Presentation dialog box Section Properties dialog box Section Display Parameters dialog box Image Manager dialog box Edit and A
101. Data to Section Import 2D Geology to Section Import 3D Geology Import 2D Section Create Import Drillhole Import Grid and Mesh Import Seismic Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd Purpose Import 2D GIS data into the topographic section See Importing GIS and other binary located data Import 2D contacts structure and orientation data in BRGM MIF and ASCII formats See Import 2D Geology to Section Submenu Options Import 3D formations dykes faults and orientation data in CSV format using the CSV data import wizard See Import 3D Geology Submenu Options and CSV data import wizard Choose to project data onto the nearest section and permanently associate it with the section Select sections and maximum projection distances Import a series of points and automatically create multiple vertical cross sections within your GeoModeller project see Import 2D Section Create Import drillhole data in 3 file CSV format using the CSV data import wizard For detailed instructions see Import Drillhole and Importing drillholes and drillhole geophysical logs and assays Import 2D and 3D Observations 2D Grids 2D and 3D Triangulations and 3D Grids Voxets see Import Seismic Navigation data and Horizon picks or Import a Micro seismic 3D point cloud with attributes and a Micro seismic Flow rate database see Import Seismic 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3
102. Format Virtual Reality Modelling Language The VRML format initially developed by Silicon Graphics is a popular ASCII format used in animation and virtual reality work Its most recent version is now an ISO standard ISO IEC14772 1 1997 The following site has a complete description of this format http www vrml org 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt 3D GeoModeller Reference 236 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top BRep Format Boundary Representation The BRep format is an ASCII file and is a proprietary format of MATRA Datavision This format particularly effective for the storage of geometrical objects designed by CSG methods Constructive Solid Geometry and is available across the entire range of Quantum products developed by MATRA Datavision KUCLID etc This is a native format used in CASCADE the library of 2D 3D tools used for the development of 3D GeoModeller Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top 3D GeoModeller Reference 237 4 Back gt 2D and 3D Meshes and Grids In 3D GeoModeller Parent topic 3D In this section GeoModeller Reference e Introduction to 2D and 3D meshes e Mesh Grid Concepts and Types e The mesh types managed in Geomodeller e Grid primitives managed in Geomodeller e Grid types in 2D or 3D
103. GeoModeller Reference 359 4 Back gt The following global import and mapping methods are available Option Import User Specified Create formation Merge to Formation Description Imports all drillhole lithologies that match an existing formation in the current 3D GeoModeller project This is the default selection if all lithologies being imported are matched See Fig 1 This will be the default selection if some imported lithologies do not match a formation within the 3D GeoModeller project See Fig 2 If the user selects this global option all lithologies will be set to Do not import The user can modify this selection using the drop down lists at the individual formation level Note The user may be surprised to see Import as the default but no formation matches when he believes the litho codes are matched by formation names This can be caused by leading spaces in the imported lithology names and is a symptom of a poorly formatted CSV file An example of this occurs with the CSV import files in Case Study H In this case the user must also select a space as a separator and check Treat consecutive delimiters as one in the Parse CSV import steps See Fig 5 This option creates a new project formation for any lithology name that does not match a project formation See Fig 3 This is useful when importing into a new project where no formations exist The user can modify this selection using the drop dow
104. GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 1 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt 3D GeoModeller Reference Parent topic In this manual User Manual and Tutorials Introduction to 3D GeoModeller the geological editor Elements of a 3D GeoModeller project User interface overview 3D GeoModeller workspace Project Explorer 3D Viewer 2D Viewer 2D Viewer toolbar 2D Viewer shortcut menus Points List 3D GeoModeller main menus Project menu Project toolbar and dialog boxes Edit menu and dialog boxes Section menu toolbar and dialog boxes Geology menu and dialog boxes Model menu toolbar and dialog boxes Geophysics menu and dialog boxes Mesh and Grid Field Interpolation Import menu and dialog boxes Export menu and dialog boxes View menu and dialog boxes Window menu and dialog boxes Help menu and dialog boxes 3D GeoModeller concepts How 3D GeoModeller imports the DTM Model interpolation parameters File formats 2D and 3D Meshes and Grids In 3D GeoModeller Introduction to 2D and 3D meshes Mesh Grid Concepts and Types Mesh Grid Operations Mesh and Grid Field Statistical Analysis Mesh and Grid Field Surface Analysis Mesh and Grid Visualisation Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 2 Contents Help Top Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Mesh and Grid Field Interpolation Inverse Distance Interpolation e Vari
105. Geology formations and faults with interface data available for display See How to select items from a list Vertical Exaggeration dialog box Parent topic Use his dialog box to set the vertical exaggeration factor in the 2D Viewer or 3D View menu and Viewer dialog boxes 3 Vertical Exaggeration Controls in this dialog box Vertical exaggeration Vertical exaggeration factor See Vertical exaggeration Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 185 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Appearance of objects dialog box family Parent topic Use these dialog boxes to specify the display of objects The dialog boxes vary slightly View menuand depending on the type of object you are configuring dialog boxes r 7 ce of Formation Appearance Display mode Material Plastic coor J ca Polygon filing Vertex symbolsize dL Vertex symbol O x Tono linewidth 1 Line type soid oo Material Plastic gt Orientation symbol size 5 Orientation symboltype classic x Vertex symbol size i Vertex symbal D x cdi gq laa _ en roa acne soid J No of u isolines 0 No of w isolines 0 Orientation symbol size 5 Orientation symbol type Classic Help wa OK y Apply Fd close No of uisolines 0 No of visolines 0 ae l Appearance Prep y OK WV A
106. Geology menu Create or edit See Create or Edit Geology Formations dialog box formations Create or edit See Create or Edit Geology Series dialog box stratigraphic pile Visualise See Stratigraphic pile viewer stratigraphic pile Create or edit faults See Create or Edit Faults dialog box Link faults with see Links Faults with Series dialog box series Link faults with faults See Link Faults with Faults dialog box Create or edit axial See Create or Edit Axial Series dialog box series Create or edit axial See Create or Edit Axial Surfaces dialog box surfaces Create section from See Create or Edit Axial Surface Data an Axial Trace axial surface on a Map dialog box 2D structural See 2D Structural sub menu and Structural toolbar See Provenance Editor dialog box Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 88 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt 2D Structural sub menu and Structural toolbar Parent topic Use the Structural toolbar and cascade menu to add data to geological objects in the Geology menu model cascades and the Structural File Section Geology Model Geophysics Import Export View Window Help toolbar E Paitie F 2M j BP Formations create ar Ealt 3 Str atigr mhie Pile Create or Edit E Stratigraphic Pile visualise Fats create or Eat Sa Link faults with saries Sj Lire
107. Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 175 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt 2D Viewer Presentation dialog box Parent topic Use this dialog box to specify the publishing annotations for a section including title View menuand position of title and axis properties dialog boxes q 2D Viewer presentation l xj Tile e __ M Title Sectiont Font Position u 400 w 8400 E Use Points Axis graduation W Graduation fw Labels Titles Font Axis Step Decimal number Axis title u 1 1 v 1 1 yf oK yf Apply Close Controls in this dialog box When checked specified title is displayed Position of title Enter the desired coordinates or choose Use Points to place the title according to the contents of the Points List fis top asea feist Ate Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 176 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Section Properties dialog box Parent topic Use this dialog box to view the properties of a section View menu and dialog boxes 2 Section properties X Name Section Bounding box Min 100010 Max 109990 m Min 2000010 YMax 2009990 m zMin 5000 ZMax 2000 m u v Extent uMin 0 uMax 14113 8511 m vMin 8000
108. Interface Data ES Show Orientation Data E amp Show Orientation Data ii Show Drillholes its Show Drillholes BS Load Surface Mesh BS Load Surface Mesh Dynamic selection Dynamic selection Presentation Presentation F Background Colour F Background Colour a Save image as egy Export a Project When you select this option 3D GeoModeller selects elements in the 3D Viewer when you point to them Save the current view as an image file in gif or jpg format Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference Contents Help Top 3D Controls sub menu and 3D Viewer toolbar Parent topic View menu cascades shortcut menus and toolbars Contents Help Top 171 4 Back gt Use these menu items or toolbar buttons to control the 3D Viewer display Window Help Research ES 2D Viewer coo p 2D Controls d S 3D Viewer 3D Controls 1 w Vertical Exaggeration j Points List Editor i B Formations Edit All Appearances Dykes Edit All Appearances Faults Edit All Appearances Point Acquisition Parameters Points List Visualisation vii Saar DER AAA Ce El i ay Select Pan Middle Recentre Display via Mouse click Zoom Fit Section to Window Reset View Turn Joystick Mode ON OFF Focal Point Indicator ON OFF Increase Vertical Exaggeration by 1 Reset Vertical Exag
109. List Contents Help Top Ibar docked The Points List toolbar docked is one of the toolbars at the top of the 3D 3D GeoModeller Reference 55 q Back gt GeoModeller window You can use it to navigate through the points delete them singly reverse their order in the list or delete them all Paints List Editor lt r we AFI You can view Points List operations in the 2D Viewer See How the Points List coordinates with the 2D Viewer You can also detach float the toolbar When you float it it becomes the Points List Editor See Points List Editor floated Controls in this toolbar Operation Description Go back 10 points lt lt Go to the previous point Go to the next following point p Pe Go forward 10 points with the Points List to find out when you would want to do this Reverse the order of the points in the list See Editing geological data Delete the current point DE Delete all points floated iin Float the points When you float the Points List toolbar it becomes list editor the Points List Editor See Points List Editor 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 56 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Points List Editor floated Parent topic When you float the Points List toolbar it becomes the Points List Editor You can Points List use this for importing points i
110. Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 349 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Computing a 2 5D forward model Parent topic Geophysics operations Contents Help Top Using 3D GeoModeller you can quickly compute 2 5D gravity and magnetic forward models for a chosen project cross section gt gt To compute a 2 5D forward model 1 Ensure that you have defined physical properties for at least one formation For instructions see Defining physical properties for a formation 2 From the main menu choose Geophysics gt 2D Geophysics See Geophysics menu and dialog boxes The Geophysical profile computer appears 3 From the Geophysical profile computers Cross Sections menu choose the project section you require D Geophysical Profile oj x Be Method EEE 4 From the Geophysical profile computer s Method menu choose Gravity or Magnetics _ lolx Cross Sections Clos Stins Method Lje0pn ysl Seismic 2D Gravity M F 5 Ifyou want to load a grid of observations From the Geophysical profile computer s Geophysics menu choose Load observed grid Geophysical Profile oc m xX gt Load Observed Gravity 4 x Daaa Method _ Look in r GravRuni v T Load Observed Grid Set properties _ EmptyGrid semi Compute ja ForwardGRAVI_GravityComputedModel ers be iain Condens semi E ForwardGRAVI_GravityMeasure ers le ForwardGRAVI_Gravity
111. M amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 224 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Interpolation example 7 Anisotropic with Azimuth Dip and Pitch Rotation Parent topic Model interpolation parameters Contents Help Top In this example the Y axis has a 90 Azimuth and a 30 Dip A Pitch rotation of 30 has been added To visualise the pitch effect it was necessary to increase the X range to 8000 m and reduce the Y range to 4000 m If we did not do this the impact of the east west strike of the orientation data and the Y range would overwhelm the pitch effect E Modelin terpolation parameters The following illustrations show the model in 3D perspective looking north west and views of the front looking north top and right looking west AEE EIEE EEEk a o gt a S eB OHveenn Front looking north 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 225 Contents Help Top lt 4 Back gt Top looking down Right looking west Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd lt 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 226 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Interpolation example 8 Using Anisotropy to connect widely spaced outcrop data Parent topic This
112. M amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 47 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Objects in the 2D Viewer Parent topic 2D You can perform a number of operations on selected objects in the 2D Viewer Viewer toolbar An object can be e An orientation point e A set of geology contact points e A set of axial surface points e A set of hinge line points e A fault gt gt To select an object 1 Point to it 3D GeoModeller changes its colour to white gt gt To select several objects for moving or deleting 1 From the 2D Viewer toolbar select the operation Move object or Delete object that you require 2 Inthe 2D Viewer drag a rectangle to completely enclose the objects you want to select Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top Tape Measure Parent topic 2D Viewer toolbar Bearing 3D GeoModeller Reference 48 q Back gt The Tape Measure enables you to measure distances and angles in the 2D Viewer 2c E HOA x Less Angle 6932 581 m 259 479 152 404 RYZ 2166 887 2487 182 2278 512 w he B total 6932 581 x Y z uy U VY bearing angle 1365 281 1567 000 613 119 2078 336 1365 281 1567 000 41 065 2373 734 729 125 140 843 2483 191 2373 734 729 125 287 075 66 010 2172 039 403 375 55
113. M grid format gdm e ASCII Arc grid format grd 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top 3D GeoModeller Reference 78 q Back gt Controls in this dialog box Control Projection Project bounding box Grid bounding box X cell size Y cell size Nb of points on X Y Purpose Name of the surface topography section The default is SurfaceTopography but you can use any name You cannot use spaces in section names Name of the DTM grid file Choose Browse to browse for the file Notes 3D GeoModeller clips a DTM dataset if it is larger in X or in Y than the bounding box of the project The vertical range of the DTM topography values must lie within the specified Z limits of the project Projection of the project coordinate system 3D GeoModeller dispays this for your information You cannot edit it here Distance unit of the project coordinate system 3D GeoModeller dispays this for your information You cannot edit it here XMin XMax YMin YMax ZMin and ZMax parameters are the Project extents of the 3D GeoModeller Project in the X east Y north and Z up directions respectively 3D GeoModeller dispays this for your information You cannot edit it here XMin XMax YMin and YMax parameters are the extents of the chosen grid file in the X East and Y North directions respectively The data are the
114. Mansfielts 0 0 tH C mansfields 0 Mansfields fo tO M m n mre A m M Sea rato ES E Reset Treat negative dip as down Next gt Finish Cancel Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 358 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Geology file The Geology or lithology file must contain the following fields Field Description Name of Drillhole Example HoleID From To Lithology Mansfield1 0 0 156 0 UpperMansfield Mapping the drillhole units in 3D GeoModeller Once the Geology file has been parsed the user is presented with a dialog box for selecting a global method for importing and mapping the drillhole Formation Fault units within the 3D GeoModeller project A default global method option will be selected for the user depending on whether the imported lithologies can be automatically matched to project formations The global method can be modified by the user to handle non matches and these can be further modified by selection from the drop down lists at the individual formation level Geologic object Action Import all h a Create Formation Create Faulk Merge to Formation Merge to Fault Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top Contents Help Top 3D
115. Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 307 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt See ai Zn are LAS ae at aa MT A Pas ie DM L mins i a Ti Figure 4 Tetrahedral meshing of an implicit function conformal with geological boundaries and following the internal isopotential performed with CGAL library Kriging in pot dg 0 space Synthetic examples For all the examples a set of data representing the density of the geological units is generated For each unit we define the density as a Gaussian law with a mean and standard deviation e Along drill holes crossing the model we generate randomly points of measurement For each point of measurement values of density are generated taking into account the geological unit and the associated statistical law to which the point belongs e For one unit we generate a density in function of the potential value of the geological unit This kind of generation of value is isotropic for the geodesic distance The fourth constraint will generate a zonal isotropy along the pot coordinate Example 1 In this example we generate data using the fourth constraints for a geological unit So the variogram will be isotropic for the geodesic coordinate The probability density function pdf f p d used to randomly generate the density at a point p in this unit is a Gaussian one Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 B
116. Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 325 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt G Sy Grids and Meshes H SY DrilholesFields d 3 DrillholesFields_Reg 10 JA Current Model_Grid EE CrossValidatelnterp_FeReg10Iso1 9 crossValidateVari_FeReg10Iso1 IE Fe_Regi0 m E crossValidatedInterp_Fe_Regil0UVT1 EA crossValidatedVari_Fe_Reg10UVT1 EA CrossValidatedInterp_FeReg10 EA CrossValidatedVari_FeReg10 e Check the statistics of the pre and post transformed data to verify a suitable normal gaussian distribution C Histogram of Fe_Reg10 amp Fri Fe_Ragil BU EAS BCS 0 HUH 13 Fe Regia p i cm J per r Tms Histogram of GaussianAnamorphosis_Fe_Reg10 a 220 p Property Vake reTabal 1304 24 iii rrEfectwe 1725 o aT pets LS Ratha T 200 pan eiia 124 Max HAER m Menn 0 017061 E 75 201 0 i dbeis 1 008495 i 275 z Kur Beare l t per w qao shoe aed Ml esos Eo heeness OOA i ui tan pee Ce Signa TIIR 250 z T LOINA i ii a8 o EE z e400 75 5 i io O73 12 5 te 10 0 O20 j 75 o24 40 a 75 i o 00 i ow L co Ba ws 2 1 Ti Os oie oS ii 13 20 a 30 ALL x GaussianAnanophosis_Fe_ Regil Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 326 Contents Help Top lt 4 Back gt e Step 3 Variogram Analysis of the transforme
117. Measure semi E ForwardGRAVI_GravityMisfit ers _ ForwardGRAVI_GravityMisfit semi E ForwardGRAVI_GzzComputedModel ers _ ForwardGRAVI_GzzComputedModel semi a ForwardGRAVI_GzzMeasure ers _ ForwardGRAVI_GzzMeasure semi E ForwardGRAVI_GzzMisfit ers _ ForwardGRAVI_GzzMisfit semi Recent Items File name ForwardGRAVI_GravityComputedModel ers Open Files of type fan Supported Formats semi gdm grd ers v Cancel This enables you to load an observed or 3D forward modelled gravity or magnetics erid 3D GeoModeller samples a profile from the grid along the chosen section for comparison with your 2 5D forward model 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 350 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt 6 Ifyou want to set further physical properties of formations From the Geophysical profile computers Geophysics menu choose Set properties The Physical properties of geological formation dialog box appears See Physical Properties of Geological Formation dialog box Set the properties as required Note that 3D GeoModeller does not retain the magnetic IGRF settings from one session to the next so you need to set 1n each time you open your project Follow these instructions The following screen snap is an example of the default IGRF setting on opening a project Gravity Magnetic Thermal Seismic Formation Suscept
118. Model_Grid_30_SemReg Right Click on grid FeReg10Iso and select Compute New Field as shown above The Calculator opens Create formula below using the calculator buttons e if Current_Model_Grid 3 FeReg10_Iso1 Nan Type in the new grid Field Name FeReg10_Isol e Click Evaluate wait for new variable to appear in List signal column e Click Save and Exit Grid field list updates Ea i Cakuleigr La Exoresson in evalaste Eq fiermtyeenan 2 i Densty i tepma bE si fl Cure Mod Grid ae PeReghd_ eo Linen mdd Meme PeReg 0_ eo orj Lest yns c Keyboard FeRegi0_ eol a SSS SSS SSS SSS OE SS I Faan oot su miaa y ha Gunner Moda arid in frac mii BOO aia stand oe j wit seal te asinh kiii atanh Zi B 5 i a ee ee ee ee i m om e h le es ee H if AM CA lt lt T i m an ran e ea r earan d O 4 Evausie f Rete al Soren fl Bi FeReg i0Iso Current Model Grid 14 Current_Model_Grid FeRegl0_Isol FeReg10_Iso1 Std FeReg10_Isol_ Ore MM Fepeg i isol WF FeReg 10_Iso1_Std WME FeReg 10_Iso1_Ore Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top ang 7 Bak gg E sig Contents Help Top 3D GeoModeller Reference 293 4 Back
119. Modeller Reference 7 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Drillholes Parent topic Drillhole functions in 3D GeoModeller are summarised below Elements of a i 3D Drillhole operations are available in the Import menu the Project Explorer tree GeoModeller Formations and Drillholes and from the Model menu or toolbar Project Data project onto Sections in the 2D Viewer See e Importing drillholes and drillhole geophysical logs and assays e Project Explorer and 2D Viewer Drillholes shortcut menus user interface reference e Model menu toolbar and dialog boxes user interface reference visualising e Model operations How to instructions visualising e Project Explorer Formations shortcut menus user interface reference drillholes associated with formations Structural data Parent topic 3D GeoModeller uses five distinct types of geology structural data You can view a ofa these in the 2D Viewer GeoModeler Structural data type Associated with project pd Geology data contact points Formation or fault Geology orientation data dip and dip direction Formation or fault Axial surface data axial traces Axial surface describing folds Axial surface orientation data Axial series describing folds 3D GeoModeller uses all of these elements when it computes the 3D model 3D GeoModeller regards faults formations axial surfaces and series as objects in the model which may have structural data attache
120. Modeller workspace In this section e Sizing windows e Tabbed and separate windows e Rearranging windows Sizing windows Parent topic Minimising Organising the PS 3D The following illustration shows all windows minimised GeoModeller workspace File Section Geolo Project E eb You can minimise e Single pane windows e Tabbed windows Controls in the title bar Minimise Maximise Close O amp and Restore 7 Restoring You can restore e Temporarily from minimised state e Permanently from minimised state e From maximised state Controls in the title bar Minimise Maximise Close o amp and Restore gt gt To restore a minimised window 1 Temporary Point to the window s icon 3D GeoModeller temporarily displays the window 2 Permanent Use Restore E in the title bar OR double click the window title Maximising You can maximise e Single pane windows e Tabbed windows Controls in the title bar Minimise Maximise Close o amp and Restore 5 Closing windows Close windows using the Close button amp Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 332 Contents Help Top lt 4 Back gt Tabbed and separate windows Parent topic Organising the 3D GeoModeller workspace Contents Help Top Selecting a tabbed window To select a pane in the 2D Viewer
121. Not relaxed a a From 120 85 To 207 9 ie Not relaxed L f From 207 9 j e To 284 5 irs s Add Orientation Data to the drillhole log this is User Defined data e Left double click in the Drillhole logs panel at the required depth and select Add Orientation Data choose the Formation or Fault and set Dip Dip Direction and Polarity oR O o F Remove Interval Split Interval Add Orientation Data Unrelax this Interface TOP ORE Drala logs DrillholeS45 at X 1210 Y 1568 Geological Leg rf o peo e eft 60 2 a amp _ Mie Create Geology Onentation Data SEB SERB amp EE Mormal Reverse Overturn Sret to Ed core Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 40 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 41 Contents Help Top q Back gt Project Explorer Surface meshes shortcut menu Parent topic Project Explorer 3D Viewer Parent topic User interface overview Contents Help Top The Project Explorer shortcut menu for Surface Mesh enables you to load a surface mesh a T W g y k TIMU El T
122. Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top Importing drillholes and drillhole geophysical logs and assays For reference information about this area see Import menu and dialog boxes Parent topic 3D GeoModeller Operations Contents Help Top In this section Importing a set of 3 ASCII files Collar Survey amp Geology Validation rules for drillholes 3 Files CSV format Importing a single BRGM ASCII file Importing a binary GDM data record BRGM software format Importing an XML file formatted according to the GeoSciML standard Importing drillhole geophysical logs and assays into existing drillholes Use the following menu operations Main menu Import gt Drillhole gt 3 Files Collars Surveys Geology Main menu Import gt Drillhole gt BRGM ASCII Format Main menu Import gt Drillhole gt BRGM GDM Format Main menu Import gt Drillhole gt GeoSciML Borehole Main menu Import gt Drillhole gt Assay Data into Existing Drillholes Import Export View Window Research Help 2G0 ele 20 GIS Data to Section 5 2D Geology to Section 2D Section Create 3D Geology b Drillhole d Cee 3 Files Collars Surveys Geology Grid and Mesh b BRGM ASCII Format Seismic b tT a BRGM GDM Format S89 Assay Data into Existing Drillholes You can import drillholes in 3D GeoModeller from four data file formats a set of 3 ASCII files Collar Survey amp Geology
123. See Drillhole Edit Undo an interactive Edit Edit gt Delete Delete the current drillhole from this Project Format gt Fields Display all numeric Field profiles overlayed in one panel Single View Format gt Fields Display all numeric Field profiles in individual panels Default Multiple Views Format gt Not active 1n this release Generalize Fields Colour Help Menu inactive in this release e Drillholes gt Load gt Select a Drillhole Select and Click OK to open another Drillhole log Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top Contents Help Top Drillholes gt Load Closed mo Select a Drillhole_ Maximum Distance of Drillhole 3D GeoModeller Reference 25 gt Select a Drillhole within Range e Choose a maximum distance within which to find a neighbouring hole e Select a drillhole from the list and click OK to view the Drillhole log Drillholes gt Save As e Save the current Drillhole log to a PNG file The standard file Save dialog opens select a path and enter a name for the PNG file SAYE in E Documents gt Framehlsker_Backup E GSin J MATLAB te Ply Must fee My Pictures A My Videgs Ji Personal d USGSGX By Sending _Email_Error PNG B variogram_zpararmeter PNG Filename 545 Drifthole_Log Files of type prac image Files 2013 BRGM amp D
124. TERFACE Secondary Socle 5 POINTS 2608 711 3007 757 3321 815 3356 967 3461 963 4 ASSOCIATEDORIENTATIONS 2808 734 228 6 1 Socle 3164 786 228 10 1 Socle 3338 891 228 77 1 Socle 3408 965 48 2 1 Socle INTERFACE Tertiary Socle 3 POINTS 3959 1209 4357 1404 5022 1699 4 FOLIATIONS 294833 2277538 10 55 1 Secondary 295042 2278478 10 55 1 Secondary 288625 2283317 4 85 1 Quaternary 280990 2283270 352 85 1 Tertiary SSS SS SSS SS SS SS SSS SSS SS SS SSS SSS SS SSS 5555555 end file Notes To load structural data into 3D GeoModeller the data must observe this format specification The coordinates must be the u v coordinates of the 2D space of the relevant map or the section e With regard to the geology orientation data the values for dip direction and dip follow Hoeke s convention To define a block which contains no data use 0 For example 0 ASSOCIATEDORIENTATIONS Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top 3D GeoModeller Reference 234 4 Back gt File Formats Drillholes Parent topic File formats Contents Help Top 3D GeoModeller can use drillhole data imported as either ASCII files or in the BRGM s GDM file format ASCII Format A file containing drillhole data is organised in the following way Each line of the file conta
125. TSurf Format Shapes STL Ascii Format Shapes DXF See the following table for an overview of the Export menu Control Purpose See Export 2D Data from dialog box Export 2D data Export 3D data ASCII structural data Export interface and orientation data in ASCII BRGM format GeoSciML Drillhole Export drillholes in GeoSciML compliant XML Export 3D model Summary voxets from Inversion summary voxet in ASCII format inversion VRML project website Shapes and 3D data in VRML 2 Export 3D Shapes Shapes BREP Open Cascade format Shapes TSurf format GoCAD format for triangles Shapes STL ASCII format Shapes DXF Standard 3D vector format AutoCAD 3D vector format International open standard 3D vector format Shapes STEP International open standard 3D vector format more recent than IGES Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 163 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Export 2D Data from dialog box Parent topic Use this dialog box to export your choice of data associated with a section You can on specify export format location and name of the export file and the types of data to oats 8 export 3 Export 2D data from Section Section Betina File Format Mapinfo mif mid Directory FN O O Browse Type of data All Geological Contact Point T Orientation
126. The 8D Grid Field context menu includes all of the point cloud functions except those used in Interpolation and Nearest Neighbour Analysis It includes one extra function which is only available for a 3D field Make Surface Shells which extracts triangulated Shells or Surface observation points from 3D grids of formations or numeric fields These products are useful for revising geological models following inversion Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top Contents Help Top bir Hide Field from All Views oF Field Visualisation Manager 3D GeoModeller Reference 261 4 Back gt FekIsolnt r Visualisation E Appearance ia Edit Colours and Clips 2h Display Color Table rs Export surface shells Create a Lithology or Property Shell or Surface uh Histogram Statistical idl Gutenberg Richter Plot Analysis amp Polynomial Approximation Fit Surface Le f Cross Plot with Another Field Multi Crossplot with Statistical es SA Analysis E f Multi field Analysis Regression 3 Delete he Properties The Field context menu management functions Delete and Properties are common to all of the Field data types and are described here e Delete e Deletes a field from any Mesh or Grid Type e Properties The Field Properties dialog allows the user to carry out the following data
127. This allows the body geometry to be mostly controlled by the isotropic or anisotropic interpolation parameters The two contact points control the width of the Diorite formation in the North direction 300m 1 GeoModeller Project F Testing Geomode tropy Demols eN eect see are ailai iais A lisi TAARE ES r wai errs aai aS is RESA eed ETT ty E A ai ni a N e al File Section c Model Geophysics pm Export View Research Window pe Project Section Structural Points List Editor Model FEBS UH ZS YOo YA srr OFT BA Explore SurfaceTopography Ea w Fr LevelPlan 2000 x Anisotropy Demo hS z a Formations Diorite Series e e 2 Interface m lt E 3D Data b Orientation 5 Gao a E Basement Series ah Faults pa g Models E ER Sections ET Drillholes d S Surface Meshes Q Contents Help Top 4 Datatype 3D InterFace Number of values 2 Formation Fault 1 Diorite 2 Diorite 2 Edit 3D Orientation Data Datatype 3D Orientation Number of values 2 This table is used For managing 3D Data interface orientation Hit Enter to complete the change Right click on the selected row to access the menu x Y Z 104950 0 __ 6504000 0 2000 0 ii 104950 0 6506000 0 2000 0 This table is used For managing 3D Data interface orientation Hit Enter to complete the change Right click on the selected row to access the menu Fo
128. a 271418 2358 l 271415 085 Column Size F Auto ES Reset Date Source Style Source Nul Value LINE LnelD og i Shotp x Eer Import Al Import Selected Only 8 Click Next gt to move to next Page Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 146 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Steps Steptoe Select data type to imoort Parse 5Y file Maa CSV calume to data M i _ ae Structure settion Panis V Clip to project Seismic Import Projection Project WGs 84 UT Dataset Wos g4 Longitude ddmmss ss dddmmss ss W BMS Convert Nay Database Nav DOF 0 Testing Geomodeler CapelFaustempty_capel_feust seismic_nav ddfpb an Output Di Testing Geomodeler Capel Fasstiempty _capel_faust seismic_nav DIR TE Wizard Step 4 The items in this wizard dialog are described in the following table Option Description Section Points Number of points to use to define the GeoModeller section after thinning Clip to Project When checked points outside the project extents are ignored Projection Project The GeoModeller Datum Projection Projection Dataset The imported coordinates Datum Projection Latitude Longitude Format The formats of the incoming Lat Long coords active when DMS convert is ON DMS convert When ON geodetic coordinates are converted on im
129. a Numeric field ie Fe assay etc e Right click on a numeric field in the list at the base of the Explore Edit Drillhole Log panel and select Delete this Field 5 fy Fields assays Histogram n oe Appearance Delete this Field 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top 3D GeoModeller Reference 30 4 Back gt e Appearance Edit the Appearance of a Numeric field Profile colour Vertex Symbol The Appearance of the numeric Fields assays column display can be edited by Right Clicking on the Field and selecting Appearance then choosing from the display options in the Appearance of an Object dialog fy Fields assays Histogram Hide Appearance Delete this Field fg Appearance of an Object Colour Polygon Filling Display Mode Wireframe 7 Material Plastic Vertex Symbol Size Vertex Symbol C Line Width l Line Type Solid Help Editable options are Colour Profile colour Vertex Symbol Drawn at the From To points The following options are NOT active Polygon Filling Display Mode Material Vertex Symbol Size Line Width Line Type Changes are not visible until saved and the Drillhole Viewer is reopened Appearance changes saved are applied to the chosen field in all Drillholes The Vertex Symbol shown in the Appearance of an Object dialog does not reflect the symbol
130. able for an overview of the 2D Viewer submenu and shortcut menu and the Project Explorer individual Section and Topography shortcut menus ment oes OOOO wwe o Show Hide See Common shortcut menu options Shading Wireframe Appearance Plot the model on Plot the model on the currently selected section according the current section to the current model settings See Plot the Model Settings dialog box Reset View Resets 3D GeoModeller window to the default layout See 3D GeoModeller workspace Display parameters Not in Project Explorer See Section Display Parameters dialog box Presentation Not in Project Explorer See 2D Viewer Presentation dialog box Feast oona Section gt Create a Not in Project Explorer See Create a Section from its Sector from its Trace dialog box Trace Section gt Create a Not in Project Explorer See Create a Horizontal Section Horizontal Sector dialog box Daa Not in Project Explorer See Data shortcut submenu Show modelled not for Topography or in main View menu geology lines in 3D Viewer Erase all model not for Topography or in main View menu geology Export Project Explorer only See Data shortcut submenu See Section Properties dialog box Delete Data Project Explorer only See Data shortcut submenu Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 169 Contents H
131. able size coupled one to another triangulation The quality of the representation of these curves and surfaces depends on the number of segments and triangles used This quality is controlled by the three parameters 2D Deflection Maximum distance between a line segment and the corresponding curve in the model Use this to manage the quality of rendering curved lines of modelled geology plots in the 2D Viewer 3D Deflection Maximum distance between a triangle and the corresponding part of the 3D model surface Use this to manage the quality of 3D Viewer Discretisation Diameter of an averaging sphere within which to simplify the structural data geology data and geology orientation data You can set these parameters in the Project Properties dialog box See Project Properties dialog box rendering curved surfaces of modelled geology shapes in the 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 199 Contents Help Top lt 4 Back gt Overturned geology Parent topic 3D GeoModeller concepts When specifying orientation data you need to tell 3D GeoModeller is the geology is overturned The following illustration of a vertical section shows overturned data at location C West c D East 3D GeoModeller shows orientation data as facing vectors orthogonal to the local geology surface or feature The following il
132. ace a xX Model limits Min 100000 xMax 110000 m a Use Points Min 2000000 YMax 2010000 m Use Points zMin 8000 zMax 2000 m a Use Points Create a section on d Sclinel Project zone Grid nodes Grid nodes 5 Undo af OK Close Controls in this dialog box Create a section on Select the axial surface from which you want to generate the section Model limits Limits of the section extent in the project Specify the extents xMin xMax yMin yMax ZMin You can Enter them manually Enter dimension extents from the Points List e Specify the Model limits as whole project zone Uses the appropriate coordinate value x y or z of the last most recent two points in the Points List as the Min and Max Sets the Model Limits to the full Project extents Contact our support service for information Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 113 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Create or Edit Hinge Line Data dialog box Parent topic In a 2D Viewer of a section created from an axial surface you can position points Geology menu along a hinge line and dialog boxes y Create hinge line data E X Geological Formations and Faults Z Granite Observation ID Section Provenance Unspecified ka Fold shape parameters l Co
133. ack gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 308 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Where m represents the mean and o the standard deviation Here m 2 78 and g4 0 08 When the point p in a borehole has a potential field pf p with pfl lt pf p lt pf2 we use another Gaussian pdf with my 2 91 and 09 0 05 The values pfl and pf2 are chosen to obtain the density peak close to the bottom of the unit We placed another constraint on fanom p d We imposed that the high densities are aligned along a NE SW direction and decrease when distance increases from a given plane P x y z with a smoothing function where dist is the distance between the point p and the plane P x y z In summary f p d the pdf describing the probability to find a density d at a point p that belongs in the unit is t pfl lt pf p lt pf Fl p d sf dist fom P d 1 sf dist f p d ij d m f p d filp d es yale In this example we define a vertical plan P oriented SW NE The data are generated along boreholes applying the previous rules The figure below shows the result of interpolation using kriging Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 309 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Iso values of potential Intersection of vertical plan P with topography f The next figure
134. ack gt Purpose Dip and dip direction of the fitted plane When you choose Compute 3D GeoModeller calculates this from the contact points you specify You can also edit them directly See Orientation data plot symbols for further information Choose Compute to calculate the dip and dip direction of the plane based on the points present in the Points List Note Before computing the plane orientation you need to load the contents of the Points List See Automatically update coordinates below in this table You can create orientation data points e From all the points present in the Points List e From one point with specified X Y coordinates The default point is the last entered point in the Points List Note Before creating the orientation points you need to load the contents of the Points List See Automatically update coordinates below in this table If the geology at the contact points is overturned select Reverse If the geology is not overturned select Normal see Overturned geology When checked 3D GeoModeller automatically loads the coordinates of the points in the Points List ready to compute the plane and create the orientation points that describe it When not checked e 3D GeoModeller does not automatically load the contents of the Points List When you choose Update now 3D GeoModeller loads the contents of the Points List ready to compute the plane and create the orientat
135. ading the next one The projects extents the bounding box is modifiable as long as a topographic surface has not been defined Once a topographic surface is defined the topographic surface cannot be modified and the bounding volume is fixed For reference information see e Create new project Save a project and Save As e Project Properties dialog box Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 338 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Recovering a saved project Parent topic Using this option you can select a copy of an autosaved saved project and restore it Project and file i operations When you choose File gt Autosave gt Recover Saved Project the Automatic Saves selection dialog box appears 2 Automatic Saves E Testing Geomodeller W2_Ge X Project path ee N e ag Browse List of automatic saves e Date ho E June 2009 20 18 21 Zo E June 2009 20 13 21 BS E June 2009 20 08 20 4 E June 2009 20 03 20 SB E June 2009 19 58 19 6 2 E June 2009 19 53 18 a E June 2009 19 38 17 10 EEEE gt gt To recover the project if it is still open Recovery points for the current project are displayed in reverse chronological order youngest to oldest 1 Select the row No Date Time that is to be restored and choose OK 3D GeoModeller displays the following dialog box Sel
136. agementSpecVersion 1 1 Name 3 7488 AcerNetbook SpecName Java Virtual Machine Specification SpecVendor Sun Microsystems Inc SpecVersion 1 0 Start Time 1248215722656 SystemProperties USERPROFILE C Documents and Settings David jJava vm version 1 6 0 02 b06 appl SESSIONNAME Console java vm specification vendor Sun Microsystems Inc TMP C DOCUME 1 David Upt ime 14469062 VmName Java HotSpot TM Client VM VmVendor Sun Microsystems Inc VmVersion 1 6 0 02 b06 ALLUSERSPROFILE C Documents and Settings All Users APPDATA C Documents and Settings David Application Data CLASSPATH C Program Files Java jre lib ext QTJava zip CommonProgramFiles C Program Files Common Files COMPUTERNAME ACERNETBOOK ComSpec C WINDOWS system32 cmd exe FP_NO_HOST_CHECK NO HOMEDRIVE C HOMEPATH Documents and Settings David LOGONSERVER ACERNETBOOK INUMBER_OF_PROCESSORS 2 O5 Windows_NT Path C WINDOUS system32 C WINDOWS C WINDOWS System32 Whem C Program Files QuickTime OTSystem PATHEXT COM EXE BAT CMD VBS VBE JS JSE USF USH PROCESSOR_ARCHITECTURE x86 PROCESSOR_IDENTIFIER x86 Family 6 Model 28 Stepping 2 GenuinelIntel PROCESSOR_LEVEL 6 PROCESSOR REVISION 1c02 Pro ramFiles C Proaram Files Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 198 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt 3D Ge
137. al t s fe Properties Show Hide Display or hide the object or group of objects in the viewers Wi ref rame Display B Wireframe e Wireframe for a 3D model volume or a group of volumes e Outlines for other data Display shading e Formation shading in a 3D model volume or group of volumes e Background colour for a section or group of sections Appearance Display the Appearance of an object e APERA dialog box for the object or the group of objects Appearance for Drillholes allows the drillhole display diameter to be changed If you set appearance for a group of objects 3D GeoModeller applies the settings to future new objects in the group See Appearance of objects dialog box family Delete the object or group of objects Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 16 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Project Explorer Project Explorer window and Project shortcut menus Parent topic Use Project Explorer window shortcut menu option Refresh to refresh the Project Project Explorer Explorer Use the Project object shortcut menu to save the project show the project in its folder or display properties Refresh E Explore E E Tutoria a A For Show in Folder ae Dyl Copy H i Far EE Faste F E Seq A Dril ai g o x Save As Bae meri tes zh Grit Fy Pes Properties
138. al Description Nuggeb 5 Exp S00 250 wiholesFiekis Fetleg10 ORE Aho 1 Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top Kriging Parent topic Mesh and Grid Field Interpolation Contents Help Top fe fe 3 3D GeoModeller Reference 289 4 Back gt Now that we have produced an isotropic variogram model as described in the section above The Kriging interpolation option can be selected in the field context menu Right Click on Kriging in the Field context menu and select the variogram that you saved during variogram analysis Nearest Neighbour Analysis Variogram Analysis Kriging i Variogram analysis DrillholesFields Regl0_Fe_ReglOQ_RhoTheta_2Onew Domaining Estimation Vanogram analyse DrillholesFields ReglO_Fe_Regl0_Unit_ORE2_T_pot Inverse Distance Interpolation Variogram analysis Drillholes_Fe_ReglQ_ORE UVTI Cross Validation of Kniging i Variogram analysis DrillholesFields Fe Regl0_ ORE Rhol Domaining Cross Validation Gaussian Anamorphosis ranstommation Gaussian Simulation on a Domain Gaussian Simulation All Model F Step1 Define target grid Choose New Grid and type a new grid name or e Choose Add to an Existing Grid and select from the list of existing grids with the desired characteristics 1e cell voxet size and extents The Kriging result will be written to the existing grid in a new field
139. al boundaries Bertecello et al 2008 Despite their elegancy these methods show some limitations in case of complex geometries fault reverse fault overturned units They rely on the hypothesis that an unfaulting unfolding or grid building process is effectively possible Alternatively if the formulation of the modelling method allows computation of geological distances kriging of properties can be directly performed by using this distance in the variogram calculation We propose a method that relies on the description of the shapes of the geological formations with implicit potential functions Lajaunie et al 1997 Calcagno et al 2008 We will see how these functions are used value and gradient to define a new space where distance computation takes into account the internal geometry of the geological units These functions are based on the data belonging to a unit such as e 8D points on the unit interface Structural data direction dip of the unit In this method the implicit function is a potential field function laplacian of the function equals zero and each unit is represented by this kind of function We know everywhere in the space this function and its gradient At the same time we will see how we can forget the idea of a grid the grid will be an implicit grid and the technique can be used to fill the petrophysical properties using either an hexahedral erid or tetrahedral meshes Classical Kriging In classical ge
140. al surface data point or point on an axial trace defines the surface of symmetry of a fold It has the following parameters The u v coordinates of the point For an explanation of u v see Status bar and conventions for spatial coordinates e The name of the axial surface For more information about properties and conversion to a section see e Create or Edit Axial Surface Data an Axial Trace on a Map dialog box e Create a Section from an Axial Surface dialog box Axial surface orientation data An axial surface orientation data point is the dip and dip direction of an axial surface locally an axial plane and is used to represent the direction or elongation of a fold structure in a 3D GeoModeller project It has the following parameters The dip and dip direction using Hoek s convention the line of maximum slope The u v coordinates of the point For an explanation of u v see Status bar and conventions for spatial coordinates e The polarity See Overturned geology e The plunge e The associated axial series Note that axial surface orientation data is associated with an axial series not a single axial surface since it indicates the orientation of the fold structure You need to input axial surface orientation data one point at a time For more information about properties see Create or Edit Axial Surface Orientation Data dialog box Hinge lines A hinge line is a line intersecting an axia
141. ald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 61 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Editing geological data with the Points List Parent topic The Points List works with the 3D GeoModeller point data editing dialog boxes Points List If you are creating a new set of data points the Points List supplies the point locations that make up this new set If you start editing a set of data points 3D GeoModeller loads them into the Points List As well as editing the properties of the data and being able to move the points in the 2D Viewer you can edit them in the Points List In a Create or Edit dialog box you can check or clear the Automatically Re edit check box It has the following effect Checked When you choose Create or Edit 3D GeoModeller retains the contents of the Points List so you can perform further operations on the points Clear When you choose Create or Edit 3D GeoModeller clears the Points List For more information about the Points List and orientation data see Orientation data plot symbols The Points List works with the following data creation and editing dialog boxes Create or Edit Geology Data dialog box Create or Edit Geology Orientation Data dialog box Create or Edit Axial Surface Data an Axial Trace on a Map dialog box Create or Edit Axial Surface Orientation Data dialog box Create or Edit Hinge Line Data dialog box Contents Help Top
142. ally with a covariance model arbitrarily chosen by the user That choice was more or less rationalised according to the following considerations e At the scale considered geological interfaces are smooth rather than fractal surfaces This implies that the covariance is twice differentiable A cubic model is a good compromise among the various possible models because it has the necessary regularity at the origin and has a scale parameter that can accommodate various situations The scale parameter a and sill C of the covariance K h determine the sill of the variogram of the partial derivatives it is equal to 14C 2 a in the case of an isotropic cubic covariance When there is no drift and the geological body is isotropic for example a granitic intrusion the unit gradient vector can have any direction so that its variance is equal to one The variance of each partial derivative is then equal to one third A consistent choice for C once the scale parameter a is chosen is therefore 2 a 42 That value is an upper bound for C when the potential field has a drift This is because the mean of the potential gradient is not equal to zero and its variance is less than one its quadratic mean is zero by definition Sensible measurement variances can also be defined nugget effects 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 375 Contents
143. also specify how close the mouse pointer needs to be to a point for you to be able to select it q Point Acquistion Parameters xX Acquired paint is Free i Projected on the grid Fitting on grid f the nearest vertex f the nearest horizontal line f the nearest vertical line Paint Point alignment modulus 0 02 Point selection radius pixels 5 p Help wf OK wf Apply x Close Controls in this dialog box Acquired point is Free 3D GeoModeller creates each new point exactly at the position that you click Projected on the grid 3D GeoModeller rounds the values of new point coordinates according to the Point alignment modulus Fitting on grid If you selected Projected on the grid You can round the values of new point coordinates in either or both dimensions The nearest mesh node Round both the U and V coordinates OR The nearest horizontal line Round only the U coordinate OR The nearest vertical line Round only the V coordinate Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top Contents Help Top Control Point alignment modulus Point selection radius 3D GeoModeller Reference 190 q Back gt Purpose If you selected Projected on the grid Rounding number for coordinates of new points When you create a new point 3D GeoModeller rounds its coordinates to the nearest multiple of
144. amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 84 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Section Map dialog box Parent topic Use this dialog box to specify and create a map image of the currently selected Section menu section toolbar and dialog boxes Create Section Map Settings i Section SN fos See Page Sizes A4L Map Scale 1 100000 Vertical Exaggeration ad 1 01 1 Title my Title Infrastructure Show Intersection Daka Show Orientation Show InterFace Show BoreHole Model Show Contact Show fill Show Trend Lines The project will be saved automatically ag OK Cancel You can save the map image in the following formats png gif e eps Encapsulated Postscript Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 8 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Ol Controls in this dialog box Control Purpose Section used to make the section map Page sizes Printed page size of the section map Map Scale Scale of the section map Vertical Exaggeration Degree of vertical exaggeration Title Title of the section map Show Intersection When checked the intersections of formations appear on the section map Show Orientation When checked orientation data appears on the section map Show Interface Wh
145. ampling error erratic processes or geological micro structure On a typical variogram this is where the fitted variogram line intersects the Y axis In other words semi variance Y is not zero when sample spacing is zero See the diagram below In 3D GeoModeller we can think of the value assigned to the Nugget effect as the error allowed in fitting the model to the observed data during interpolation You can choose whether to force the data through the known data points or accept some error 1n order to produce a smoother model This choice depends on how accurate you believe that your data points are in both a locational and a geological sense and whether there are sufficient observations to completely define the model You can set the Nugget effect for both contact data and orientation data separately The smaller the Nugget effect the smaller the error in fitting the data For instance if you are confident that your drill hole contacts are very accurate and there is very little other subsurface contact data then reducing the default Nugget effect on Geology data from 0 000001 to 0 00000001 will force the interpolated contacts to pass through the drill hole contacts with a much smaller error Drift The Drift parameter allows you to control interpolation of the structural component of the data where the local trend varies from one location to another You can set Drift to zero no drift no predefined trend one linear tends to planar o
146. artzite Tregolana_Shale_ Series Onlap Tregdlana_ Shale Nuccaleena Dolomite 5 Onlap Nuccaleena Dolomite Whyalla_Sandstone_Series Onlap Whyalla_Sandstone Woocallaa Dolomite Series Onlap Woocalla Dolomite Tindelpina Shale Series Onlap Tindelpina Shale Beda Volcanics Series Onlap Beda Volcanics Pandurra Formation Ser Onlap Pandurra Formation WE Basement Series Onlap Basement The user is not asked for a DTM as the DTM surface is normally embedded in the voxet ie the top of the first formation in the pile The section of the voxet above the top of the first formation can be assigned to Above Topo if it has an index defined Some times the Above Topo part of the voxet may be set to a Null value in the incoming GoCAD voxet In this case the user may need to use the voxet editor to set the null value to zero for the purposes of geophysical forward modelling and inversion since the user may want to assign properties to this part of the model ie when calculating a Bouguer correction At this point the user can run geophysical forward or inverse modelling using the voxet as input The user has two options for setting the geophysical properties for the lithology units e Use the Geophysical properties editor to set the properties of each formation as for a normal GeoModeller project OR e Load a physical properties voxet derived from another source using the Load From Voxet option provided d
147. ason when a cell is checked the corresponding symmetrical cell becomes inactive and is greyed out Note You can check or clear all of a row or column at the same time by using the buttons at the ends of the rows or column 3P Link faults with fau Stops on gt EastSideFault pyrnamaFault OE WestSideFault Controls in this dialog box Column width controls See Column width controls Caan size Auto EA Reset Save CSV file Export the list of faults linked to faults as a csv comma separated variable text file 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 106 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Create or Edit Axial Series dialog box Parent topic Use this dialog box to create or edit axial series axial families Geology menu a xi boxes Axial series 8 Delete Create anew axial series Name Douglas do Add cor iia x Close P Help Controls in this dialog box Auialsernies Axinldenesdnthewiceck Selec Clic asenestoredineor series in the project Select click a series for editing or deleting Attributes Notinuse in Notinuse 0 Edit the appearance of the selected axial series See Appearance of objects dialog box family Delete the selected axial series Create a new axial series family Name Namea newari O Colour Click in this field to select colo
148. ata to compute the 3D geometrical model To create axial surface data an axial trace e With the Points List input the points defining the position of the fold axis on the map or section view In the 2D Viewer toolbar choose Create axial surface data Axial traces Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 346 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Creating axial surface orientation data Parent topic Structural toolbar Create axial surface orientation data YY Structural data operations You can create or edit axial surface orientation data measurements of the axial plane on a map or a section view This information will be used together with other structural and geology data to compute the 3D geometrical model Axial surface orientation data are created one point at a time To define axial surface orientation data locally an axial plane e With the Points List place a single point for position only or two points for position and direction on the map or section view e In the 2D Viewer toolbar choose Create axial surface orientation data Y Creating hinge line data Parent topic Structural toolbar Create hinge line data Structural data operations When you know from outcrop the hinge line of a fold you can input this on a map or a section view This information will be used together with othe
149. athematical model with the 2D map or section in outline form or filled e Plot the model along the section markers of intersecting sections in the 2D viewer e Display or hide the plot of model geology e Delete the plot of model geology In the 3D Viewer From the 3D mathematical model build 3D shapes for each geology formation e Display or hide the 3D representation of the model geology for any formation e Present a formation of the model geology as either shaded or in wireframe e Change the appearance of the 3D representation of a formation of the model geology To perform 3D model operations use the Project Explorer or options in the Model menu or toolbar See e Model menu toolbar and dialog boxes user interface reference e 3D Viewer user interface reference e Project Explorer Models shortcut menus user interface reference e Model operations How to instructions Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 11 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt User interface overview Parent topic 3D 3D GeoModeller s user interface has the following elements There are normally GeoModeller several ways of performing an operation You may be able to perform the same Reference operation using the main menu or a shortcut menu or a toolbar e 3D GeoModeller workspace A main window which contains the main
150. atistics panel summarises the sample separation distance statistics Statistics Property Value n Total 2987712 n Effective aus oo ooo Mean 1322 837961 Mn fse GeoMean 1050 989121 Max 3545 567515 Skewness 0 534652 787 23278 619735 48 Kurtosis 0 592461 Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 274 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt e Cross Plot Scatter Plot with another or multiple fields e Options are e Cross Plot with another Field includes a linear regression line ft i a ee m an mee am 30 a an eae i a 8 th 5 e ee ee ee Sik p ae Y J E E Fe e Multi Crossplot with Choice of this option pops a Field chooser and a regression option Fields to analyse E AL203 F Fe E MN Regression Analysis Regression Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 275 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt e Multifield Analysis e Multifield analysis pops a Field chooser and then produces a textile plot of the chosen Fields ie Fe and S102 below ce MultiField Analysis Multi analysis textitle plot Fields to analyse F MN rye Si02 e The textile plot is a parallel coordinate plot in which the ordering lo
151. be somewhat dependent on the Minimum time interval chosen in the next option Once the maximum number of project saves is reached 3D GeoModeller overwrites the autosaved project copies starting with the oldest Minimum You can select the time interval between each autosave in Intervals seconds The default time interval is 60 seconds Duty Cycle You can adjust the Duty Cycle so that the Autosave process does not consume too much time and interfere with work productivity You can think of the Duty Cycle as the maximum proportion of work time the Autosave process will use The smaller the number the less impact Autosave will have but it might mean that the project will be saved less often than the minimum time interval This is best illustrated with some simple examples e Ifthe last autosave took 60 secs the minimum interval is set to 300 secs and the default Duty Cycle is 5 then the next Autosave will take place in Max 60 0 05 300 or Max 1200 300 1200 secs If the last autosave took 2 secs the minimum interval is set to 300 secs and the default Duty Cycle is 5 then the next Autosave will take place in Max 2 0 05 300 or Max 40 300 300 secs Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 67 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Print Viewer dialog box Parent topic Use this dialog box to select which data
152. ble to select All Units and or to use the Same Variogram Analysis for all the selected Units Formations Click Finish to run Domain Cross Validation The Domain Cross Validation graph is displayed together with a linear regression fit of Observed Fe_Reg10 versus Interpolated Fe_Reg10 in BA BRRYB SE aoe et fy er da fer a Cross Validatedinterpolation_F e_ Regia B a Linear Regression Fe _ Regio SUB Fe_Regi0 2 656098 293 742074 CrossvValidatedinimpolatian_Fe Regi 0 163 553921 30003562 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 322 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt e This result indicates a poor fit of interpolated to observed and isa reflection of the poor quality variogram analysis model which did not fit the data very well Sequential Gaussian Simulation SGS Stochastic simulation is a means for generating multiple equiprobable realizations of the property in question rather than simply estimating the mean Essentially we are adding back in some noise to undo the smoothing effect of kriging This possibly gives a better representation of the natural variability of the property in question and gives us a means for quantifying our uncertainty regarding what s really down there The two most commonly used forms of simulation for reservoir modeling
153. butes dialog box Parent topic Geology menu and dialog boxes Contents Help Top Use this dialog box to record information about a formation 3D GeoModeller only uses the data in the Name field All other data is simply recorded information metadata about the formation Edit geological formation attributes X Attributes Mame Cover sits Geological age Age dating method Unknown Lithology PO Comment PO Absolute geological age Start oOo Absolute geological age End oOo Mineralogy PO Texture PO Qualifying PO Nature Unknown Genesis Unknown undo af OK Fd close 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 91 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Controls in this dialog box Control Purpose Geological age 3D GeoModeller provides this space for your notes It does not use the data in calculations Age dating method Select from Unknown Palynology or Gas Chronology 3D GeoModeller provides this space for your notes It does not use the data in calculations Lithology 3D GeoModeller provides this space for your notes It does not use the data in calculations Comment 3D GeoModeller provides this space for your notes It does not use the data in calculations Absolute geological 3D GeoModeller provides this space for your notes It age Start does not use the data in calculations Absolute geolo
154. cal objects mapping 2 Parse CSV collar file 3 Map CSV colums to collar data ctio Merge to structure 4 Parse CSV survey file 5 Map CSV colums to survey data structure 6 Parse CSV geology file 7 Map CSV colums to geology BG2 Merge to Formation mse data structure Merge to Formation ee ee 8 amp 8 Map geologic objects in BG1 Merge to formation v BG nae Merge to formation 9 y ia A Merge to formation A 3 Merge ta Formation ems OK Merge ta Formation mors M2 Merge ta Formation a Mi Merge ta Formation fem BE Merge to Formation Zk BG Merge to Formation ee HJ Merge to formation EE Ha Merge to Formation gt EEE Show imported after finish lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel When the user selects Next gt in the Map Geologic Objects window an initial view of the validation results will be displayed The following figure is a synthetic example It shows a variety of validation failures demonstrating how the results are presented to the user Note that only the first validation error encountered for any single drillhole is reported to the user If multiple errors exist for any single drillhole then it will be necessary to make more than one pass through the validation process before they are diagnosed and can be fixed 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModel
155. cal phenomenon can have an anisotropic variogram For example the variogram of a sedimentary ore body has a larger range along the stratification than in the direction perpendicular to the stratification We define a space coordinate that takes into account the shape of the geological unit A good knowledge of the geology can give a natural coordinate system For example imagine an event folding a geological unit in this case the distance used for the kriging will no longer be the euclidian distance d x y z but a distance that must take in to account the folding One solution is to unfold the unit and use the Euclidian distance in the unfolded space Alternatively if we have an equation that describes the folding we can use this equation to compute the distance and we don t need to use the unfolding procedure We will illustrate this technique using the potential field describing the geological unit shapes Introduction One major problem reservoir or mine geologists often encounter in geologic modelling resource estimation or simulation is how to interpolate the petrophysical and chemical properties porosity permeability and grades in a geological model while taking into account the geometry and history of the geological units One reason for creating 3D models is to use them for 3D simulation geophysical fluid flow mechanics or estimation of resources grade heat For this purpose filling the 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitz
156. can also be accessed from the main menu Interpolation Import Export Prepare Data Exploratory Statistics 2 Variogram Analysis Eriging Domain Kriging Gaussian Simulation Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd He Drill Hole Fields to Data Point Mesh Drill Hole Fields to Regular Intervals Group Fields Add Current Model Field Litho to Mesh Fe Add X Y Z Fields to Mesh Compute New Field then Add to Mesh Transform Field Using Gaussian Anamorphosis Compute New Field by Polynomial Approx Histogram Cross Plot Multi Cross Plot MultiField Analysis Run Wizard Cross Validation of Eriging Run Wizard Cross Validation of Domain Kriging Gaussian Anamorphosis Transformation Gaussian Simulation on a Domain 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 282 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Inverse Distance Interpolation Parent topic The wizard contains four steps as shown in the next set of dialogs Mesh and Grid Field Step 1 Define Target Grid Select the target output grid Interpolation e New Grid or e Add to an Existing Grid Define Target Grd ane Grid Definition Mew Grid Grd Mame Iron Inii Interpolated Field and Standard Deriaton Field Add to an Existing Grid ond Defines Step 2 Grid Definition Define the output grid resolution and extents and the neighb
157. cations and scales of the axes are simultaneously chosen so that the connecting lines each of which represents a case are aligned as horizontally as possible Plots of this type can accommodate numerical data as well as ordered or unordered categorical data or a mixture of these different data types Knots and parallel wefts are features of the textile plot which greatly aid the interpretation of the data a e ka 1 z E IE pe m Fe_Transfo_Textie_Plot S02 _Trarsfo_Textle_Plot Fields Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top 3D GeoModeller Reference 276 4 Back gt e Variogram Analysis e Selecting variogram analysis opens a wizard which takes the user through the steps required to produce a sensible variogram model prior to running the kriging interpolators The Step1 dialog ishown below The wizard contains four steps e Selection of the variogram analysis type The user can modify an existing analysis or create a new one The analysis could be saved as an attribute of a field of a mesh of vertices An the same time we can define the maximum radius to compute the pairs building the variogram and in which coordinate space the variogram will be computed In 2D we can work in x y or in r sqrt x 2 y 2 In 3D we can work in x y in this case we don t take into account the z coord
158. ce 366 Contents Help Top Contents Help Top q Back gt Overlapping intervals From To are not permitted in the geology file 8 file case and will be reported to the user in the Validation report Holes that fail this test will not be imported Example Error missing decimal point creates overlapping interval Geology From To intervals must be continuous down each hole 8 file case The last To must equal the next From Failures will be reported to the user as a Missing interval in the Validation report Holes that fail this test will be imported if the user chooses to continue Example a Error missing interval from 7 5 to 10 Geology intervals must contain a litho or formation descriptor Any Null or blank litho or formation descriptors will be reported to the user in the Validation report Holes that fail this test will not be imported Example Holename From To Litho Colour 0 0 5 3 A Bn 5 3 7 5 Gd Pk 7 5 10 Gy gt gt ERROR MISSING DESCRIPTOR 10 0 15 1 Ss Rd Geology From To 8 hole case intervals with zero thickness are not permitted From To OR consecutive Tos are equal BRGM ASCII case Failures will be reported to the user in the Validation report Holes that fail this test will not be imported A workaround for this problem is to set the zero length intervals to a small thickness 0 1m 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back g
159. ce reference e Topography and section operations How to instructions Geology objects formations faults axial series and surfaces Parent topic 3D GeoModeller models contain three types of geology object El ts of i l e oa ee s Geology formation which belongs to a geology series which in turn belongs to the GeoModeller stratigraphic pile pope e Fault e Axial surface which belongs to an axial series family When you create a geology object in 3D GeoModeller you specify e Properties that 3D GeoModeller uses including name and colour Formations The series to which it belongs You can create series and associate formations after you create them Axial surfaces The axial series to which it belongs You need to create the axial series before the axial surface e Other information for your own use that 3D GeoModeller doesn t use Before 3D GeoModeller can work with a formation fault or axial surface you need to associate geology data with it For an axial surface you also need to create a section from it To perform formation and fault operations use the Project Explorer or options in the Geology menu See e Geology menu and dialog boxes user interface reference e Project Explorer Formations shortcut menus user interface reference e Geology formations and series operations How to instructions To perform axial series and surface operations use the Project Explorer or options in the Geol
160. ciates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 205 Contents Help Top Contents Help Top q Back gt 2 Ifthe DTM does not cover the full extents of the project 3D GeoModeller warns you and does not perform the import 3D GeoModeller displays feedback on the actual DTM extents compared to the project extents You can continue with the import but we do not recommend it If you continue 3D GeoModeller attempts to extrapolate the DTM to cover the project extents using a spline interpolator often with poor results particularly in areas of high topographic relief Filename EM_SRTM NZ_SRTM_16bit_Tiff_new tif Browse Unit jm Projection NZGD49 New Zealand Map Grid Project bounding box AAA ARP xMin 2600000 XMax 2800000 m YMin 6200000 YMax 6380000 m Grid bounding box XMin 2630000 XMax 2749950 m X cell size SD Y cell size SD m No of points on X 2400 No of paints on Y 2800 LM i x Subsampling This DEM only covers part of your Geomodeller project Recommend Rate 0 Output Ah you do not proceed with import Description Ha The bounds of your DEM are Topography of the model Mink 2630000 Maxx 2749950 MinY 6210050 Max 6350000 P Help wf OK Fd close 3 Ifthe DTM contains a large number of nulls around the perimeter 3D GeoMo
161. ck gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 235 Contents Help Top lt 4 Back gt File Formats 2D and 3D Data Objects Parent topic File formats Contents Help Top The main difference between the 2D and 3D data objects is not so much about the data but rather the way in which these are used in 3D GeoModeller The loading and export of both 2D and 3D data objects share the same low level file reading and writing routines The decision to use or not use the third dimension is made only at the execution time The available formats are as follows DXF 12 and 18 IGES STEP VRML 10 and 20 BRep DXF Format Data eXchange Format The DXF format is very popular in the world of geographical information systems GIS and CAD It is a proprietary format published by AUTODESK creator of the popular CAD CAM software AUTOCAD DXF is an ASCII file format A detailed description of this format can be found in the AUTOCAD reference manual Drawing Interchange and File Formats IGES Format Initial Graphic Exchange Specification The IGES format is an ANSI standard intended for the data exchange of manufactured objects The following URL links have a complete description of this format http www nist gov iges http www iges5x org STEP Format Product Data Representation and Exchange The STEP format is an ISO standard ISO 13008 intended for the data exchange of manufactured objects VRML
162. controls Field mapping table Data Fields that 3D GeoModeller requires Source style How you intend to supply the data for each 3D GeoModeller field and object type File Import the data from the import data file Project Select an object from the project and associate all import data with it User Enter the data yourself If you have selected File Import data field containing the required data Project Object from the project with which 3D GeoModeller will associate all import data User Data value that you enter Null value Value in the import data that represents Null Unit conversion Distance units of the import data 3D GeoModeller converts the import data to metres Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 157 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt CSV data import wizard Select sections for projecting data Parent topic If you are projecting the 3D data onto sections after import and converting it to 2D CSV data r data associated with a section use this page to select the sections onto which you a want to project the data and the sensitivity parameters that you require 3P CSV Data Import p xj Steps Define section onto which data is projected Step 4 of 5 Controls in this wizard page Sections onto which Sections available onto which you can project imported data project
163. ction gt Topography gt Define as an horizontal plane Gf you want a simple horizontal planar topography at a specified elevation or RL The topographic surface is essential in a project It defines the upper limit of the 3D geology model the geology map for your project area is created from the intersection of this topographic surface and the mathematical 3D model Creating a section Parent topic e 2D Viewer shortcut menu Section gt Create a section from its trace if you i et sae defined its trace on the topography or in another section using the Points List and section operations e 2D Viewer shortcut menu Section gt Create a Horizontal Section if you want to create a horizontal planar section To create a section from its trace first draw the trace of the required section line on topographic surface or in another section view using the Points List In a 2D Viewer a section is presented in its 2D space True along line distances are preserved the section is not projected onto the 2D Viewer plane This transformation implies a change of coordinate system x y z to u v By default the coordinates of the 1st point of the trace of the section in 2D space are fixed at u 0 and v z l e v z its height or RL Note u is the section s x axis v is the section s y axis typically a height axis In the dialog box for the creation of a section you can modify the coordinates for t
164. ctuate considerably and also speeds up matrix inversion e Minimum Points in neighbourhood The minimum number of points in the radial search required to calculate a value for the cell If the minimum is not reached then the cell value is set to Null e Maximum Radius of Neighbourhood The maximum radial search distance used to scan for points to include in the estimation of a cell value e Anisotropic Ratio This parameter is not currently relevant to this procedure and should be left as the default of 1 e Click Next gt to continue to Step 2 Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top Contents Help Top 3D GeoModeller Reference 321 4 Back gt Step 2 Define Units to Fill Select the Units in the same manner as described for the Domaining Estimation procedure DriholesFiekds Regi0_Fe_Regld_RhoTheta_zinew DelfholesFells Regi0_Fe Regi Rhotheta z0rew DrifholesRiekds_ Reg 10 Fe Regld RhoTheta zonew w Drilholes Fe Reg ORE UVTI1 nlesFielde Reg iD Fe_Regil_RhoTheta_2onew Toggle the Filled Unit Formation to interpolate Select a Unit from the Geometry Used drop down Select the Variogram Analysis to use from the drop down lists Normally you would select the Unit that was modelled in the Variogram Analysis for the Filled Unit and Geometry Used There are Toggles availa
165. d amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 314 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt e Toggle t Direction and click Adjust to open the t fit dialog and step through the fitting process as for uv fitting above Ba iunii t Verogrem Ainshrss yunini i Vegy an Model hebed Canparen Trp J Mgl Effect Spherion vi yi eT a 1 000 0 005 010 g 0 j bas agaa ADS Od 7 y2 iunior amp Derechesrval Vaia Var ac UV oLeg Dertance chist m Lage Thick Lag Distance 0 002 pot Lage 0 deg e Click Next to proceed to Step 4 to save the variogram analysis Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top 3D GeoModeller Reference 315 q Back gt e Step 4 Save Analysis Contents Help Top The Step 4 dialog shows a graphic summary of the variograms fitted for uv and t and displays the variogram model equations under Description in the lower panel below each graph Enter or edit the default Analysis Name and click Finish to save the results Viunibtorm t 100 Er 300 400 eno gii r VWiunifons uy yo yA total yunon t yo Y1 2 y total Pigge hi L2S Ga Lea Paget ii eS 1 A a Se Vanogram Analysis Dnillholes_Fe_ReglOORE UVT1 crested OK The Project must be saved to complete the process as the variogram analysis is sav
166. d to them For more information about these see Geology objects formations faults axial series and surfaces You can input these data interactively in the 2D Viewer or import them into your project 3D GeoModeller displays each data point in the colour of the geology formation fault or axial surface with which it is associated Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 8 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt To perform structural data operations use options in the Import menu importing and Structural menu or toolbar creating and editing See Import menu and dialog boxes user interface reference importing e Points List user interface reference creating in 2D Viewer Geology menu and dialog boxes user interface reference creating and editing e Structural data operations How to instructions importing e Structural data operations How to instructions creating and editing In this section types of object e Geology data e Geology orientation data dip and dip direction e Axial surface data axial traces e Axial surface orientation data e Hinge lines Geology data A geology data point represents a point on a geology surface such as an interface contact or fault It has the following parameters The u v coordinates of the point For an explanation of u v see Status ba
167. d variable e Calculated variogram model using Pot on Unit Formation ORE2 Steps Save Analysts 4 of 4 T hi UUS IMHO YO Y0 Y1 Y total Piaget 03 Se giS 0 35 te Ei puea e a Mefieg 10 ORE Pot Step 4 Gaussian Simulation on a Domain e From the Grids and Meshes Context Menu gy Grids and Meshes H BY DrillholesFields 3 DrilholesFields_Reg10 14 Current_Model_Grid WE crossValidateInterp_FeReg 10Iso1 EE CrossValidateVari_FeReg10Iso1 MMI Fe Regio a F CrossValidatedInterp Fe Regi0UvT1 EE CrossValidatedVari_Fe_Reg10UVT1 F CrossValidatedInterp_FeReg 10 2 EA CrossValidatedVari_FeReg10 F GaussianAnamorphosis_Fe_Reg10 OR Contents Help Top Nearest Neighbour Analysis Variogram Analysis kriging I Domaining Estimation Inverse Distance Interpolation Cross Validation of Kriging I Domaining Cross Validation Gaussian Anamorphosis Transformation Gaussian Simulation on a Domain Gaussian Simulation All Model d 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt 3D GeoModeller Reference 327 GeoModeller User Manual q Back gt Contents Help Top Select Gaussian Simulation then Gaussian Simulation on a Domain from the Interpolation drop down in the Main menu Prepare Data 2 lt gt P Q if in B ao Exploratory Statistics a
168. data associated with selected Project to Sections formations and faults Project it onto selected sections and permanently convert it from 3D data to data associated with these sections Select a maximum projection distance 3D Orientation and Import geology orientation data associated with selected Project to Sections formations and faults and project to nearest section Select a maximum projection distance These datatypes are discussed in more detail in the manual under 2D and 3D Meshes and Grids In 3D GeoModeller Import 2D Section Create Contents Help Top Export View Window gt 2D 615 Data to Section 2D Geology to Section 3D Geology 2D Section Create Drillhole Grid and Mesh Seismic This option allows the user to to automatically create vertical cross sections in a GeoModeller project by importing multiple series of points and section attribute labels in a CSV format An example of the required CSV file format is shown below in this case each pair of points defines a cross section 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 140 Contents Help Top lt 4 Back gt Section East North 10032N 551843 6751690 10032N 554718 6751690 10041N 551834 6751395 10041N 554757 6751395 10051N 551839 6751090 5 10051N 554757 6751090 5 The CSV import wizard is used to parse the file The vertical c
169. deller does not take them into account when computing the DTM extents This can affect the quality of the imported DTM as 3D GeoModeller attempts to fill any holes as described in the previous step We recommend that before import you fill Null holes or Null perimeters in the DTM using publicly available SRTM data see DTM data sources NASA SRTM data 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 206 Contents Help Top lt 4 Back gt Wireframe format DXF DTM import Parent topic How 3D GeoModeller imports the DTM 3D GeoModeller can import a topographic surface DTM as a 3D DXF wireframe Currently it expects a 3DFACE DXF primitive but can also handle 3D polyline primitives as may be found in contour maps or 3D points as in spot heights It extracts grids and saves the DXF height information to an ERMapper grid file and then imports in one operation using the same extent tests described above Currently 3D GeoModeller does not respond if the DXF file contains unsupported primitives If the DXF file contains the required primitives 3D GeoModeller displays the Loading wireframe DTM dialog box one Fz my 1 rom Name SurfaceTopography Filename Browse Projection NZGD 49 New Zealand Map Grid Unit jm Project bounding box xMin 1630000 Max 1750000 m YMin 6210000 YMax 6350000 m zMin 10000 zMax 1
170. delling of heat flow 3D GeoModeller README and installation guide 3D GeoModeller Tutorials 3D GeoModeller Tutorials and Halp introduction Tutorial case study A Phillppe s model Tutorial case study B Antonio s map Tutorial case study C Unconformities and Intrusives Tutorial case study E Forward and inveree modelling of potentia feid data Tutorial cass study F Purnama intrepid Tutorial case study G Drilinolse 271 Male Strat Tutorial cass study H Mansfield Brighton Vic 3186 Australia Tutorial case study J Geothermal tal 613 9583 1077 fax 61 39592 4142 mall infoygsomodelier com 2003 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzg rald and Associates Pty Ltd webelte www gsomodetier com Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 196 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Licence manager Parent topic The Licence Manager enables you to view and manage your 3D GeoModeller ea nee and licence If you do not have a valid licence when you launch 3D GeoModeller the Sa E Licence Manager window opens instead of 3D GeoModeller s GeoModeller Licence Manager i 0 x Intrepid Geomodeller v1 3 v42_28aug08 for Windows by SUNFIRE Build 1076 This software is brought to you by Intrepid Geophysics For technical support email support geomodeller com Please contact Intrepid Geophysics for any sales enquiries Location Melbourne Australia e T
171. dently well behaved geological volumes are also important for the geophysical modeling and inversion aspects of 3D GeoModeller Both the total mass and total magnetization of a unit is inherently tied to the volume of the body It is now more generally recognized that it is the volume of the unit not just individual bounding surfaces that is important in producing believable 3D geology models In later sections of this manual many references to characterizing allowable volume changes while inversion is being pursued will be made Faults Several methods are used to handle faults If faults delimit blocks and the geology is not correlated from one block to the other it obviously suffices to process each block separately These are termed TERRAIN faults For most other cases the method used in 3D GeoModeller is a transposition to 3D potential fields of the method proposed by Mar chal 1984 This handles faults in the 2D interpolation of the elevation of interfaces where faults are entered as external drift functions This method requires knowledge of the fault plane and also its zones of influence For the case where a normal fault intersects the whole study zone the geology is divided into two sub zones D and D This fault induces a discontinuity of the potential field whose amplitude is not known Cokriging can accommodate that discontinuity whatever its amplitude by introducing a drift function complementing the L polynomial drif
172. display window you want to print Project menu Project toolbar and dialog boxes q Print Viewer Choose viewer to print 3D Viewers 2D Viewers Topography Section Section i Section3 Print x Close Controls in this dialog box Print the current view in the 3D Viewer Print the Topography or one of the Sections as you select Print Display the Print dialog box Close the dialog box without printing Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 68 Contents Help Top lt 4 Back gt Project Properties dialog box Parent topic Use this dialog box to create a new 3D GeoModeller project or edit the properties of Project menu an existing one Project toolbar and dialog Once you have created a project you are not able to edit the Project extents or the boxes Datum Projection You can hwoever edit data in the other fields at any time E r Project properties X Mame Mansfield Version fio Authors PMM Date 15 12 2008 9 33 56 Description Mansfield 1 50 000 Map Sheet Victoria Australia Case Study H SE cass MGA zone S5 Unit Im Precision fi m Height datum GDAS4 hd W Dynamic selection in Viewers Project limits xMin 416000 Max 433000 m Min 5880000 YMax 5897000 m 2Min 2000 ZMax 1000 m Geometric parameters 2D Deflection
173. duction to interpolation concepts and parameters Parent topic Model interpolation parameters Contents Help Top Isotropic Properties and Range 3D GeoModeller s default settings assume that a formation or series has geometric properties that are isotropic This means that the properties of the formation vary equally in all directions the search neighbourhood for interpolation is spherical and is defined by a radius equal to the range parameter The default range parameter is the diagonal length of the project bounding box Geological Contact and Orientation data 3D GeoModeller uses both geological contact data and orientation data gradients during interpolation It uses co kriging in its dual form to interpolate both types of data assuming a cubic model Orientation data gradients or derivatives have a much higher weighting than contact data increments in this dual process 3D GeoModeller further controls interpolation using two additional kriging parameters usually derived by variogram modelling See the following sections for a discussion of their estimation and impact 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 209 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Nugget Effect The Nugget effect is the error variance that remains when the sample spacing is zero Two measurements at the same location give different results This may be due to s
174. e Mesh and Grid Topological Structure e Mesh and Grid Examples amp Application Flow Chart e Mesh and Grid element field datatypes implemented in mesh grid objects Introduction to 2D and 3D meshes Parent topic 2D The purpose of Meshes and Grids in 3D GeoModeller is to provide 2D and 3D objects and 3D Meshes and Grids In 3D for storing querying manipulating and visualising raw input data and the products CeoModeller derived from them by interpolation and geophysical forward modelling and inversion They are also used for storing raw and processed 2D and 3D data of similar types imported from external sources other software packages These external data sets can be used as inputs or references for these same internal functions Input data types stored in these objects include drillhole assays drillhole geophysical logs 2D observations surface airborne geochemical geophysical 3D observations terrain seismic picks depth to basement 2D grids geophysics geochemistry elevations isopachs 3D grids geological and geophysical voxets from other software GoCAD e Outputs from the internal processing functions listed and stored in these objects include Contents Help Top Interpolation by Inverse Distance Classical and Domain Kriging e 2D grids of geophysics and geochemistry e 8D grids of assays or rock properties density and susceptibility 3D Geophysical forward modelling and inversion e 2D geophysical grid
175. e to an existing project fault of a different name 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 161 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt CSV data import wizard Report Parent topic After the import 3D GeoModeller displays a report of the operation CSV data import wizard Information x i You have added 434 Interface 3D from 434 in the table selection to your data Use the Explorer to manage them Formation Fault Description Points Imported PurnamaFault Formation Fault 30 VolcanicBreccia Formation Fault 17 PorphyriticAndesite Formation Fault 101 Dacite Formation Fault 84 SilicaBreccia Formation Fault 69 ClayBreccia Formation Fault 80 Hornblende Formation Fault 44 Sediment Formation Fault 9 Total 434 0 entries ignored O0 entries outside Project Bounding Box IO entries unmapped Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 162 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Export menu and dialog boxes Parent topic 3D Use the Export menu items to export project data in the format of your choice GeoModeller main menus Export View Window Help t Export View Window Help Export 2D data Pihla aP Tie St Export 2D data ta w ASCII structural data e ae Borehole WIL JL E port 3D model S VRML project website Shapes User selected Formats Shapes
176. e to finish Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 373 Contents Help Top Contents Help Top lt 4 Back gt The numeric data can be visualised in profile as part of the drillhole log via the Drillholes branch in the Explore tree Double clicking on an individual drillhole in the tree or RightClicking and selecting Properties will bring up the drillhole log view Be Oeillbole Properties 345 Onitholes Edit Format Help ETA DrillholeS45 at X 1210 Y 1568 Cectegical Log eological Model Misfit 1 28 F H sectors gt ree ms Ss su Sus OEEO Drillholes are listed in the Project Explore tree under Drillholes Drillholes also appear under Formations Dykes and Faults in a Drillhole sub branch under each unit 1f the drill hole contains an interval from that formation dyke or fault See File Formats Drillholes for further details on import formats 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 374 Contents Help Top lt 4 Back gt Geoscientific Principles and Underpinnings Parent topic 3D GeoModeller Reference In this section Inference of the covariance of the potential field e Radial Basis Functions 3D GeoModeller draws on many aspects of Mathematics Physics Material Sci
177. e user of any elevation mismatches e Hole names must begin with the characters a z A Z Drill holes with names commencing with illegal characters numbers will be reported to the user in the Validation report and will not be imported if the user chooses to continue Duplicate Hole names in any of the import files will be reported to the user in the Validation report Duplicate holes will not be imported Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 365 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Drill Hole import files are tested to ensure that the survey and litho records for each are in Depth sorted order Failure of this test will be reported to the user in the Validation report Holes that fail this test will not be imported In the multiple 8 file case each Drill Hole name in the Collar file must have a matching Hole name in the Survey and Geology files If a Hole name in the Collar Survey or Geology file does not occur in any of the other 3 files then the user will be warned in the Validation report A Hole in the Collar file without a matching survey or geology entry will not be imported Holes in the survey and or geology files without a match in the Collar file will be reported to the user during validation and will be ignored if the user chooses to continue When a Final Total Hole Depth field HOH is available in the co
178. e you specify If you selected Cell dimension Fixed Size of rendered cells in metres If you selected Cell dimension Variable Dimensions of rendered cells in each dimension in metres If you change nX nY nZ 3D GeoModeller adjusts these automatically nX nY nZ If you selected Cell dimension Variable Numbers of rendered cells in each dimension within the Build limits If you chanee X Y Z 3D GeoModeller adjusts these automatically rai Limit by topography When checked 3D GeoModeller only displays the 3D model within the topographic surface Advanced mesh When checked 3D GeoModeller displays the mesh warped so that it follows the topographic surface When clear 3D GeoModeller displays the mesh as parameters Warp mesh to topography straight lines parallel to the axes If you check Limit by topography the lines of mesh end abruptly at the topographic surface Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top Project data onto Sections dialog box Parent topic Model menu toolbar and dialog boxes Contents Help Top 3D GeoModeller Reference 127 4 Back gt Data that is not on a section such as drillholes or imported 3D data would not normally be visible in the 2D Viewer It may be useful too to be able to see the collective data from close by sections all together on one section
179. eas 1 W012 71410 SIS 1800546 255 lad E 3d aral OO000 Ge LOO227 1415 205 1G00547 556 132 13 23 3507 000001 G08 LOOS271417 G65 1600543 80E 133 2506 33 5573 000001 S08 20 DOO 72417 1651600550 03E 133 z 394 35579 000001 608 Column Ste E Auto EA ES Reet d wih these separators we don t have enough columns wie need at least Scolumns Wizard Step 2 3 Set the file format to Fixed Columns and select Preview entire file 4 Click Add to add a field then enter the fixed format column positions for each variable Use an editor to obtain the column positions before the import run Do not attempt to edit the automatic column position for last field as this usually corrupts the previous field and turns the previous field rows red Parse CSV file Step 2 of 4 Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 150 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt The required fields for the horizon import are Field Description Data type Line The Seismic line identifier created in the alpha GeoModeller project during Navigation numeric import Shotpoint Shotpoint number used to map coordinates numeric to Formation picks The lookup identifier with an identicaL match in the Navigation file Horizon 1 The depth of the seismic pick for numeric horizon 1 relative to project DTM elevation at that x y loca
180. eate or Edit Axial Surfaces dialog box Axial Surface Attributes dialog box Create or Edit Axial Surface Data an Axial Trace on a Map dialog box Create or Edit Axial Surface Orientation Data dialog box Create a Section from an Axial Surface dialog box Create or Edit Hinge Line Data dialog box Provenance Provenance Editor dialog box 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 87 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Geology menu cascades and the Structural toolbar Parent topic The Geology menu has a cascade menu 2D Structural In this section Geology menu and dialog Geology menu boxes e 2D Structural sub menu and Structural toolbar Geology menu Parent topic Use Geology menu options to create and edit geological objects in your geological Geology menu model such as formations the stratigraphic pile faults and axial series and surfaces cascades and the Structural File Section Geology Model Geophysics Import Ex toolbar Prapect Pi Formations Create or Edit G i E Stratigraphic Pile Create or Edit a Stratigraphic Pile Visualise y acexnnises W Faults Create or Edit gt Link Faults with series g Link Faults with Faults fii Axial series Create or Edit Ed Axial surfaces Create or Edit Create section from axial surface 2D Structural i k Provenance Editor See the following table for an overview of the
181. ect an Option E xj Are you sure you want to replace the current project with the auto saved one 2 Choose Yes to overwrite the currently loaded project gt gt To recover the project if the computer crashed or 3D GeoModeller locked up or crashed Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 339 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Contents Help Top When you restart 3D GeoModeller the following dialog box appears Re open project x o An abnormal shutdown has been detected Would you like to open the last project Cancel 1 Ifyou are satisfied that the most recent save of the project to be restored is complete then choose OK 3D GeoModeller restores the most recent save If you had not saved the model for some time before the abnormal shutdown then choose Cancel and then choose File gt Autosave gt Recover Saved Project and go to step 2 2 Automatic Saves E Testing Geomodeller W2_Geo xX Project path Eee e N E E a alae Browse l List of automatic saves a Date tt dune 2009 20 18421 June 2009 20 13 21 Bt Sune 2008 20 08 20 June 2009 20 03 20 SB sd June 2009 19 58 19 6 t lt i s E June 2009 19 53 18 Zo June 2009 19 48 18 eoo o o o pomeo O 2 Select the most recent autosave from the top of the list and choose OK gt gt To restore a projec
182. ected Drillhole in the 2D Viewer ie RightClick on a selected drillhole I dy PRC_CIRC_DHOO028 i Show F Edit Delete fe Properties Options in these menus Option Description s Show Hide Show Hide the selected drillhole in the 3D Viewer banada See Common shortcut menu options Edit Edit an individual drillhole Display the selected drillhole in the Drillhole Viewer Delete the selected drillhole from the project The Drillhole Fields to Regular Intervals Drillhole Properties and Drillhole Editing functions are discussed in detail below Project Explorer and 2D Viewer Drillhole Visualisation Parent topic Project Explorer Contents Help Top Drillhole Properties Display the selected drillhole in the Drillhole Viewer Selecting Properties from any of the Explore Drillhole context menus opens the drillhole log in a graphic viewer The viewer displays the drillhole as a section down the hole path with the following features Depth labels at regular depth intervals down the hole path Logged Geology in the current Model Pile colours Computed Model Geology in the current Model Pile colours 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 23 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt From To profiles of numeric Fields autoscaled on the same depth axis as the Geology Log title with Holename X Y Collar coordinate and
183. ed data See How to select items from a list Maximum distance of Data needs to be within this distance of the section for 3D projection GeoModellerto project it onto the section Simplification radius If there are several points within the same radius 3D GeoModelleronly projects one point to represent them CSV data import wizard Create and select objects to receive data Parent topic After you have mapped the import data fields with the corresponding fields and object CSV data types in the 3D GeoModeller project you can match each instance of an import data eee eee object with an object in the 3D GeoModeller project If no matching object exists in the project you can create it in the import operation For example for matching formations and faults 3D GeoModeller displays a list of all import file formations and faults and tries to match it with its own existing formations and faults displaying a list For each import formation or fault you can Import the data to a corresponding project formation or fault in the project OR e Create a new formation or fault in the project In this section e Matching objects e Creating new objects during import e Columns in this wizard page e Global and individual match up actions Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 158 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Matching
184. ed in the Project xml 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top 3D GeoModeller Reference 316 4 Back gt e Domain Kriging Interpolation Worked Example e Select a variable for domain kriging from the Grids and Meshes context menu OR Wis Grids and Meshes 14 O Current_Model_Grid EN crossValidateInterp_FeReg10Iso1 E crossValidateVari_FeReg10Iso1 Nearest Neighbour Analysis Variogram Analysis Kriging d Domaining Estimation Inverse Distance Interpolation Cross Validation of Kriging Domaining Cross Validation Gaussian Anamorphosis Transformation Gaussian Simulation on a Domain Gaussian Simulation All Model Select Domain Kriging then Run Wizard from the Interpolation drop down in the Main menu Interpolation Import Export View Window Research Help Prepare Data H lt gt Pe Qf TF ii 23 Exploratory Statistics F Variogram Analysis Kriging Domain Kriging n Run Wizard Gaussian Simulation 1 k Mesh Grid DrilholesFields_Reg10 Contents Help Top Cross Validation of Domain Kriging 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top Contents Help Top 3D GeoModeller Reference 317 4 Back gt Step 1 Define Target Grid e Choose New Grid and type a new grid name or e Choose Add to an Exis
185. ed or Assay log columns to choose an interval A red line will appear in the Geology column to highlight the depth interval selected Double click again and select Split Interval The second diagram below shows the result in both right and left panels Drilhole log DrillholeS45 at X 1210 Y 1568 Geological Log Geological Model Misfit 0 278 ai I i a ae a 25 eo 5 410 a E a a F 4 30 x 4 I 50 ao i 70 a0 i ORE 100 110 Remove Interval WE Split Interval 3 Add Orientation Data Unrelax this Interface TOP ORE Depth IEE IL i tlle ame e Log Interval ee a it aie DrillholeS45 at X 1210 1568 B Geological Log Geological Model Mislit 026 l O E E Fat I ml In the last diagram the new formation has been set by left double Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd lt 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 39 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt clicking in the right panel and setting the formation from the top drop down list OR by left clicking on the Interval icon in the left panel and selecting from the formation drop down list as shown previously Tihe be B Log Intervals DrillholeS45 at X 1210 Y 1568 Gasteghcal Log Ei g we 5 Top H From 0 To 13 6 b hi HH E Se ener P ai ne l
186. eference 45 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt 2D Viewer Parent topic The 2D Viewer for the topography map view appears automatically when you define User interface the topography for a project and when you load a project Other 2D Viewers for other ee section views appear on request N 2 4 Topography kad Section1 EJ Y N Section2 EJ Section3 Ed N G X uJ NG The 2D Viewer enables you to display the elements of the map or a section and to work in its 2D space A 2D Viewer opens automatically when a section is created The 2D Viewer defines the two dimensional space of the map view or a section view Note The 2D Viewer space is not a projection onto a plane Rather it is the u v space which describes the map area or the section By default all available sections are accessible via tabs along the bottom edge The u v coordinates of the current mouse location are displayed And also x y Z xi 1l0e262 926m yi200F esr 04m zi 129 558m ural 119m vi 129 558m e The 2D Toolbar is active whenever a 2D Viewer window is selected Some toolbar buttons may be inactive indicating that they are currently invalid and so unavallable In this section e 2D Viewer toolbar e 2D Viewer shortcut menus Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 46 Contents Help Top 4 Back g
187. elds to regular intervals z Delete Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 243 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt From Explore 3D Geology Context Menu Create 2D 3D Grids from Model Parent topic Build meshes and grids from your 3D Model Mesh Grid Operations e 2D Toggle one or more of the options in the left hand panel Thickness of Unit Isopach Note Unit formation e Elevation of Unit Isohypse Elevation Interfaces Only where formation interface is defined Elevation of the topographic surface Project DTM OR 3D Toggle one or more of the options in the right hand panel e 3D Model e Gradient model gradients calculated by the implicit function e Potential model potential calculated by the implicit function e Choose Only on model or Model and all units for gradients and potential Hide GS GeomodellerTolsatis P Formations Wireframe Create Grid with Zero Value Field t Faults i Ei Sections H ny Drillholes J i 3 Geology 3D Model from 2D Grid ra We Grids and meshes Create 20 30 Grids from Model Create 3D Grids with Physical Properties Delete 3D The Use Topography option and the Topography sampling value in the upper right panel red allow the user to create a semi regular voxet where a smaller voxel Z dimension can be specified for the voxet between the min
188. elected model the covariance parameters of K nugget effect scale parameter of each covariance component in the three main directions sill of each component are chosen so as to lead to a satisfactory global fit of the directional sample variograms of the three components of the gradient Figure 11 0 1 0 10000 18000 20000 Example of fitting of the covariance of the potential field from the sample variograms of the partial derivatives of the potential field Limousin dataset Massif Central France Aug 2004 Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 376 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Figure 11 shows an example of such a fitting 1485 structural data was sampled in an area of about 70 x 70 km in the Limousin Massif Central France The main u v w coordinates here coincide with the geographical x y z coordinates Since the structural data is all located on the topographic surface the variograms have been computed in the horizontal plane only Note that the sill of the variogram of the vertical component is much lower than that of the horizontal components This is due to the fact that the layers are subhorizontal so that the vertical component of the gradient displays limited variations around its non zero mean The model K includes three components the second of which only depends on the horizontal component
189. elephone 61 3 9593 1077 Fax 61 3 9592 4142 Email info geomodeller com Email Support Open GeoModeller Website Follow the instructions in the Licence Manager Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 197 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt About 3D GeoModeller dialog box Parent topic The About dialog box shows the current 3D GeoModeller version and enables you to Help menu and view configuration information dialog boxes Intrepid Geomodeller v1 3 v42_28aug08 for Windows by SUNFIRE Build 1076 Build Date May 15 2009 Build Number 1076 Copyright 2004 2006 BRGM Intrepid Geophysics EDIT 3 Copyright Open Cascade d EADS www opencascade org Copyright Java Sun Microsystems java sun com Copyright Apache E Configuration Details Choose Configuration Details to view configuration information for your installation of 3D GeoModeller 3 Configuration Info xi Runtime VM BootClassPath C Program Files Intrepid GeoModeller1 3 1076 lib resources jar C Program Files Ini ClassPath C Program Files Intrepid GeoModeller1 3 1076 classes AbsoluteLayout jar C Program Fils InputArguments DINTREPID JAVA_DEBUG true ea Dsun java2d opengl false Dswing aatext true LibraryPath C Program Files Intrepid GeoModeller1 3 1076 bin C WINDOUS Sun Java bin C WINDOW Man
190. eller creates a points list 4 Create project data using the points For more information see Editing geological data with the Points List Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 337 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Project and file operations Parenttopic 3D For reference information see GeoModeller Operations gt The project e Project menu Project toolbar and dialog boxes In this section e Creating a project e Recovering a saved project Creating a project Parent topic Main Menu Project gt New Project and file a operations To create a new project is to define the 3D work space within which you will manage the geology map the sections and all the other elements that will be used in the construction of the 3D model Complete the parameter fields according to the details of your project The new project also defines the structure within which you gather together all of the input data and the various outputs built from the computed model section plots of model geology 3D shapes etc All of these data objects of the project are managed in a tree structure which is presented in a special window the Project Explorer Notes 3D GeoModeller can have only one project open at a time If you want to save a version of your project or to work on a new project save your current project work before lo
191. eller displays the imported drillholes in the 3D Viewer as soon as you choose Finish in the Verify Imports dialog box accepts the results of the first validation report Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 361 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Contents Help Top The image below is an example of the User specified mapping option Some imported lithologies do not match a formation within the 3D GeoModeller project x Ste Map geologic objects in project data Step 8 of 9 j i to import Geological objects mapping 2 Parse CSV collar file 3 Map CSV colums to collar data structure 4 Parse CSV survey file Import all RE atte 5 Map CSV colums to survey data structure 6 Parse CSV geology file 7 Map CSV colums to geology BG2 Do not import z data structure 8 Map geologic objects in BG1 Do not import v ma a impor Jm J ma Import BK Import Bk v Ha fmo e Rm HHJ Import HHI T J Show imported after finish lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel The image below is an example of mapping option Create formation Some imported lithologies do not match a formation within the 3D GeoModeller project Fig 2 and the user has decided to select the Create formation option Unmatched lithology codes will be used to create new formations on import The
192. elp Top 4 Back gt Data shortcut submenu Parent topic Use this menu to import data onto the section and delete data from it View menu cascades shortcut menus and toolbars Import GIS and See Points List Editor floated other binary located data Import BRGM data See Import 2D Geology to Section Submenu Options Export 2D data See Export 2D Data from dialog box see Delete Data shortcut sub menu Delete Data shortcut sub menu Parent topic Use items from this submenu to delete classes of data from the section View menu cascades Option Description shortcut menus SS and toolbars Geology data data Delete all contact data Delete all contact data from the selected section the selected section S orientation Delete all orientation data O a the selected section data Axial surface Delete all axial surface orientation data from the selected orientation data section Hinge line data Delete all hinge line data from the selected section Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 170 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt 3D Viewer sub and shortcut menu Parent topic Use items from this menu to control the display in the 3D Viewer and to export View menu images or the whole project cascades shortcut menus eee and toolbars O ER i 3D Viewer ET ID viewer E 30 Viewer Show Interface Data Show
193. en checked interfaces between formations appear on the section map Show drillhole When checked drillholes appear on the section map When checked the contact lines between the formations appear on the section map Show Contact When checked all infilling applied to the formations appears on the section map Show Trend When checked the trend lines for the series within the Lines formations appear on the section map Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 86 Contents Help Top lt 4 Back gt Geology menu and dialog boxes Parent topic 3D GeoModeller main menus Contents Help Top Geology menu cascades and the Structural toolbar Formations Create or Edit Geology Formations dialog box Edit Geological Formation Attributes dialog box Geology series and the stratigraphic pile Create or Edit Geology Series and the Stratigraphic Pile dialog box Create or Edit Geology Series dialog box External Constraints dialog box Stratigraphic pile viewer Geology data Create or Edit Geology Data dialog box Create or Edit Geology Orientation Data dialog box Fit a Plane to Points Create Orientation Data dialog box Faults Create or Edit Faults dialog box Fault Properties attributes dialog box Links Faults with Series dialog box Link Faults with Faults dialog box Axial data Create or Edit Axial Series dialog box Cr
194. ence Geology Geostatistics and Geophysics Perhaps the most fundamental improvement follows from observing how geological fabrics behave This is a natural extension to the displine of geostatistics Initially numerical variabilities such as the grade of a gold vein has driven geostatistical thinking over more than 30 years It was inevitable then that the form and shapes of naturally occurring geological bodies would also come under scrutiny This work was conducted in France over several years Chil s et al 2004 The major outcome includes an insight into how the relationships between structural geology observations and contacts can be approximated by fitting a cubic function to the experimental variogram for the contacts and a linked differentiated cubic function to the parallel and perpendicular components of the dip vectors Potential Field theory is suitable as it has close properties to the desired model Inference of the covariance of the potential field Parent topic Geoscientific Principles and Underpinnings Contents Help Top In usual geostatistical applications the covariance or variogram of the variable under study is modelled from the sample variogram of the data When modeling geology we have no measurement of the potential T x and the potential increments used for the interpolation cannot be used for the inference of K since they all have a zero value In its first implementation the algorithm was used heuristic
195. ential coordinate space A progress bar provides feedback to the user The alternative Domain kriging option of Potential is much faster and can give good results depending on the model complexity degree of anisotropy Sarin Consbanta OERA Contras A Compute he variogram map e Step 3 Analyse Variogram e Adjust the number of Lags for the uv and t directions to locate the optimum point distributions for the variogram fitting step examine the grey scale image Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 313 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt guran ue Y punhor ore 25 335 m ODI pot iB Adjust al the viH e Click Adjust to open the uv fit dialog and step through the fitting process Toggle Nugget Effect and enter the nugget Sill value hit lt Return gt Toggle yl model Type and enter the Range and Sill to obtain a reasonable fit to the data points Toggle y2 and fit a second nested model with Range and Sill to obtain a better fit to the data The nested models are additive iunidorm uv Waiapu Mace hes bed Carga Tyee Vl hegal Eei Spherical 7 Y1 20 20 0 Fi iunie oy YO Y1 lotal e Click OK to accept the fitted uv model and return to the previous dialog Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgeral
196. eoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 33 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt The Tabs available in the Chart Properties dialog are listed below Title Set Text Font and Colour DrilholeS45 at 1210 1568 Sansserif bold 18 Select Cancel Plot gt Domain Axis Depth Axis Set Label Font and Axis Colour Plot gt Domain Axis gt Ticks Set Axis Labels and Tick Marks Chart eee Tite Plat Other Combined _Domain_X Plot Domain Axis Appearance General Label Benth Font SansSerif plain 12 Paint A Select Other Tis Range if Show tick label Tick label font i Show fick marks Plot gt Domain Axis gt Range Set Min Max Depth Range Defaults to the full drillhole length ns Fore Auto adjust range Minimum range value 0 0 Macimum range value 284 5 Cancel Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 34 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt e Plot gt Appearance Set Outline Stroke Outline paint Colour Background paint Colour and Orientation e Orientation is the most interesting changing the drillhole log layout from Vertical to Horizontal eS ee P a Trie Plot Other Combined_Doman_XYPot Domain Axis Appearance General Qutine stroke ca L Select Outre pant
197. eoModeller empties the points list when you select a different section Navigation The selected current point in the Points List To select a different point enter a point number and press ENTER or use the arrow buttons on the Points List Toolbar Points list toolbar oints List Editor docked controls a gt a2 E For information about the toolbar controls see Points List toolbar docked Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 57 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Operation Description Tool Move up Move down Move selected points up or down in list You can select several points in the conventional Windows way by holding down CTRL and clicking individual points or holding down SHIFT to select a range of points When you dock the Points List Editor it becomes the Points List toolbar See Points List toolbar docked Data view selector Sections of the Points List to display Hide current point and points table Show current point coordinates but not points table z Show text boxes Insert button for entering a new point and the Points table GIS and other binary Show or hide the GIS and other binary located located data data controls See Importing GIS and other binary located data Current point When current point only is selected not points table Coordinates of the currently selected
198. er Introduction Parent topic Project Explorer Contents Help Top The Project Explorer is a special master window which presents all of the data objects of a project in an tree structure It provides you with an overview of the entire project data It has a tree structure containing all of the data objects of the project It provides a global view of the entire project with all of its components You can use it to perform certain actions without needing to use the 2D Viewer to select an object Shortcut menus are available for every node of the Project Explorer tree offering appropriate options for the associated object object type or object group Shortcut menus are generally the same for any context Project Explorer and in the 2D Viewer and 3D Viewer 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 15 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Common shortcut menu options Parent topic In the Project Explorer you can select shortcut menu options for all objects or types of shan objects in the project Some menu options are common to several object types and xplorer enable similar operations The following table contains an overview of the common shortcut menu options Option Description reon Properties Display the properties dialog box for the DE properties Attributes object Selecting Properties for Drillholes opens the drillhole log visu
199. er has a standard set of options for this concepts Formations i Granite All if Deselect All Invert Controls for selecting items See Mouse and OUST Ane KEYA OO O O O OU Select oneitem one item Clicktheitem 0 the item Select a number separate a the Samet a item Hold down items CTRL and click the other items Deselect a single selected item Hold down CTRL and click selected item that you want to deselect Select a range of items Click the first item Hold down SHIFT and click the last item all Invert the selection so that Invert selected items become deselected and deselected items become selected Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 203 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt How 3D GeoModeller imports the DTM Parenttopic 3D 3D GeoModeller can import DTMs from a variety of formats It applies checks and GeoModeller corrections before accepting the data into the model Reference In this section e Datum and projection DTM import checks e Spatial extent DTM import checks Wireframe format DXF DTM import DTM data sources NASA SRTM data See also File Formats Digital terrain model Load Topography from a DTM dialog box Datum and projection DTM import checks Parent topic When importing a digital terrain model DTM in a format containing datum and How 3D projection p
200. erald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt 3D GeoModeller Reference 370 GeoModeller User Manual 4 Back gt Contents Help Top gt Step3 Select Columns to Import e Select HOLEID in the Columns list then select Hole ID from the Treat as drop down list the red highlight prompt blue arrow will dissolve and a new red highlight will warn that the Interval From column not defined Columns HOLEID GEOLFROM GEOLTO DM_METHOD DM_VOL_CM3 Name Hri DM_WGHT_WET_INA Fielc DM_WGHT_WET_INH Type Real Juif t DM_ HUM Pc l DM DENS WET CALCE Null value 4 F Treat as Hole 10 G Interval From not defned lt Select GEOLFROM in the Columns list then select From in the Treat as drop down list the red highlight prompt blue arrow will dissolve and a new red highlight will warn that the Interval To column not defined DM _ViGHT_WET_INA DM WGHT_WET_JNH OM HUM PC DM_DENS WET_CALC Mul vane 4 a C Interval To not defined lt 1 e Select GEOLFROM in the Columns list then select To in the Treat as drop down list DM_WGHT_WET_INA OM_WiGHT_WiET_INH Type Fea 7 Urt DM_HUM_ PC DM_DENS_WET_CALC gt Nul value 4 Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 371 Contents Help
201. erence To make this easier 3D GeoModeller enables the geologist to work with familiar geological tools such as maps sections and drillholes Moreover it provides the geologist interpreter with the tools needed to impose their geological interpretation One of the innovations of 3D GeoModeller is the construction of geology interpolation which take into account not only the geology boundary data geology contacts or interfaces or limits but also incorporates the dip of the geology formations After computing the model 3D GeoModeller can present it on a geology map in cross sections or as 8D shapes volumes defined by triangulated surfaces The development of a geometrical model is an essential first step for a wide range of later calculations For example a constrained and coherent model is essential for calculating volumes conducting hydro geologic simulations calculating geophysical gravimetric and magnetic signatures and for many other applications With 3D GeoModeller you can build a coherent 3D model which respects your data Furthermore its data interchange abilities enable you to exchange data and results with other applications For more information about the architecture of 3D GeoModeller projects see the Elements of a 3D GeoModeller project For more information about the 3D GeoModeller user interface see User interface overview To assist you in your use of the software note that most of 3D GeoModeller s dialo
202. erence 60 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt y x r z mm Ange 1835 735 3055 800 101651 9 2005821 0 3055 8 6 3469 821 3767 109 103113 5 2006551 8 3767 1 1782 19 4661 743 4036 752 104179 6 2007084 8 4036 miie 93 T 4769 821 3767 109 104113 5 2006551 8 4767 1 For an explanation of the coordinates see Status bar and conventions for spatial coordinates You can edit the coordinate values U V X Y Z 3D GeoModeller calculates the Length and Angle from the coordinate values You can view Points List operations in the 2D Viewer See How the Points List coordinates with the 2D Viewer How the Points List coordinates with the 2D Viewer Parent topic The Points List Editor always has a current point In the floated Points List Editor it Points List is highlighted in the table You can use the navigation buttons in the Points List toolbar to select different points to be the current point In the 2D Viewer the current point appears as a red circle and the path from the previous point to it appears as a red line Points List Editor i akaa g 4 E G ect on Line segment before point in sequences Current point nh 3055 800 101651 9 2005821 0 3055 8 a a a sis 3767 103113 5 2006551 8 EALAN 1782 19 113 523 4036 104179 6 2007084 8 4036 1221 93 102 724 T 3767 109 104113 5 2006551 8 4767 1 782 19 133 523 Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzger
203. erties attributes dialog box Parent topic When you define a fault you can specify it as Geol r l ar dialos Infinite extending to the edges of the project space OR boxes e Finite extending some distance from the known points When we specify a finite fault in 3D GeoModeller we define an ellipsoid within which we have decided that the fault exists We therefore need to define the centre and the three radii of this ellipsoid We use axes oriented to the line of known contact points and to the plane of the section on which we have defined the known contact points 2D Fault Properties SW_NE_ Fault j x Manage Fault Properties Finite fault setthe radius on each direction Name 5W_NE_Fault Range 7 Centre J Infinite i Mean centre Finite Databox centre Horizontal radius 0 User specified Fd Vertical radius D Ke D Influence radius 0 Yi D OK Cancel Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 103 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Controls in this dialog box Control Purpose Name Faultname Range of existence of the fault Infinite or Finite Infinite Fault extends to the boundaries of the project space Finite Exists within the ellipsoid that we define Horizontal radius Radius of the ellipsoid along the line of the known points in
204. es when the cell at the intersection of a series and the fault is checked To ignore the specified fault in the interpolation of the chosen geology series clear the cell at the intersection of a series and a fault Note You can check or clear all of a row or column at the same time by using the buttons at the ends of the rows or column 3 Link faults with series X Faults E SWN Series IntrusiveSeries E UpperSeries E LowerSeries BasalSeries Column size Auto Reset Save CSV file Wf OF x Close Controls in this dialog box Column width controls See Column width controls Column size Auto EA Reset Save CSV file Export the list of faults linked to series as a csv comma separated variable text file Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 105 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Link Faults with Faults dialog box Parent topic Geology menu and dialog boxes Contents Help Top Using this table you can define the termination of one fault on another To make fault B terminate on fault A check the cell at the intersection of the row B and column A Two faults cannot be interdependent if fault B terminates on A then fault A cannot terminate on B For this re
205. esenting the average geological surface through the listed points The resulting orientation value dip and dip direction can be used to create new orientation data either at all of the Points or at a single point defined either by inputting coordinates or using the Current Point of the Points List In both cases the selected points used for the calculation or the single point to be assigned the result are transformed into orientation data identical to any other measured orientation data point Creating faults Parent topic Main menu Geology gt Faults Create or Edit Structural data operations Input the name of the fault e Choose its colour by clicking in the coloured zone The RGB tab on the colour pallet allows you to set a specific colour by choosing numerical RGB value Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 345 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Linking faults with geology series Parent topic Main menu Geology gt Link faults with series Structural data oo operations This dialog box defines the influence of a fault on each series of geology formations To do this use the table and mark x to define which fault affects which series Series are defined during the process of defining the stratigraphic pile Defining a network of faults Parent topic Main menu Geology gt Link fault
206. esmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 26 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Project Explorer and 2D Viewer Drillhole Edit Parent topic e Edit an individual drillhole Project Explorer Left mouse select an individual drillhole from the tree and choose Edit ia 545 Show Appearance Edit Delete Properties e The Drillhole Properties dialog opens with the Editing options activated and with the additional interactive Explore Edit Drillhole Log pane on the left Drillhole e Properties 45 Driltholes Edit Format t Help Explore Exit Deithole Log ie 545 DrillholeS45 at X 12710 1568 D Geclogical information Geological Log Geological Model Misfit 0 28 W 1220 Yi 1568 2 621 28 E He Prom a val SSS To 12 4 Hal relaxed Fran 154 To 27 9 Hot relaxed martane 7 Pe eS g eT Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 27 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt The Top level Menus Drillholes and Edit described as inactive under Drillhole Properties now support the following extra options Drillholes gt Save Editing operations completed on the current drillhole Save Edit gt Undo Und
207. ether or individually Explorer The Drillhole context menu in the 2D Viewer enables you to work on individual drillholes These menus are similar so we describe them in the same section The following functions are available from the main Explore gt Drillholes context menu Explore iM Drilholes i Drillholes iit Drilholes J GeomodellerTolsatis tt Show lt j _ gt Hide J Hide i fal Formations Appearance Shading lt r Wireframe j DA Dykes Import dh Appearance e Appearance B xt ee pes Fields to Regular Import Import I a mE 35 Fields to Data Poi frs Fields to Regular JH Fields to Regular Intervals 2 th oles Delete Ea Fields to Data Fo hay Fields to Data Points Mesh H g J Geology Delete Delete EH Sty Grids and meshes fe Appearance of Drillholes Pree o ve Ego Functions in the Drillholes context menu Function Description S Show Hide See Common shortcut menu options Shading Wireframe See Common shortcut menu options Appearance Accessible in Shading Mode only change the Drillhole radius in the 3D Viewer See Appearance of Drillholes dialog box see Importing drillholes and drillhole geophysical logs and assays Fields to Regular Intervals Recalculate Fields to a regular From To interval Fields to Data Points Mesh From Explore Context Menu Drillhole fields to data points mesh Delete all drillholes from the project Contents Help Top
208. example shows how you can use anisotropic interpolation to connect three Model widely separated outcrops of a thin dyke like body interpolation parameters Isotropic settings The first part of the example shows settings for and results of isotropic interpolation of three widely separated outcrops of a thin dyke like body q Model interpolation parameters X Range Nugget effect on Geology data 0 000001 Geology orientation data 0 01 Drift degree fi anisotropy Anisotropic Azimuth 40 Dip 60 Pitch X range Y range zZ range ELA The following illustrations show the resulting isotropic surface plan and the isotropic 3D axial view p Help WV SurfaceTopography Ed 47 LevelPlan 2000 X S SS Isotropic surface plan Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 227 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt agadan dea Onvsg lt e a Isotropic 3D axial view north west Anisotropic settings The second part of the example shows the settings for and results of anisotropic interpolation of three widely separated outcrops of a thin dyke like body E D Modelin terpolation parameters Range 30000 m Use of these settings enables the widely separated outcrops to be correlated and connected provided that the chosen anisotropy angles are consistent with the outcro
209. faults with faules v Yi a3 ai yy W tama H W amit sf a Ap LJ He mi Axial series Create or Edit ai Asial surfaces Create or Edit ar Ckeorkir Structural 20 Structural Create geology data Chrl 6 ba Create geology orientation data Ctrl F x x To era Pa O Fit a plane to Points create orientation data Ctrl F g Create axial surface data an axial trace on a map Ctrl B y Create axial surface orientation data Cerl k Create hinge line data Ctrl H i Bl aisAole n n lo a I See the following table for an overview of the 2D Structural sub menu and Structural toolbar Create See Create or Edit Geology Formations CTRL G geology data dialog box Create See Create or Edit Geology Orientation CTRL R geology Data dialog box orientation data Fit a plane to see Fit a Plane to Points Create Orientation CTRL F points Data dialog box Create axial See Create or Edit Axial Surfaces dialog box CTRL B surface data Create axial See Create or Edit Axial Surface y CTRL K surface Orientation Data dialog box orientation data Create hinge See Create or Edit Hinge Line Data dialog line data box Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 89 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Create or Edit Geology Formations dialog box Parent topic With the Crea
210. fier which becomes alpha numeric the section name in GeoModeller Shotpoint Shotpoint number used to map coordinates numeric to Formation picks may be a decimal number interpolated between shotpoints X coord of the Shotpoint Longitude or East numeric one char if DMS Y coord of the Shotpoint Latitude or North numeric one char if DMS Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 145 Contents Help Top lt 4 Back gt The X and Y coordinates may be projected UTM east north or geodetic Latitude Longitude The latter may be either in DMS dddmmss ss or decimal degrees ddd ddddddd format If in DMS format then the values require N S E W appended to them to indicate their quadrant If in decimal format then the sign of the value indicates the quadrant Once the first navigation file has been loaded the file format and variable names are saved to a DDF ie seismic_nav ddfpb The format window can then be populated by clicking on the button in the dialog window and loading the DDF for subsequent navigation files in the same format Click Next gt to move to next Page Wizard Step 3 Map the fields to the correct Data names If your data is Lat Long then make sure you choose Longitude for X and Latitude for Y Parse CSV fle Map C5V colums to data a 272418715 structure
211. fold in degrees at the end of the hinge line last point in the Points List Distance at Extremity Distance between the last point of the hinge line last point in the Points List and each of the associated orientation points that you are creating or editing Polarity If the geology at the hinge line is overturned select Reverse If the geology is not overturned select Normal see Overturned geology Automatically re edit When checked 3D GeoModeller does not empty the Points List when you choose Edit or Create This enables you to continue editing the data See Editing geological data with the Points List for more information Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 115 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Provenance Editor dialog box Parent topic Use this dialog box to specify the available provenances for your project You can Geology menu save an image of the dialog box showing the current settings and dialog boxes The default 3D GeoModeller provenances are Unspecified e Observed Inferred Interpreted e ModelConstructor 3 Provenance Editor X Provenances Identifier Name a Unspecified Create a new provenance _ _ S ad Eser vo y Apply Close Controls in this dialog box Elements Purpose Identifie
212. formation names and colours will be populated in the Scanned Lithologies list If not then the user has the ability to edit the Formation names colours and index order as described below 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 71 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Ba New Project from Voxet Gocad Voxet D Testing Geomodeller Punt_Hill Gary Geology _Voxet_100 100 010 v2 vo Lithology Field ROCK UNIT Scanned Lithologies Vowet Litho Mame AboveTopo Coluvium Reverse Order fee regolana_Shale Nuccaleena_Dolomite Zero relative Whyalla_Sandstene Woocalla _Dolomite 7 Tindelpina_Shale B eds_Voleanics Pandurra_ Formation Basement V Load Voxet into Project e The user can manipulate the Voxet litho indices shown in the scanned lithologies list as follows e Click the Reverse Order button to reverse the index order so that the Formations are in the correct chronological order 1e stratigraphic pile Youngest to Oldest top to bottom in the list Select an Index and use the Move up or Move down buttons to obtain the correct stratigraphic order e Double Left Click a voxet Litho Name or Voxet Litho Index to edit the existing colour and or Lithology Name see dialog figure below e Unselect Zero relative when the geology indices are not zero relative ie start at 1 not O when is no
213. g TBD J Hide All Views of this Mesh Grid Add Current Model Field Fe Create Coordinates Y Z Fields f Export Compute New Field Fie Multi Crossplot with Merge this Grid with Another Create a Compatible Grid with I Fe_Krigint TronPot Flow Rate Pressure Plot MnAnise Delete 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 259 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt From Mesh and Grid Fields Context Menu Parent topic The context menus at the Mesh and Grid Fields level Right Click on a mesh grid Mesh Grid Field contain functions for interpolation exploratory statistics and visualisation The available options vary depending on the type of Mesh or Grid containing the field Operations Options will be greyed out until the appropriate data is available to perform the required function For instance Domaining Kriging and Simulation require a prior variogram analysis on the selected field The options available for all field types are described under the headings of Mesh and Grid Visualisation Interpolation and Statistical Analysis below the individual menu summaries e Irregular Vertex Mesh Point Cloud Field context menu functions f AL203 f Hide Field from All Views ay Field Visualisation Manager Appearance Visualisation ias J Edit Colours and Clips Display Color Table idl Histogra
214. g a folding and faulting progression Interpolating geology using the potential field method In summary the potential field method defines a geological interface as an implicit surface namely a particular isosurface of a scalar field defined in the 3D space the potential field The 3D interpolation of that potential field based on universal cokriging provides isosurfaces that honour all the data Since no data measures the potential field itself its covariance cannot be inferred directly However the covariance can be determined from the structural data which makes it possible to associate sensible cokriging standard deviations to potential field estimates and to translate them into uncertainties of the 3Dmodel The implementation of joint structural geology and contacts interpolation based upon experimentally derived methods is a unique breakthrough in turning geology mapping and interpretation into a quantitative science It is a fallacy to now claim there is no basis for how one should interpolate geology so any methods are equally adaptable Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 377 Contents Help Top lt 4 Back gt Radial Basis Functions Parent topic Geoscientific Principles and Underpinnings Contents Help Top Universal kriging implies that all observations have an influence on every part of the
215. g boxes include a help button To get started with 3D GeoModeller see 3D GeoModeller Tutorials and Help Introduction The tutorials use simple but practical examples which lead you through the essential stages in the development of a 3D model 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 4 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Elements of a 3D GeoModeller project Parent topic 3D In this section GeoModeller Reference The project e The topographic surface e Geology objects formations faults axial series and surfaces e The stratigraphic pile e Sections Drillholes e Structural data e Geology data e Geology orientation data dip and dip direction e Axial surface orientation data e Axial surface data axial traces e Hinge lines e The 3D model The project Parent topic The project is a set of data representing 3D space It contains a structure which a ai ofa gathers together the elements of your study GeoModeller Project properties project The project properties include descriptive data location limits and parameters For a detailed description see Project Properties dialog box Project data that you import or create Topographic surface Sections e Formations series and the stratigraphic pile e Axial series families surfaces e Geology contact and orientation data points Drillholes 3D GeoModeller shows all p
216. g from geophysical data within a line or model slice See Computing a 2 5D forward model 2D Seismic Create a synthetic seismograph 2D Gravity Forward model a gravity profile for a section See Computing a 2 5D forward model 2D Magnetic Forward model a magnetism profile for a section See Computing a 2 5D forward model 3D Geophysics Accounting for geophysical observations in the X Y and Z dimensions Forward model Gravity Forward models a vertical gravity anomaly or tensor components using geology volumes and associated rock properties Magnetism Forward models total magnetic intensity or tensor components using geology volumes and associated rock properties Forward model temperatures Computes 3D temperature based on geology volumes and associated rock properties Potential field inversion field inversion See Forward modelling and inversion with 3D a ne S a Create movies from inversion Create set of inversion movies 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd lt 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 130 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Element Description S Intrepid geophysical Worme Launch the INTREPID Multi scale edge detection wizard Examine geophysical grids Launch the INTREPID Visualisation tool Geophysical Grid Definition dialog box Parent topic Geophysics menu and dialog boxes Contents Help Top Set up a regular orthog
217. g variogram model to realize the estimation of the variable For the theoretical discussion refer to the Appendix A Functions The main functionalities are Interpolation inverse distance e Structural analysis variogram study in 2D and 3D e Kriging 2D 3D using the variogram analysis e Domaining 3D Kriging taking into account the geological model e Sequential Gaussian Simulation 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 280 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt e The Interpolation Menus The Fields context menu before variogram analysis Domaining Estimation Inverse Distance Interpolation Cross Validation of Kriging Domaining Cross Validation nterpolation gt p Gaussian Anamorphosis Transformation Gaussian Simulation on a Domain Gaussian Simulation All Model e The Fields context menu after variogram analysis Nearest Neighbour Analysis Variogram Analysis Kriging Te Domaining Estimation Inverse Distance Interpolation Cross Validation of Kriging Domaining Cross Validation Gaussian Anamorphosis Transformation Gaussian Simulation on a Domain Gaussian Simulation All Model Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top 3D GeoModeller Reference 281 q Back gt Interpolation Functions
218. ge correction is the third rotation Setting ang3 20 aligns the X axis along strike and the Z axis perpendicular to the structure X original X coordinate X original Y coordinate Z original Z coordinate Xg along strike Yge dip direction p perpendicular to dip Example rotated coordinate system Note that Dip is positive down in 3D GeoModeller not negative as shown in this diagram Diagram is from Angle Rotations in GSLIB by Chad Neufeld and Clayton V Deutsch Centre for Computational Geostatistics Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering University of Alberta Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top 3D GeoModeller Reference 213 4 Back gt Anisotropy Range Values X_Range Y_Range and Z_Rang are the interpolation range values in metres in the direction of each ellipsoid axis as defined by the three angles above The range is the distance at which an observation or measurement is no longer spatially correlated with its neighbours and therefore has no further impact on the interpolation Interpolation examples Introduction Parent topic The following examples are of a diorite formation with erode properties and a Model e basement We assigned the diorite only two 3D contact points and two 3D orientation C EAE E points at the same elevation near the project mid point
219. gerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 216 Contents Help Top q Back gt The following illustrations show the model in 3D perspective looking north west and views of the front looking north top and right looking west Front looking north Top looking down Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 217 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt egarhapsAase OHvpe lt n oa Right looking west Interpolation example 3 Anisotropic No Axes Rotation Large Z Range Parent topic This example has default angles of zero and a greatly expanded Z range Model interpolation parameters Range 000 m Nugget effect on Geology data Drift degree anisotropy 2A ___ W Anisotropic Azimuth Dip Pitch x range 250 m Y range 4000 m Z range 20000 m Za The following illustrations show the model in 3D perspective looking north west and views of the front looking north top and right looking west ba BEE E TESEH E DE 3D axial view north west Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 218 Contents Help Top q Back gt Front looking north Top looking down Right looking wes
220. gerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 299 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Contents Help Top model with petrophysical properties is a prerequisite There is a long tradition of using geostatistical interpolation methods for interpolation in the geosciences Chil s J P Delfiner P 1999 These techniques are all based on the computation of a distance in general the Euclidian distance for the geosciences The traditional way to realize a geostatistical study in 3D is 1 to compute a 3D variogram and 2 to estimate by kriging the value of the petrophysical property in each cell of a 3D grid Both calculations require computing the Euclidian distance between data points and between the grid cell and data points where the petrophysical property has been measured for example in different boreholes In case of simple geology such as sub horizontal layer cake models the Euclidian distance d x y z is computed from the Easting Northing and Elevation coordinates This is a good estimator of the geological distance because there is little or no deformation of the 3D space However this approximation is not suitable in more complex geology folding faulting To solve this problem some authors propose to work in the undeformed unfaulted and unfolded space of the geology Mallet 2004 Jayr et al 2008 or to build stratigraphic grids grids that are conformal with geologic
221. geration Set Vertical Exaggeration Display Front View Display Top View Display Left View Display Back View Display Right View Display Bottorn View Display an Axial View Set Clipping Parameters Help See the following table for an overview of the 3D Controls submenu and shortcut menu ee Pan Zoom Recentre See Pan and zoom controls Rotate Reset Joystick and Focal Point controls Vertical Exaggeration see Joystick and Focal point See Vertical exaggeration submenu and toolbar 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt N GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 17 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Element Description Icon Preset views of project in 3D Viewer Display front view Front face Display top view Top face Display left view Left face Display back view Back face Display right view Right face 3D Clipping Controls Set Clipping Bring up the Control dialog for Parameters 3D clipping See 3D Viewer Joystick and Focal point controls i See the following table for an overview of the Joystick and Focal point menu and tools Turn Joystick Mode ON OFF s4 Focal Point Indicator ON OFF C Joystick Mode Turn ON OFF Joystick Mode 9 ON OFF a Focal point indicator Turn ON OFF the Focal point indicator when in ON OFF Joystick mode Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty L
222. gi0_Isoi_std Hide All Views of this Mesh Grid wi FeRegi0_2D Add Current Model Field H S FeRegi0 UVTI E Model_Grid_2D H Si Model_Grid_3D_Reg40 H Mi Model_Grid_3D_SemiReg Fe Create Coordinates YZ Fields Note Although we defined the isotropic variogram using the formation ORE2 only the Kriging function has used the criteria defined in Step2 to interpolate the whole project neighbourhood and not just the formation ORE2 The Domain kriging functions are the only geostatistical operations that can be constrained to interpolate within a single series or formation in this version of 3D GeoModeller The isotropic kriging results grid can be masked to a single formation unit by following the post interpolation procedure outlined below Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 292 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt e Masking a 3D grid using one or more formations e Add the 3D Model to your kriged grid FeReg10Iso Right Click on grid FeReg10Iso and select Add Current Model Field as shown above e The current model lithology is added to the grid as a new field arrowed below 5 Si FeReg 10Iso _ ______ _ g Compute New Field L BN FeRegi0_ts01 n FeRegi0_Isoi_std L Ja Current_Madel_ Grid 1 WME FeReg 10Pot T M8 FeRegi0_20 H S FeRegi0_UvT1 H 8 Model_Grid_20 FH Sa Model_Grid_30_Reg40 3 388
223. gical 3D GeoModeller provides this space for your notes It age End does not use the data in calculations Minerology 3D GeoModeller provides this space for your notes It does not use the data in calculations Texture 3D GeoModeller provides this space for your notes It does not use the data in calculations Qualifying 3D GeoModeller provides this space for your notes It does not use the data in calculations Select from Unknown Magmatic Sedimentary Metamorphic Meteological alteration or Anthropic deposit 3D GeoModeller provides this space for your notes It does not use the data in calculations 3D GeoModeller provides this space for your notes It does not use the data in calculations Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 92 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Create or Edit Geology Series and the Stratigraphic Pile dialog box Parent topic Use this dialog box to organise the sequence of series in the stratigraphic pile and for Geology menu access to the controls for creating and editing geological series and dialog boxes Zi Create or Edit geology series and the stratigraphic pile l X Reference Series o oe Formations Relationship Fl Maneras IintrusiveSeries Upperseries MiddeCover UpperC Onlap llowerSeries LowerCover onp basaeries Basement on Romes s Move u
224. global drop down selection remains set to User specified 3P CSV Data Import o Xi Map geologic objects in project data Step 8 of 9 i pe to impor Geological object 2 Parse CSV collar file 3 Map CSV colums to collar data Geologic object Action Merge to Colour structure 4 Parse CSV survey file Import all User specified v 5 Map CSV colums to survey data structure 6 Parse CSV geology file z 7 Map CSV colums to geology BG2 Create Formation v met data structure 8 Map geologic objects in BG1 Create Formation bd msc i A import J TT E 0K fmt j te ie sc meo S aia m z Show imported after finish lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 362 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Contents Help Top The image below is an example of mapping option Merge formation Some imported lithologies do not match a formation within the 3D GeoModeller project Fig 2 and the user has decided to select the Merge formation option Where possible unmatched lithologies will be matched to formation names containing the same leading characters The option Merge formation is now selected as all lithologies have been matched to project formations q CSV Data Import l x Steps 1 Select data type to import Geologi
225. grid is created with the geometry of the Master and the fields of the two grids The fields of the two grids do not overwrite each other but retain the original gid name as a prefix to the field name The grid Calculator can be used to merge the contents of the two fields once they are in the same grid Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top 3D GeoModeller Reference 258 4 Back gt Fe_Krigint Hide All Views of this Mesh Grid Add Current Model Field Fe Create Coordinates YZ Fields yf Export Compute New Field j ja pe pie we Multi Crossplot with vod Merge this Grid with Another i lronlso Create a Compatible Grid with I lronPot r MnAniso Group Fields Model_Grid_3D Flow Rate Pressure Plot Delete e Create a Compatible Grid with This operation creates 2D and 3D grids compatible on x and y coordinates Contents Help Top For example if we have a 3D grid with a given geometry we can obtain a 2D grid with the same geometry in x and y same origin same spacing in x and y same number of points Alternatively if we have a 2D grid then we can build a 3D grid with a field containing the model The geometry of the 3D grid in x and y will be the same as the 2D one the geometry of the grid in z is defined by the user in the interface Note This option does not appear to be workin
226. hat forms your project elevation Z topography Project XMin XMax YMin YMax ZMin and ZMax parameters are the bounding box Project extents of the 3D GeoModeller Project in the X east Y north and Z up directions respectively 3D GeoModeller dispays this for your information You cannot edit it here Description Your note about the surface topography section 3D GeoModeller provides this space for your notes It does not use the data in calculations Create and post the topographic surface in the 3D Viewer Open a 2D Viewer window containing the map view Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 81 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Topography Properties dialog box Parent topic This dialog box shows the properties of the topography of your model Section menu toolbar and i E 3 Topography properties X dialog boxes Name Topography Projection NTF LambertIIet Unit m Project bounding box xMin 39973 8766 XMax 110013 972 m Min 1999973 876 YMax 2010026 124 m 2Min 26 124 ZMax 651 303 m Description Topography of the model P Help Controls in this dialog box Name Name aaea ee ao a a on a a the surface topography section 3D GeoModeller dispays this for your information You cannot edit it here Projection Projection of the project coordinate s
227. he Export section of the manual e Compute New Field The Mesh and Grid Calculator will compute new fields from those fields contained within the current mesh grid This becomes more powerful once the model lithology is added ie Add Current Model Field It has abroad suite of mathematical and logical functions to draw on as shown in the Calculator dialog below The example in the formula window shows how the kriging result FeKIsoInt can be masked to a particular formation If Current_Model_Grid 4 FeKIsoInt NaN copies the FeKIsoInt variable to a new voxet where the formation equals 4 Ore2 and sets the other formation voxels to Null G te Grids and Meshes JA Current_Model_Grid o EE Fekisoint EN ekIsolntStdDev E FekIsolnt_Ore2 s Si TronIso a TronPot F e MnAniso z a Model_Flevation S Model_Grid_3D Pee a i m fth p Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 251 Contents Help Top Contents Help Top lt 4 Back gt a Expression to evabate Eg Dereity nans2 FDensty nb seperat is i Current Model Grid 4 Fetlsolntnan Fekisolnt_Ore2 Field
228. he Observed Field Step 2 Gaussian Anamorphosis Transformation e Select the variable to be simulated and perform a Gaussian Anamorphosis transformation from the Grids and Meshes context menu A new field is computed and added to the source grid GaussianAnamorphosis_ Fe Reg10 ka Grids and Meshes Eg Kriging El 3 DrilholesFields TE Domaining Estimation El ay DrillholesFields_Reg 10 Inverse Distance Interpolation i 14 ge Current_Model_Grid Cross Validation of Kriging i Domaining Cross Validation EE CrossValidateVari_FeReg10Iso1 Gaussian Anamorphosis Transformation Gaussian Simulation on a Domain EE CrossValidateInterp_FeReg10Iso1 Ry ey Gaussian Simulation All Model d OR Select Gaussian Simulation then Gaussian Anamorphosis Transformation from the Interpolation drop down in the Main menu e Choose the Mesh Grid and Field to be transformed Click OK Interpolation Import Export View Window Research Help i Prepare Data t i p SS 163 i E E es Exploratory Statistics F Le Variogram Analysis Kriging Domain Kriging d Gaussian Simulation Gaussian Anamorphosis Transformation ey Gaussian Simulation on a Domain Mesh Grid edinolesipekie Ren 10 Field Fe_Regi0 A new field is computed and added to the source grid GaussianAnamorphosis_ Fe Reg10 Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User
229. he Preview panel shows your selected colour in a variety of contexts Resets the colour to the default for that object 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 188 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Column width controls Parent topic When 3D GeoModeller displays data in columns you can adjust the width of the Viewmenuand columns using these controls dialog boxes Column size Auto E E Reset Controls Column size auto size auto aeach ie solic elicy aatomaucaliyectotne checked 3D GeoModeller automatically sets the column size Column expand Increase column width Column shrink Decrease column width Column reset ees Reset column width Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 189 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Point Acquisition Parameters dialog box Parent topic This dialog box enables you to define the parameters for optional snap to positioning Viewmenuand fa point relative to already existing 2D grids and shapes dialog boxes You can e Position the point yourself OR e Set 3D GeoModeller to snap the selected point to a grid In effect 3D GeoModeller simply rounds the coordinates of the point to a multiple of a modulus number that you specify You can
230. he pile tells 3D GeoModeller whether the structural data contained in the map sections and drillholes represent the top contacts or the basal contacts of the formations with which they are associated To perform series and stratigraphic pile operations use the Project Explorer or options in the Geology menu See e Geology menu and dialog boxes user interface reference e Project Explorer Formations shortcut menus user interface reference e Geology formations and series operations How to instructions 3D GeoModeller uses sections to define geology It considers the topographic surface which contains the geological map a special instance of a section When you are building a 3D model of geological formations you typically create sections and define or interpret the geology within those section views It is easy to create sections in 3D GeoModeller You can e Use points you have clicked and recorded in the Points List Creating a section from its trace e Define horizontal sections at a specified depth To perform section operations use the Project Explorer or options in the Section menu or toolbar See e Section menu toolbar and dialog boxes user interface reference e Project Explorer Sections shortcut menus user interface reference e Topography and section operations How to instructions 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D Geo
231. he principle direction or vector defined by Azimuth and Dip unchanged The two directions perpendicular to the principle vector are rotated clockwise relative to the principle vector when looking towards the origin The Pitch rotation appears to be anticlockwise since the view is away from the origin See diagrams in Model interpolation parameters X Range Range in metres in the X dimension of the axes that define the anisotropy Y Range Range in metres in the Y dimension of the axes that define the anisotropy Z Range Range in metres in the Z dimension of the axes that define the anisotropy Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 125 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Build 3D Formation and Fault Shapes dialog box Parent topic Use this dialog box to specify the appearance and components of the display in the 3D Model menu Viewer You can toolbar and dialog boxes Include or exclude formations and fonts e Build the 3D display as volume columns or a surface e Specify resolution cell size and render quality e Specify the region of the project area to plot and the appearance of the topographic surface Build 3D Formation and Fault Shapes xX 3D Shape parameters type and mesh resolution Build Formations Faults Type GB Volume C GP Column C p Surface W D
232. his section origin point Once the section has been created however no further modification is allowed Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 341 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Using the Tape Measure Parent topic With the Tape Measure you can measure distances and angles in a section Topography and section gt gt To use the Tape Measure operations 1 Inthe 2D Viewer select the section in which you want to use the Tape Measure 2 Select the Tape Measure tool 3D GeoModeller displays the Tape Measure window See Tape Measure 3 To view all data choose More To view only the distance bearing and angle choose Less Click the starting intermediate and end points of the path you want to measure Read the results in the Tape Measure window O of When finished close the window using Close amp in the top right corner 7 Toclear the path and start measuring again with different points choose Clear Geology formations and series operations Parenttopic 3D For reference information about this area see GeoModeller l Opetalions e Geology objects formations faults axial series and surfaces e The stratigraphic pile e Geology menu and dialog boxes You can e Creating geology formations e Editing geology formations e Deleting geology formations Creating geology formations Parent topic gt
233. his section and a width Choose OK Note The drillhole cannot be loaded unless co ordinates have been assigned for the drillhole collar and the geology intervals Importing an XML file formatted according to the GeoSciML standard Parent topic You can load drillholes directly from a GeoSciML xml file by navigating and selecting Importing the GeoSciML file with the file selector The drillhole will be loaded directly into the drillholes and drillhole current 3D GeoModeller project geophysical logs and assays Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 368 Contents Help Top lt 4 Back gt Importing drillhole geophysical logs and assays into existing drillholes Parent topic Importing drillholes and drillhole geophysical logs and assays Contents Help Top Drillhole geophysical logs and assays recorded in standard holename depth from to format with associated numeric field values can be imported from TXT TAB or CSV format ascii files to existing drillholes within the current 3D GeoModeller The holenames must match exactly for the import to succeed ie HOLEID FROM TO MagSuscl MagSusc2 MagSusc3 MagAVG DH00001 0 0 1 0 11 80 11 10 10 80 11 238 DH00001 1 0 2 0 12 60 1 87 9 97 8 15 DH00001 2 0 3 0 8 81 10 20 7 22 8 74 To import drillhole numeric data RightClick on Assay Data into Existing Boreholes
234. ial surface belongs Select from drop down list New axial series Create a new axial series for the new axial surface to belong to See Create or Edit Axial Series dialog box Polarity Whether the axial surface passes through an anticline or a syncline Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 108 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Axial Surface Attributes dialog box Parent topic Use this dialog box to edit the name or reselect axial series or polarity for an axial Geology menu surface and dialog boxes 3 Edit axial surface attributes X Name ImneF 1 Axial series Paigieriel Polarity Anticline Syncline af OK Fd close Controls in this dialog box Axial series to which the axial surface belongs Polarity Whether the axial surface passes through an anticline or a syncline Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 109 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Create or Edit Axial Surface Data an Axial Trace on a Map dialog box Parent topic Use this dialog box to create or edit a set of axial surface data that marks the Geology menu intersection between the axial surface and a section and dialog boxes 2 Edit axial surface data an axial trace onam x
235. ibility ST Remanent Magnetization A m Diorite Log normai 0 1 0 01 100 NormaK00 100 0 0 E Basement Normai 0 0 100 INormal o 0 100 0 0 General parameters Magnetization E IGRF Calculator Total magnetic Field nT 50000 Declination degrees o Inclination degrees 90 af OK Fd close Choose IGRF Calculator to get the local IGRF field settings calculated using datum projection and coordinates of the centre of the project 3 IGRF Calculator X Farameters AAP Month May Year 2010 Altitude 0 m m Latitude 1 5223774 degrees Longitude f36 8412193 a degrees Resultant Field Magnetic Field 57613 1 nT Declination 6 94 degrees Inclination 63 94 degrees yf OK Fd close Choose OK to set the IGRF field properties in the Physical properties dialog box Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 351 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Remanent Magnetization Asm Normal 0 0 100 0 0 E Basement Normal 0 0 100 Normal o 0 100 0 0 General parameters Magnetization a IGRF Calculator Total magnetic Field nT 57613 1 Declination degrees 6 94 Inclination degrees 63 94 P Help of OK Fd close Choose OK 7 From the Geophysical profile computers Geophysics menu choose Compute The Compute dialog box appears
236. ibutes this data free of charge and it is available for download from the National Map Seamless Data Distribution System or the USGS FTP site The SRTM data is available as 3 arc second approx 90m resolution DEMs A 1 arc second data product was also produced but is not available for all countries The vertical error of the DEMs is reported to be less than 16m The data currently being distributed by NASA and USGS finished product contains no data holes where water or heavy shadow prevented the quantification of elevation These are generally small holes which nevertheless render the data less useful especially in fields of hydrological modelling Dr Andy Jarvis and Edward Guevara of the CIAT Agroecosystems Resilience project Dr Hannes Isaak Reuter JRC IES LMNH and Dr Andy Nelson JRC IES GEM have further processed the original DEMs to fill in these no data voids This involved the production of vector contours and points and the re interpolation of these derived contours back into a raster DEM These interpolated DEM values are then used to fill in the original no data holes within the SRTM data These processes were implemented using ArcInfo and an AML script The DEM files have been mosaiced into a seamless near global coverage up to 60 degrees north and south and are available for download as 5 x 5 tiles in geographic coordinate system WGS84 datum These files are available for download in both ArcInfo ASCII format and
237. ic form Integer index and the field Property Alias is set to Lithology then the histogram dialog has a drop down lithology list which allows the user to select and generate the histogram and summary statistics for each lithology Ifa Lithology field is not present the user can use the Add Current Model field from the Mesh Grid context menu to add the 3D GeoModeller model Formation Lithology to the mesh or grid Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 271 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt 3P Histogram of LogMN I EN BN ja Histogram of LogMN en 75 7 0 325 0 4 300 aad 275 5 5 5 250 6 0 5 jag T aa 45 ay Mean 0 788077 Sigma 0 580774 200 40 We a 3 54 7 0 30 a gi 125 10G 1 79 Da 29 TU QS GB G 0O U Ue DFS 1 00 1d 150 Loghi e Gutenberg Richter Plot This graph is used in Micro Seismic analysis and plots seismic event frequency against magnitude In seismology the Gutenberg Richter law 1 GR law expresses the relationship between the magnitude and total number of earthquakes in any given region and time period of at least that magnitude Gutenberg Richter Plot of M Gutenberg Richter Plot of M y 7 B02 2 245 A good reference for microseismic analysis is Tutorial J distributed with the 3D GeoModelle
238. ied and select an individual actions for each object Import all Import Create Formation Create Fault Merge to Fault Merge to Formation Import Hornblende Do not import Merge to Formation Merge to Fault Sediment oc not impart ad Do not import Create Formation Create Fault See the following table for an explanation of the possible actions User Use individual specified selections Individual not applicable Do not import any data Do not import data for this object import Create formation Create fault Merge to formation Merge to fault 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd Import all data to a single existing project object Create a new project formation and import all data to it Create a new project fault and import all data to it Import all data toa single existing project formation Import all data toa single existing project fault Import data for this existing project object from the matching object in the import file Create a new project formation with a name the same as the formation in the import file and import the corresponding data to it Create a new project fault with a name the same as the fault in the import file and import the corresponding data to it Import the data for this object in the import file to an existing project formation of a different name Import the data for this object in the import fil
239. ilable Dallheeeava lenietord ea display See How to select items from a list Parameters 3D GeoModeller shows drillholes using cylinders You can set the Radius of the cylinders in Project distance units The default radius is equal to 1 100 of the longest dimension of the Project Appearance of Drillholes dialog box Parent topic Use this dialog box to specify the display radius of one or more drillholes View menu and dialog boxes q Appearance of Drillholes xX Radius bes Help wf OK yf Apply Fd close Controls in this dialog box Display radius for the drillhole in Project distance units metres The default radius is equal to 1 100 of the longest dimension of the Project Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt 3D GeoModeller Reference 184 GeoModeller User Manual 4 Back gt Contents Help Top Show Interface Data in 3D Viewer dialog box Parent topic Use this dialog box to specify the formations whose geology data points appear in the View menu and 3D Viewer dialog boxes x To show geology interface data in the 3D Viewer select the Formations and Faults that you wish to display and press OK or Apply Geology Formations and Faults _ 5 Granite r LowerCover E Basement E Sw NE Fault Select All Deselect All Invert p Help vf OK if Apply Close Controls in this dialog box
240. illholes Mansfield_Synthetic_1toS_Collars csv 3 1134 tutorial CaseStudyH Datal SyntheticDrillholes Mansfield_Synthetic_itoS Surveys csv 3 1134 tutorial CaseStudyH Datal SyntheticDrillholes Mansfield_Synthetic_itoS Geology csv Finish Cancel 2 Parse CSV collar file P CSV Data Import E x Steps Parse CSV collar file Step 2 of 9 1 Select data type to import Text qualifiers Decimal separator 2 Parse CSV collar file 4 sl colums to collar data 7 7 Double Quote I Dot 4 Parse CSV survey File 5pace Dot Other I Single Quote l Comma 5 Map CSV colums to survey data structure 6 Parse CSV geology file i ioe 7 Map CSV colums to geology Data start at row 1 data structure 8 Map geologic objects in project I Treat consecutive delimiters as one Skip leading spaces data 9 Verify imports ee ee ee ee Mansfield1 424267 50598679 428596 5090263 3 2 ansfield 426399 5859606 M Mansfield3 M 4 ansfield4 429924 5890748 ansfieldS 431336 3691266 El Column size Auto EA E Reset Finish Cancel 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 356 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt The 3 files contain Collar data Down Hole Survey data and Geology data The wizard uses a lookup table to try to automatically identify and match the field header names with the required i
241. images Hide the image using the END key Open Close all Open Open a 2D Viewer window for all sections 2D Viewers Close Close all 2D Viewers Vertical see Vertical exaggeration submenu and toolbar Exaggeration Reset all Adjust pan and zoom of each 2D Viewer window so that the viewers display is all visible and fills the window Show or hide all modelled geology lines or polygons in 3D Viewer Erase all model Erase model display from all sections in the 2D Viewer and 3D geology Viewer Regenerate all Choose this option to force 3D GeoModeller to regenerate section section intersections If you change the model precision or intersections topography you need to update the relationships between sections Edt Images only See Edit and Align Image dialog box Delete Sections Delete all sections from the project Show For each section where model data is visible lines or polygons or both display the same data in the 3D Viewer Hide Hide all model data displayed on sections in the 3D Viewer Images Delete the image from the project Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 20 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Project Explorer and 2D Viewer Drillholes shortcut menus Parent topic The Project Explorer context menus for Drillholes enable you to work on those objects Project tog
242. imum and maximum elevation height Beaton Link Bevabon Interfaces Elevation Note If the user creates a lithology model voxet for input to inversion then the voxet must be regular with a uniform voxel Z dimension e Model Grid Choose the cell resolution or number of cells in X Y Z ymax 31000 00 rme Buld 3D Limits Choose the extents of E o eua the voxet model in the lower panel You can Use Points in the points editor to set the al grid extents vo Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 244 Contents Help Top q Back gt From Explore 3D Geology Context Menu Create 3D Grids with Physical Properties Parent topic Mesh Grid Operations Contents Help Top This function creates a single mesh grid with 5 property fields Density Susceptibility Thermal Conductivity Heat Production Rate and Seismic Velocity Hide S83 GeomodellerTolsatis c P Formations fee Faults ne g 3D Geology Ta Grids and meshes Wireframe Create 2D 3D Grids from Model ey F F E 0 Create Grid with Zero Value Field Ps Create 3D Grids with Physical Properties 3D Model from 2D Grid Delete ids with Physical Properties Fixed Variable Size 70 m 191 667 m Y 12 int Formation Density
243. inate or In r sqrt x 2 y 2 z 2 For the moment the x y z analysis user interface is not implemented and is turned off or using the space coordinate of a potential or using the space coordinate of the potential plus curvilinear distance along the potential e Computation of the variogram e Analysis Fitting of the variogram model e Saving the analysis These steps are discussed fully in the Interpolation section following Surface Analysis 1 Carpani r G Fobstal jure palmi Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 277 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Mesh and Grid Field Surface Analysis Parent topic 3D GeoModeller i ene e Polynomial approximation e Computes a new field from the original one by selecting and fitting a polynomial surface of order 1 to 5 of the coordinate here 3D coordinates x y z that minimises the distance to the true value The new field created is added to the grid the name of the field is automatically generated e Make Surface Shells e Extracts triangulated Shells or Surface observation points from 3D grids of formations or numeric fields These products are useful for revising geological models following inversion The user can select from the following Query Types to control the extracted Shell or Surface Selecting Range allows the user to enter 2 inc
244. ins the data defining a geology interval in the drillhole SS SS Start of file SSS SSS Se SS Se SSS SSS SS SSS SESS SSS End of file These fields represent e Name of drillhole East X coordinate of the drillhole collar e North Y coordinate of the drillhole collar e Height of the drillhole collar Depth to the end of the geology interval Name of the geology formation for this drilled interval Example file To make this example easier to read we truncated the real numbers removing the decimals SSS SSS SSeS SS SS SS SS SS E Start of file S080 997540 167670 220 105 Quaternary S080 997540 167670 220 123 Tertiary S080 997540 167670 220 278 Secondary S080 997540 167670 220 569 Socle S081 997054 172524 139 62 Quaternary S081 997054 172524 139 307 Secondary S083 996100 159765 46 281 Tertiary End of file For drillhole S080 the Quaternary formation interval extends from depth 0 to 105 For drillhole S080 the Secondary formation interval extends from depth 123 to 278 The collar of drillhole S083 is located below sea level at an altitude of 46 Format GDM GDM is in house BRGM software used for drillhole data management The software enables the export of drillhole data in a proprietary binary format For detailed information on this format refer to the GDM Reference Manual or contact GDM technical support 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Ba
245. ion Parent topic 3D When you launch 3D GeoModeller main window appears with the main menu and GeoModeller toolbars workspace ate Ames ie ete Lem Une aera Peeper e tenet fe Sea cee tment BPRSEGSOr B 7 OVA acre af PERELE seve Pi NTREPID Ohr A When a project opens the interface expands to present a workspace the upper part of which has the main menu and toolbars and a lower part containing a number of dockable windows GSURGUH B sOF VA s gt OTIS ROP AAR ABE Z Biyan eet ee eA O A LL TETTE PEPE Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 13 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Status bar and conventions for spatial coordinates Parenttopic 3D In the Status Bar the Points List Editor and the Tape Measure 3D GeoModeller GeoModeller uses the following notation to describe spatial coordinates workspace As you point to a position in the 2D Viewer 3D GeoModeller displays the coordinates of the point in the Status Bar xi 103833 773m y 2002398 500m 2 540 219m u 103833 773m v 2002398 500m See also e Points List Editor floated e Tape Measure Y indicates that the term is present in the 3D GeoModeller feature Local coordinates in the current plane XyZ UV Distance to previous point Length In Tape Measure if you are measuring Distance the Topography section you need
246. ion a BP Model cid 3D ETACIE An example multiplot analysis using the settings shown above appears on the next page as a full A4 landscape size figure Regression Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt 3D GeoModeller Reference 253 GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top 4 Back gt TOA WHY Humber of oes ciwedbitra Be 2 88 8 8 FF Di ZG CMR ed a 0 SNe GS WoOPssevibay eau Pui cra E 4 zL te di aL E a are ag a a Ji EA im Er dg al ic aya a aya we ayi are ari FEL a ayz g wos az BEE cere ae er are aye BEH UPS a HEH p ep oA aiig ares PUD EPIN MELUN CE WE E OTE ME WS See OS Sk FE PoE OTE uopsseubay eau Q0GLORSE LOGON EL ALAMA a EUELLLTOOR ET ao he Bue en luau dOLm Soe 15A oe S piy ep oe usury a ae er EP Or Re OE eE OO mE OE EE OTI RD Di gri Dri EES Ea F FRAT EF uoIss alba eeu Ss 8 amp amp SR F RF A SF IPOH Ea bojoary ee 4 Back gt 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd Contents Help Top GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 254 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt e Group Fields e Group Fields is another method for creating a new field from the existing fields of a mesh or grid by using a series of numeric field and or date time ranges for these fields The quer
247. ion points that describe it Apply the changes that you have specified The title of the button depends on whether you are creating a new set of points or editing an existing set 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 101 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Create or Edit Faults dialog box Parent topic These attributes enable a detailed geological description of the fault Geology menu a xi boxes Faults TEF Attributes i Dy Appearance 5 Delete Create anew Faulk Name do Add Colour x Close P Help Controls in this dialog box Faults Faults in the project Pauireun the sroce Sclee Clic a hal a click a fault for editing or deleting Edit attributes of the selected fault See Fault Properties attributes dialog box Appearance Edit appearance of the selected fault See Appearance of objects dialog box family Delete the selected fault Create a new fault Name Name for a new fault that you are creating Colour Click in this field to select colour for the new fault Uses the Colour Palette dialog box Add the new fault Choose this after you have named it and selected the colour Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 102 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Fault Prop
248. ions m g Formations fi Faults m i Faults m iM Faults E g Models Models GH Models E l E al E B Sections g Sections 43 Drithole 84 Sections 4 Topography Sta Surface DTM_contours50m_t1 gif p HotRoxProject_Geology tl qif MBB fT r Shading L HotRoxProject_Geology_t1 gif E Wretrane E ms ERER EER Hide Drillholes a Open all 2D Viewers s8 s 0 Close all 2D Viewers B EL g Meshes gt Hide Vertical exaggeration gt Wy Increase vertical exaggeration by 1 7 sRL 1000 R Delete Q Shading Reset All 2D Viewers W Set vertical exaggeration SR Appearance B amp B Show all modelled geology lines in 3D Viewer x Reset vertical exaggeration amp Erase all model geology plot the model Re jew EP Regenerate al section RE IBS Image 8 Delete o E 7 7 a EEE E ge mr ia menty Sections shortcut menu Section gt image Section shortcut menu shortcut menu described elsewhere see 2D Viewer sub menu and main shortcut menu Project Explorer Section menus 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 19 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Options in these menus Option Description Show Hide See Common shortcut menu options Shading Wireframe Appearance e Rotate through the images attached to the section using the PAGEUP and PAGEDOWN keys For
249. irection the same as the line joining the two points The direction in which you click the two points is important for the dip If you want to enter the dip as an angle between 0 and 90 then you need to click the two points in the direction where the dip falls away to the left 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 201 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt The following diagram shows a number of orientation points in a horizontal section the large arrows show the direction in which the user clicked the points of each observation We show the overturned dips with their conventional dip direction with a filled triangle symbol to indicate that they are overturned The following diagram has examples 45 to 110 75 to110 75 to 290 45 to 290 overturned overturned Non horizontal section orientation markers If you are clicking points to input orientation data on a non horizontal section the two points you click represent the observed dip of the contact between the surface and the section In the in the Create or Edit Orientation Data dialog box 3D GeoModeller shows e Dip as the angle between 0 and 90 above the horizontal of the line between the points you clicked Dip direction as the direction from left to right or right to left of the section at the clicked points For example if the section is oriented North East
250. is wizard dialog are described in the following table These options control how the Horizon picks are thinned depths converted to elevations and the horizon true dips and strikes orientations are calculated at section intersections Option Description Intersection Radius Radius around each line intersection when calculating the true dip Max Line Points Maximum number of points per line to import Clip to Project Remove any picks outside the GeoModeller project x y z limits Pick Z is positive depth If selected this option converts positive depths below surface to GeoModeller elevations Horizon DDF Pathname of the saved DDF for the horizon data file Created or loaded during Step 2 Horizon Database Pathname of the saved Intrepid horizon output database Nav Database List A list of navigation databases full paths used to lookup coordinates of the Horizon picks Line Shotpoint is used for the lookup Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 152 Contents Help Top Contents Help Top 4 Back gt True Dip Geomodeller requires both contact data and orientation data in order to compute a model With regards to the seismic import tool this is in the form of 3D interface points and 3D orientation data The 3D interface data are brought in via the thinned horizon picks while the 3D orientation data relate t
251. it shows Dip direction as either 45 or 225 See the following diagram for an illustration Section oriented North East yy a Suggested Suggested Dip direction 225 Dip direction 45 In suggesting these values 3D GeoModeller is assuming that the geological surface is orthogonal to the section and so has the Dip direction of 45 North East or 225 South West If you know the true dip of the surface edit the Dip and Dip direction to show the correct values There is no special symbol for overturned in a non horizontal section Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 202 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Vertical exaggeration Parenttopic 3D A vertical exaggeration factor of 1 results in height scale being the same as horizontal GeoModeller scale concepts For example if there is no vertical exaggeration factor 1 then if you add 1 to the factor the vertical exaggeration becomes 2 and 3D GeoModeller shows height at twice the actual size relative to horizontal distances If you add 1 again 3D GeoModeller displays at three times actual height relative to horizontal distances There is no vertical exaggeration in topographic sections How to select items from a list Parent topic 3D n various places while using 3D GeoModeller you need to select one or more items 2 from a list 3D GeoModell
252. l Total Sill Nugget Sill If there are problems with the fit experiment with other variogram models distributions 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 287 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Examples of the most common variogram model types are illustrated below sill So ii BS Le 14 zi 25 30 io 05 10 1 5 T0 5 a F h Spherical Model Gaussian Model 5 5 l ro Sill Sil o A ee a o a ra fr SOR oe ee ws SAA aa i it dl 5 nT 15 7 i5 8 25 ao hi h Exponential Model Power Model Nesting It is possible to handle complex distributions where there is more than one model distribution in the data by using a nested model The user would handle this by toggling y2 and trying to fit a second distribution which when added will give a better fit to the observed data A nested model example is Shown below Nested Model v 4 4 m Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 288 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt e Step 5 Save As e Save the variogram model with a suitable name A default name is built from the input field formation and variogram model type The user can accept or edit the name Save analysis 4 of 4 First uniform E yunior Y Y1 Y tot
253. l edges not to the cell centres You can define the registration point anywhere inside the grid extents GRD Geosoft grid format A binary format for storing raster data typically used for geophysical data Two files describe each grid suffixes grd and grd gi The gi file contains information about the coordinate reference system Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 230 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt GRD or ARC ASCIIGRID format ARC ASCIIGRID refers to a specific interchange format developed for ArcInfo rasters in ASCII format The format consists of a header that specifies the geographic domain and resolution followed by the actual grid cell values Usually the file extension is asc but recent versions of ESRI software also recognise the extension grd It looks like this ncols 157 nrows 171 xllcorner 156 08749650000 ylilcorner 18 870890200000 cellsize 0 00833300 0011312335 68 9 12 14 18 21 25 30 35 41 47 53 59 66 73 79 86 92 97 102 106 109 112 113 113 113 111 109 106 103 98 94 89 83 78 72 67 61 56 51 46 41 37 32 29 25 22 19 etc Coordinates may be in decimal or integer format DD MM SS format for geodetic coordinates 1s not supported xllcorner and yllcorner are given as the edges of the grid not the centres of the edge cells ARC INFO supports other header strings that allow the centres of
254. l surface and a geology horizon geology contact or interface It represents the trace of the points of maximum curvature of a layer affected by a fold Create hinge lines within sections created from axial surface Hinge lines have the following parameters e A set of points each having u v coordinates For an explanation of u v see Status bar and conventions for spatial coordinates The geology formation intersecting the axial surface section e Parameters specifying the aperture and distance e Polarity left or right For more information about properties see Create or Edit Hinge Line Data dialog box Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 10 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt The 3D model Parent topic 3D GeoModeller uses the geology and structural data recorded on the map Elements of a topography in sections and in drillholes to compute a 3D model of the geology It also must use the information recorded in the stratigraphic pile for the project GeoModeller arap p proj f project The model is a set of mathematical equations but it is possible to present the model in a variety of ways For example as 3D shapes or volumes or plotted as model geology in the 2D map view or section views of the project 3D model operations In a2D Viewer e Plot the 2D model geology being the intersection of the 3D m
255. last time workspace you saved the project Manage workspace Show or hide workspace components See Docking configuration dialog box Show keyboard View a summary of all 3D GeoModeller keyboard shortcuts shortcuts See Keyboard shortcuts window Show pop up tips Contact our technical support service for information about this option Show research menu Contact our technical support service for information about this option Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 193 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Docking configuration dialog box Parent topic Use the Docking Configuration dialog box to show and hide the current screen Window menu elements such as 2D Viewer windows and the Project Explorer and dialog boxes y Docking Configuration X This window helps you to manage the views composing your application workspace By clicking on the table checkboxes below you can select if a view will be diplayed or nat Click on the Ok button to apply your changes or on the Cancel button if you do not want to save your changes Name sible OE g 3D View M g Case_B_S5ectioni mj Explore mj af ack Map_DTM iv Controls in this dialog box Name Nameofwindow demet Keyboard shortcuts window Parent topic The Keyboard Shortcuts window has a complete list of all 3D GeoModeller Window menu keyboard shortcuts and dial
256. lation e Calculate the model c Compute the Model Interpolate Geology and Structural Data X eclogy and Structural Data Sections to take into account IntrusiveSeries UpperSeries LowerSeries Select All Farameters Hint Select All Deselect All obal Parameters Model limits Win oo Ma oa amp Use Points Simplification radius 10 m minj 00000 wax a amp Use Points minf O BO ma Um 8 Use Points z Project zone 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 118 Contents Help Top lt 4 Back gt Controls in this dialog box Control Purpose Faults only Faults only Check this in order to interpolate only the faults regardless of the links between faults and series Series to interpolate Series available for the model calculation Select click the series that you want to include 1n the model computation or use Select All Hold down SHIFT or CTRL in the normal Windows manner to select a range or number of separate series If Faults only is checked the series are unavailable for inclusion in the model calculation Select Al Include all series in the model calculation Parameters Set interpolation parameters for a series This is only a when you select a single series See Model Interpolation Parameters dialog box Reports on the reason for not listing certain series in this dialog box
257. le figure 4 illustrates a tetrahedral meshing of an implicit function conformal with geological boundaries and following the internal isopotential Ideally this kind of mesh should used more often All the tools for simulation can use tetrahedral meshing The problem is to obtain meshes with A minimum of cells e Conformal mesh the frontier of two objects is shared by the adjacent cells e Well formed cells Using this technique we can e Control the number of cells Ensure that the frontier of two objects is shared by the adjacent cells The size of the cell can increase inside one geological unit Another advantage of this technique from the user point of view is that the volume meshing is only required for the visualisation of the model The meshing is created when we compute the representation of the geological units To fill the mesh we just need to know the circumcenter of the cells or the vertices of the cell and apply the geostatistical technique describe above to these points In case of regular hexahedral grids the same procedure is applied using the centre of the cells When filling the properties it is also possible to fill the cells with the gradient vector of the potential field function so that we know the normal vector to the potential in each cell this could be useful for some application like fluid flow geophysics 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User
258. ler Reference 363 Contents Help Top Contents Help Top q Back gt The sequence of validation steps proceeds in a defined order of order of severity See Validation rules for drillholes 3 Files CSV format P CSV Data Import l x Steps Verify imports Step 9 of 9 1 Select data type to import Summary 2 Parse CSV collar file structure D ee E E E TE T E SA A EA E ee AA E E ERT ot Imported 4 Parse CSV survey file E 5 Map CSV colums to survey Tot Imported data structure Mot Imported Hole collar outside project limi hie OE tel iip Jot Imported Illegal data format Ma colums to geology et aed te rene E ee oe sine ot Imported HoleID not present in Survey file 8 Map geologic objects in project Jot Imported Overlapping Litho interval data Imported Missing Litho interval 9 Verify imports Mot Imported HolelID must begin with a letter 1 wos uktenen O O O o oo o o y yO 2 wms Overlapping itho M2from40 7t0497 B _ t2w00134 Hole 1D should start withletters CS 4 amp WD035 Missing litho interval From 87 6 to 88 3 5 amp WDO136 Missing litho interval From 40 3 to 40 7 6 woo137 Overlapping litho OK From 39 5 to 395 7 J weer S a J wees SS a amp lycDos06 Missing litho interval From 35 3 to 35 4 re a ae el Invalid Dip Value 388 5 at amp vco Missing litho name From 41 to 86 12 y pow a Validation Passed imported d Validation War
259. lete a project Delete a project that is not the current project Print the contents of a viewer See Print S Viewer dialog box CTRL Q Properties View or edit the properties of the current project See Project Properties dialog box Select a language for the user interface a o Exit from 3D GeoModeller aa Exit without asking whether you want to CTRL SHIFT Q save the project Create new project Parent topic When you create a new project 3D GeoModeller displays the Project Properties Project menu dialog box See Project Properties dialog box Project toolbar and dialog boxes New Project from Voxet Parent topic You can create a new 3D GeoModeller project from an external GoCAD voxet The i roject rB GoCAD voxet must have a Lithology field and ideally header information carrying the roject toolbar formation names and colours See Create New Project from Voxet and dialog boxes Save a project and Save As Parent topic Main menu Project gt Save or Save As Project menu Project toolbar Your current work in a 3D GeoModeller session all new data entries edits model and dialog computation plotting of model results reside in memory RAM To save your boxes project to hard disk use Project gt Save or Project gt Save As To save a new project or make a new version of a project use Save As To save changes to an already saved open project use Save Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM a
260. lign Image dialog box 3D Viewer Presentation dialog box 3D Viewer Presentation dialog box Load Surface Mesh Show Orientation Data in 3D Viewer dialog box Show Drillholes in 3D Viewer dialog box Appearance of Drillholes dialog box Show Interface Data in 3D Viewer dialog box Vertical Exaggeration dialog box Appearance of objects dialog box family Colour Palette dialog box Column width controls Point Acquisition Parameters dialog box Points List Visualisation dialog box View menu cascades shortcut menus and toolbars Parent topic The View menu has a number of cascade menus repeated groups of menu options and View menuand options that duplicate the toolbars dialog boxes Contents Help Top View menu 2D Viewer sub menu and main shortcut menu Project Explorer Section menus e Data shortcut submenu e Delete Data shortcut sub menu 3D Viewer sub and shortcut menu 3D Controls sub menu and 3D Viewer toolbar Submenus common to various menus e Vertical exaggeration submenu and toolbar e Pan and zoom controls 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 166 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt View menu Parent topic Use the View menu items to specify the choice and the appearance of the data that View peti you want to see in the 3D GeoModeller window including both the 2D Viewer and nee nt the 3D Viewer shortcut menus and toolbars E
261. ll voxel centroids depending on the type If present an Above_Topo formation is always assigned the value 0 It represents that part of the grid from the top of the topographic surface to the top of the 3D voxet This formation is only present in 3D voxets created during geophysical forward modelling and inversion and is not part of the model pile e The lithology field is a special type which is recognised by setting an Alias named Lithology This allows the mesh or voxet field to be automatically recognised as such and to be assigned the current formation colours when displayed in the 2D or 3D viewers It also allows the histogram tool to report volumes for each formation since conventional statistics are meaningless in this context Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 248 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt e Create Coordinates X Y Z Fields Adds the X Y Z coordinates of each vertex cell or voxel to the current Mesh or Grid as 3 separate fields These may be useful for calculations in the MeshGrid calculator or for export for use in other applications e Export Export the selected mesh or grid to one of the supported export formats The user chooses the output directory format and filename The available formats are sensitive to the mesh grid type as shown in the list and dialogs below 3D observations CSV
262. llar file It will be used to test the Depth and Depth_To fields in the Survey and Geology files to ensure these are always less than or equal to the Total Hole Depth IF an EOH Depth is defined in the Collar file THEN Any Survey or Geology Interval which occurs beyond the EOH will be reported to the user 1n the Validation report AND The Hole will not be imported if the user chooses to continue ELSE IF there is no EOH depth available in the Collar file THEN The total hole depth will be the greater of the maximum survey depth and the maximum Depth_To AND The hole will be imported Note The Total Hole Depth field is not supported for import in 3D GeoModeller V1 8 This option will be supported in V2 0 The rule marked above still applies in 3D GeoModeller V1 3 Duplicate survey depths or geology From To intervals for any Hole will be reported to the user in the Validation report If the duplicate records match for all fields then one record will be imported if the user chooses to continue otherwise the hole will not be imported All fields do not match Validation of the survey file detects Dips or Azimuths dip directions that are outside the possible numeric range Abs Dip gt 90 OR NAN Azimuth lt 0 OR gt 360 OR NAN Holes that fail this test will not be imported Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Referen
263. lusive Values The Shells are saved as VTK vtp poly files and the Surfaces Tops are saved as x y Z observation points in esv format The Shells are auto loaded into Meshes and Grids in the Explore tree on completion The Surface observation points are imported as 3D points to the relevant formation where they can be visualised as normal and used to control the update to the formation boundary e Selecting Make Surface Shells opens the following dialog This is an example of the use of the RANGE Query Type and the selection of Tops rE 45 Make surface shells Input Voxet Case LawRand _final Input Field Lithology Output st NewStuffS bdgsub5 rp dean Top_Of_Crust csv Query Type RANGE a Tops only CSV output Value 1 1 Value 2 2 Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt 3D GeoModeller Reference 278 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top The second example below outputs the Shell for Formation 3 in the vtp poly format input Voxet Input Field Output amaan Query Type Tops only CSV output ve 1 The third example shows the results of the two queries displayed in the 3D viewer Points for top of Formations 1 and 2 base of 3 and shell for Formation 2 I I 1 re z a mieni is fe Sas pea ete e s nR e L ARAE c an THAE ea n E lt 4 Back g
264. lustration shows a table of values of the orientation data shown above A 30 towards 270 30 towards 270 Polarity 1 30 from vert towards 270 B 35 towards 090 35 towards 090 Polarity 1 35 from vert towards 090 C 50 towards 090 Overturned 50 towards 090 Polarity 1 T gee 130 towards 270 Polarity 1 130 from vert towards 270 D 30 towards 090 30 towards 090 Polarity 1 30 from vert towards 090 When you enter overturned geology data in 3D GeoModeller set Polarity to 1 Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top Orientation data plot symbols 3D GeoModeller Reference 200 4 Back gt Parent topic 3D You can create an orientation point from two points in the Points List Gn other words GeoModeller concepts by clicking two points The following diagram has a guide to the default 3D Contents Help Top GeoModeller orientation point symbols Orientation data markers 3D GeoModeller default conventions Horizontal section Pointer of symbol shows the dip direction orthogonal to strike l Baseline of the symbol shows the strike of the intersection between the horizontal section and the geological surface For orientation of surfaces 3D GeoModeller always uses dip and dip direction You can create the baseline by clicking Length
265. m ft The spatial precision of the model in metres Note The Project Name is used to create a project directory containing the project xml file et al within the defined Parent Directory ie Parent Directory Project Name Project Name xml Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top Contents Help Top 3D GeoModeller Reference 73 q Back gt Project Location O Testing Geomodeller Punt_Hil WewProj_From_ oxet Version 2 0 Betty 23 10 2012 14 39 7 HeghtDatum local m Precision Project Extent Xin 726350 0 MMe 744950 0 Yin 6495950 0 YHX 6511950 0 ZMin 1220 0 Max 280 0 When the Project dialog is completed click OK to proceed At this point the project is created using the voxet extents and the geological pile is built using the scanned lithologies list The user may want to alter the default Erode Onlap relationships in the stratigraphic pile to record the true relationships between them but these are not used directly during geophysical modelling only the pile order can be honored 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 74 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Reference Top Colluvium Colluvium Series Onlap Simmens Quartite Series Onlap Simmens Qu
266. m idl Gutenberg Richter Plot ae ee eee TE Nearest Neighbour Analysis Analysis Variogram Analysi Domaining Estimation Inverse Distance Interpolation oe Cross Validation of Kriging oe i Domaining Cross Validation Interpolation Gaussian Anamorphosis Transformation pot Gaussian Simulation on a Domain he Gaussian Simulation All Model g olynomial Approximation b f Cross Plot with Another Field ee Multi Crossplot with Statistical E f Multi field Analysis Analysis Regression 5 Delete ke Properties e All available Field options can be used with Irregular Vertex Meshes Point Clouds with the exception of the Make Surface Shells option for 3D grids Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 260 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt e 2D Grid Fields The 2D Grid Field context menu includes all of the point cloud functions except those used in Interpolation and Nearest Neighbour Analysis Elevation Hide Field from All Views Field Visualisation Manager en Visualisation Edit Colours and Clips Display Color Table Contouring Histogram Statistical Gutenberg Richter Plot Analysis lt Fit Surface Cross Plot with Another Field f eee Multi Crossplot with Statistical i aa E Analysis E f Multi field Analysis Regression 3 Delete es Properties 83D Grid Fields
267. main shortcut menu Project Explorer Section menus Parent topic View menu cascades shortcut menus and toolbars Contents Help Top All of these menus contain similar options so we describe them in this combined section Within the 2D Viewer menu e Data shortcut submenu e Delete Data shortcut sub menu For an overview of the specific 2D Viewer shortcut menus for different objects see 2D Viewer shortcut menus Main View menu gt 2D Viewer View Window Help E 2D Viewer b El viewer I i artera yertical E mggar atian E tormata Eott Al Aye ances BP ats Kait al appa amcan Q Pome azgi Parameters Reset view ist Show 2 Shading 2 Appearance a Hide B Wireframe Display parameters Presentation le Background colour Refresh BH Pats List visais atio Dim uw wiae otira Cs Image Manager Save Image amp Properties Reset view Section2 Hide ra Q Shading D Appearance w Plot the model on the current section Vertical exaggeration Display parameters Presentation l Background colour Refresh CS Image Manager Save Image Data d Za Show modelled geology lines in 3D Viewer Z Erase all model geology g Properties Import GIS and Other Binary Located Data Import BRGM Data Export 2D data Project Explorer Section shortcut menu Qe Tutoriala P Formations Mf Faus g Models Sections
268. management functions gt Name Change a Field Name e Units Edit Units ie ppm SI e Alias Edit the Alias If a lithology voxet is to be visualised in Pile colours and the Histogram tool is to have the ability to view statistics by Formation then the Lithology Manage MeshGnd Field Properties Type Real Abas Litholagy Memory usage 62 5 Kb 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd voxet must have the alias set to Lithology 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 262 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt e Field Description Add a description of the Field ie history Type Describes the Data type not editable e Elements The number of vertices grid cells or voxels in mesh or grid e Memory Usage Memory required to load The Character button red arrow in the dialog allows the user to open the Chracter Map to choose special characters when editing the Units field rol Pa T Pa Go ud F W H al E 2 5 lt mE P d wi x i J w Sy gt I ECCHONOE oloo malela kim DOCE QAOCI CPOEAQA Ch Ge ie ejo S clo PEDERE gt Q gt 5 O S w oy H J Ci mi Characters to copy URDI Erdamation Mak Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top 3
269. me The next figure illustrates how we compute the distance in the pot dg 0 space The point A is on isovalue potA the point B on isovalue potB The distance dg A B is the length of the arc label at isovalue potM potA potB 2 The distance along the coordinate potM is dg Am Bm Thus we define dg A B dg Am Bm dg A B distance To compute distance we use the gradient of potential field to walk on the isosurface in 3D space The algorithm to compute distance is defined in the following 2D figure Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd lt 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 303 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt If the points A and B belong to an isovalue V the dashed line connecting the point A to point B is projected onto this isovalue using dichotomy We compute a point C at the middle of line AB then we project C using the gradient of the isopotential on to isopotential V If the new length AC CB is much less than the length AB we split the chord AC to obtain D and the chord CB to obtain E and we project D and E on to isopotential V and so on until the new length doesn t change more than a few percent from the former length AB In this example the length of AB at the start is 3551m after the projections the length is 4541m pot Distance Computation of pot distance between two points A and B pot A B is very easy it is the ab
270. mes into a Mesh from available supported formats such as GoCAD TSurf DXF or Vulcan wireframe 3D Grid Voxels Import 8D regular grids of such data as Geology Densities Susceptibilities using available supported formats such as GoCAD Voxet Import Seismic Export View Window 2D GMS Data to Section 2D Geology to Section 3D Geology Hi 2D Section Create Seismic Navigations Drillhole Seismic Horizons Grid and Mesh Micro senmic Seismic j Micro sermic Flow Data These options allow the user to import Seismic Navigation data and Horizon picks or to import a Micro seismic 3D point cloud with attributes and or a Micro seismic Flow rate database as described in the following table Import Seismic Navigations Import seismic navigation data in fixed format using the CSV data import wizard For information about the wizard see Navigation Import Import Seismic Horizons Import seismic horizon picks in fixed format using the CSV data import wizard For information about the wizard see Horizon Import Import Micro seismic Import micro seismic data in CSV format using the CSV data import wizard For information about the wizard see CSV data import wizard Import Micro seismic Flow Data Import micro seismic flow data in CSV format using the CSV data import wizard For information about the wizard see CSV data import wizard Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4
271. model according to your settings When you close the dialog box 3D GeoModeller remembers the settings When you plot the model on a section J or on all sections 3D GeoModeller uses the settings that were in the dialog box when you closed it Note Currently if you set plotting limits in a section as soon as you select a different section in the dialog box or the 2D Viewer 3D GeoModeller restores the plotting limits for that section to the project extents Plot the model settings X Section Topography ka Plotting resolution Number of nodes u direction 50 w direction 50 Node spacing u 200 v 200m Less Plotting limits uMin 100000 uMax 110000 m a Use Points vMin 2000000 vMax 2010000 m a Use Points Reset Limit by topography Plot model geology J Show Fill Show lines J Show trend lines Formations Formations Number of trend lines 10 aai fa p rc 2m it 3 Si Sha i Show within series f Show everywhere Series Intrusive Series UpperSeries z LowerSeries E Sw NE Fault iSelect All i Deselect All Select All Deselect All Invert Select All Deselect All Invert y OK A Apply yit Apply to All x Close Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 121 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Controls in this dialog box Control Pu
272. mp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 241 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Mesh Grid Operations Parent topic 3D In this section GeoModeller Reference From Explore Context Menu Drillhole fields to data points mesh e From Explore 3D Geology Context Menu Create 2D 3D Grids from Model e From Explore 3D Geology Context Menu Create 3D Grids with Physical Properties e From Meshes and Grids Context Menu e From Individual Mesh Grid Context Menu e From Mesh and Grid Fields Context Menu Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 242 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt From Explore Context Menu Drillhole fields to data points mesh Parent topic Select the drillholes and fields to copy to the data points mesh The x y z coordinate Mesh Grid of the mid point of each field s from to interval and the field value will be copied to a mesh vertex Not all vertices will be populated with every field value some may be null This occurs if both the original value and the regularised value are copied to the same mesh or not all fields contain measurements for each from to interval density and susceptibility logs Operations AW Drillholes Shi P Formations S Appearance Po Dykes ort 2 ir k Import e if Sections Hos Fields to data points mesh Fi
273. mp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 65 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Automatic Saves dialog box Parent topic 3D GeoModeller can automatically save your work every few minutes Project menu Project toolbar For instructions see Recovering a saved project and dialog ens The Automatic Saves dialog box appears when you choose File gt Autosave gt Recover It enables you to reload an automatically saved version of your project q Automatic Saves E Testing Geomodeller W2 Ge X Project path Eee A a a alae Browse List of automatic saves a ee ee eee Fane 200920182 June 2009 20 13 21 June 2009 20 08 20 June 2009 20 03 20 June 2009 19 58 19 June 2009 19 53 18 June 2009 19 48 18 June 2009 19 43 17 June 2009 19 38 17 June 2009 19 33 17 j Controls in this dialog box Project path Path of your 3D GeoModeller project List of automatic List of copies of your project that 3D GeoModeller has saves automatically saved Autosave Preferences dialog box Parent topic The Autosave function is designed to save your project at regular time intervals while Project menu it is being worked on You can select the time interval between saves and the Project toolbar jee maximum number of saves to be stored and dialog boxes The objective is to enable you to restore a project to a previously saved state
274. mport fields The fields within each file can be in any order If the files do not contain a header line then the user must select the columns for matching unless the expected order is as shown in the following examples if so the correct matching will take place automatically The 3 files have the following structure Collar file The Collar file must contain the following fields Field Description HoleID Name of Drillhole Must begin with a letter Collar_X East X coordinate of the drillhole collar Collar Y North Y coordinate of the drillhole collar Collar _Z RL or Elevation of the drillhole collar Example HoleID Collar X Collar Y Collar Z Mansfieldl1 424267 5888679 286 2 CSV Data Import l x Steps Map CSV colums to collar data structure Step 3 of 9 ee gt J v J z m 2 Parse CSV collar file 3 Map CSV colums Eo Caia Mansfieldi 424267 5888679 2059 data structure 2s Mansfield2 426399 2089606 3065 as 4 Parse CSV survey file a Mansfield 428596 5890263 2213 5 Map CSV colums to survey 4 Mansfield4 429924 5890748 2305 data structure 15s Mansfield5 431338 5891266 1701 6 Parse CSV geology File 7 Map CSV colums to geology data structure 8 Map geologic objects in project a 9 VeriFy imports Ean size Auto on E Reset CO I ck Next gt Finish Cancel Other fields can exist but they will not be imported A FinalDepth or EOHDepth is not required
275. mpute the model of this formation menu Use this dialog box to select the formations and the data that you want to use and dialog boxes Note that in the current version of 3D GeoModeller you have to use all of the selected data from the other formation You can t only select the points that you consider relevant External constraints Controls in this dialog box Formation Name i eo eee a a a a a the external formation whose data you may reference When checked 3D GeoModeller uses contact data belonging to that formation in calculating the model for the current formation Orientation When checked 3D GeoModeller uses orientation data belonging to that formation in calculating the model for the current formation Stratigraphic pile viewer Parent topic The Stratigraphic Pile Viewer shows you the series in your project in order and the Geology menu formations they contain and dialog boxes 3P Stratigraphic Pile Viewer x Reference Bottom UpperMansfield Mansfield_Series Erode MiddleMansfield LowerMansfield_Series Erode Sa LowerMansfield Basement_Series Onlap Basement Save CSV file Eg Close Controls in this dialog box Save JPEG Save an image of the diagram asa jpg file Save CSV file Save a description of the stratigraphic pile as a csv comma separated variables text file Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates
276. mulation Parameters Step 4 in Simulation Dialog Enter Starting Name of the Simulated Field e Choose the Number of Simulations e Select the observaion Field from which the Anamorphosis was derived Anamorphosis Come From ie Fe_Reg10 BE Conditional sequential gaussian simulation in domains Starting Name of the Simulsted Field B 1 ii 21 31 41 51 61 71 Gi 91 e Click Finish to start the Simulation calculations Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 330 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt 3D GeoModeller Operations Parenttopic 3D This section contains instructions for 3D GeoModeller operations GeoModeller Reference In this section e Organising the 3D GeoModeller workspace e Points list operations e Project and file operations e Topography and section operations e Geology formations and series operations e Structural data operations e Model operations Geophysics operations e Importing drillholes and drillhole geophysical logs and assays Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 331 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Organising the 3D GeoModeller workspace Parent topic 3D For reference information about this area see GeoModeller p rations User interface overview e 3D Geo
277. n lists at the individual formation level This option allows the user to merge lithology subsets to a single project formation It will try to match lithology codes to existing formation names If there is an exact match then it behaves like Import If there isn t an exact match then it will try to match lithology codes set to Do not import to formation names containing the same leading characters For example BG1 and BG2 will be matched to BG See Fig 4 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 360 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt The image below is an example of the Import method Import is selected by default see Tutorial case study H Mansfield because all the imported lithology formation codes are matched to a project formation 2 CSV Data Import x Steps n Map geologic objects in project data Step 8 of 9 1 Select data type to import 2 Parse CSV collar file 3 Map CSV colums to collar data structure Geologic object Action Merge to Parse CSV survey File Map CSV colums to survey data 4 str Import all h a 7 Map CSV colums to geology 6 Parse CSV geology file data structure 8 Map geologic objects in UpperMansfield h a etre h a MiddleMansfield b a rason Y DefaultBasement M dl k n b 9 Verify imports LowerMansfield a v Note If you check Show imported after finish 3D GeoMod
278. n occur when you set these parameters and some trial and error 1s required It 1s clear in the example shown above that the range values are much larger than might be expected to obtain the required continuity considering that the project is only 10000 x 10000 x 5000 m Anisotropy can be very useful when you are setting up regular shaped synthetic models for testing purposes for example evaluating geophysical responses for a variety of geophysical properties and simple geometries File formats Parent topic 3D In this section GeoModeller Refercnce File Formats Digital terrain model File Formats Images e File Formats Structural data File Formats Drillholes File Formats 2D and 3D Data Objects File Formats Digital terrain model Parent topic You can define topography in a 3D GeoModeller model by importing a grid of digital File formats terrain model DTM data This section describes the available grid file formats that can 3D GeoModeller can read Available formats are gt ERS GRD TIF gt SEMI gt GDM gt DXF ERS ERMapper grid format This is a standard ERMapper format grid which consists of an ASCII header file gridname ers and a binary file with no extension suffix gridname The ASCII header file contains the datum and projection coordinate registration cell dimensions numeric format and byte ordering information for the grid ERMapper grids are registered by default to the grid cel
279. n representing curves and Notes e Units are the same for all three coordinate directions X Y and Z e Once the topographic surface has been defined you will not be able to modify the coordinates of the project s bounding box e Changing the precision and the geometrical parameters is not retroactive it will affect only the objects created later Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 70 Contents Help Top q Back gt Create New Project from Voxet Contents Help Top To create a new project from a GoCAD voxet e Click on Start with a Voxet in the Project gt New menu and then click on the red ringed pencil on the far right to choose the voxet to load Parent Directory OD Testing Geomodeller Punt _Hil Project Name NewPro From_Vowet Project Locabon De Testing Geomodeller Punt_Hil NewProj_From_Vowet Verson 2 0 Betty AIO 14 39 7 Uritz Project Extent Min 0 0 in 0 0 AMin 1000 0 Bg New Project from Voxet G cad Voxet Lithology Field e Once the voxet is selected choose the Lithology field in the voxet and click on the Scan button The Scanned Lithologies list will display the contents of the Lithology voxet as shown in the dialog below If the GoCAD voxet contains the formation names or regions and colours in the header file then the original assigned
280. name FeXIsoint_Orel Curent Model Grid SE n t eee sal Feart IL Jl A i J l i Petlsolviitey O INT FRACO ASN ATOS ATAN ATAMI i Feisa Ore a AMM i 7 B q i a as STH cosi TANH ASIH ACOSH ATANH azii FLOOR ROU Ex S SORT 4 5 6 SEN MIM HAN j if Z J IF AND OR gt lt lt gt L l L J Evaluate Reteshal Save and Ext Cancel e The Calculator is also very useful when analysing stochastic inversion results Density and susceptibility properties can be examined spatially by formation to analyse how they are migrating during the inversion process The actual formation boundary changes can also be analysed by subtracting the Initial lithology voxet from the MostProbable or Final lithology voxets Two examples follow TBD e Mesh and Grid Calculator Syntax e The Calculator syntax has some similarity to that used in Excel formulae 66599 ce 99 but the separator is a 3 nota y The calculator s logical AND and OR syntax is not Excel like but more traditional e Nested structures are possible with the use of round brackets Entry of formulae into the Calculator is by use of the mouse only the keyboard cannot be used and pasting a formula from the clipboard is not possible e Mesh and Grid Calculator Syntax Examples IF Remove the Above_Topo
281. name or other attributes required for Orientation or other data types as shown in the table and dialogs below Data _ eee Attribute4 Geology Data Interface Formation Right aman Geology Orientation Data DipDirection Polarity 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 136 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Data Type Attributes Geology Gata Bottom Formation Right Form Geology Data Interfacel Formation Left Form Geology Orientabon Carta Geological Polygon Data Type Geology Data Bottom Formation Form Geology Data Interface Dip Direction Form Dip Pore Polanty Fon A Ineufficent data for import Data Type Attributes Geology Data Botiom D Gealogy Data interface Geology Orientation Data Background Data Type Geology Data Botton Geology Data Interface Geology Orientation Data D Geological Polygon If you select a CSV format file then you will see the standard CSV import dialog and at Step 3 you will be required to select the columns containing the Formation or Fault name and the East and North coordinates Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 137 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Map CSV colums to data structure Step 3 of 4 551843 0 1513 7 551843 0 1509 5 551843 0 6751690 0 9
282. nce the Maximum Points limit is reached Limiting the Maximum Points in the neighbourhood minimises smoothing if the local data mean is known to fluctuate considerably and also speeds up matrix Inversion e Minimum Points in neighbourhood The minimum number of points in the radial search required to calculate a value for the cell If the minimum is not reached then the cell value is set to Null e Maximum Radius of Neighbourhood The maximum radial search distance used to scan for points to include in the estimation of a cell value e Click Next gt to continue to Step 3 In setting the Neighbourhood Definition search options the user should consider the range of the variogram being used and the minimum maximum separation of observation points in the kriging neighbourhood It is not good practice to limit the search radius to the largest variogram range Although a location u may be beyond the range ie if Cov u ug 0 the data value z u still provides information about the unknown mean value m u at the location u being estimated cref GSLIB Application Notes IV 6 p105 The Nearest Neighbour analysis tool is useful in providing statistics of the spacing of observations and can help in setting the optimum Neighbourhood definition parameters Step 3 Define Units to Fill Filed Unit Vanogram Analyses Al Units F Same Potential Same Variogram Analysis F SUB OrilholesPieids_Regl0_Fe_Regi0_RhoThete_2Dine OREL
283. ning imported 9 Validation Failure not imported lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel The Verify Imports Step 9 of 9 shown above presents the detailed results of validation The user can choose one of the following options Finish and import all holes except those marked with the symbol indicating Validation Failure not imported Choose Cancel and rectify the validation problems reported in the CSV files Edit the problems in the CSV files Choose lt Back and go back to the point where the corrected file can be reloaded Step forward Check the new validation results and then choose Finish 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top 3D GeoModeller Reference 364 q Back gt When the user chooses Finish as described above a validation summary window Results Load Drillholes opens 2 Results Load Boreholes SUMMAE Y Imported Imported Imported Imported Imported Imported Imported Hole extends beyond project limits Duplicate HoleID Hole collar outside project limits Illegal data format HoleID not present in Survey file Ower lapping Litho interval Imported Missing Litho interwal Imported Imported Imported Imported Imported Imported HoleID must begin with a letter Survey Depths not sorted Litho Intervals not sorted HoleID not present in Geology file Missing litho name HoleID
284. nning the large number of horizon picks from the input data 1s often beneficial for performance and the resulting model Navigation Import The navigation import is used to create a Geomodeller section for each seismic line During this step additional information is gathered in order to streamline the horizon pick import stage Line intersections are recorded to alleviate the need to recalculate every time horizon pick data that corresponds to the navigation data 1s imported The intersections are by default stored in temporary files but the user may be specify a file in order to reuse the data later This is handy when one needs to perform multiple horizon pick imports using the same navigation data During the horizon pick import a look up into the navigation data files is required This look up uses the SHOTPOINT and LINE ID as a key to obtain the coordinates for each interpreted pick point 1 The first step is to setup a new GeoModeller project with the correct datum projection and extents to cover the area of the seismic traverses A suitable DTM or bathymetry surface should also be loaded 2 Tocommence the import of navigation data choose Import gt Seismic gt Seismic Navigations option from the 3D Geomodeller main menu and select the fixed format ascii navigation file to import Wizard Step 1 Select data type to import Step 1 of 4 Select data type to import File to Load Parse CSV file Map CSV colums to data structure
285. nstant Aperture at Origin PO DistanceatOrigm siti Aperture at Extremity PO Distance at Extremity O Polarity i Left Right Automatically re edit Ca Help wf Create Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 114 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Controls in this dialog box Control Purpose Geological formations Geology formation for these hinge line data points and faults Observation ID Your label for the data 3D GeoModeller provides this space for your notes It does not use the data in calculations Section Section containing the hinge line data Provenance Source of the geology data See Provenance Editor dialog box to see the default settings or to create or edit new categories Fold shape parameters Constant Check Constant if the distance and the aperture remain constant along the length of the hinge line If the aperture and the distance vary along the hinge line between the two end values clear Constant and enter the Fold shape parameters Aperture at Origin Aperture of the fold in degrees at the start of the hinge line first point in the Points List Distance at Origin Distance between the first point of the hinge line first point in the Points List and each of the associated orientation points that you are creating or editing Aperture at Extremity Aperture of the
286. nstant dip constant and dip direction that you specify If the geology at the contact points is overturned select Reverse Polarity If the geology is not overturned select Normal See Overturned geology Automatically re edit When checked 3D GeoModeller does not empty the Points List when you choose Edit or Create This enables you to continue editing the data See Editing geological data with the Points List for more information Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 97 Contents Help Top lt 4 Back gt Create or Edit Geology Orientation Data dialog box Parent topic Input the coordinates dip direction dip and the polarity of your geology orientation Geology menu data and dialog boxes ki Create geology orientation data 4 X Geological Formations and Faults Granite Observation ID Section Topography ka Provenance Unspecified ka Coordinates APA aA M a Aa aA aA a x 0 Y D Direction Dip direction D Dip 0 Polarity f Normal f Reverse Overturn Automatically re edit W Automatically update coordinates Po Update now Help 5 Unda wf Create Close Controls in this dialog box Geological formations Geology formation or fault associated with the geology and faults orientation data Observation ID Your own reference number fo
287. nto the points list and for editing its contents You can view Points List operations in the 2D Viewer See How the Points List coordinates with the 2D Viewer You can expand and contract the Points List Editor to show the coordinates of the currently selected point or the Points Table or neither Use the Data View Selector 3 Points List Editor a x Section Navigation Ponts view Topography Point 3 of 4 wH a nae gt QD F ih E gt E GIS and other binary located data Sec ee Data Points List Editor z a Section Navigation Pints _ View view Topography Point 3 of 4 lt a Fr rR aoon F l selector Cor GIS and other binary located data coed Current Point u 103000 v 2008000 Lenath 564 51 Angle 5 046 3 Points List Editor i x Section Navigation Points View m _ Ase hP d LF in E EM Points List u 11 v 0 x 0 v 0 z i Insert Yy z lh AE no 1835 735 3055 800 101651 9 2005821 0 3055 8 si 3469 821 Eu 103113 5 2006551 8 E 1782 19 113 4661 743 104179 6 2007084 8 1221 93 10 Controls in the Points List Editor Current section associated with the contents of the Points List Select from the drop down list 3D G
288. nts List Visualisation dialog box Point Acquisition Parameters dialog box Introduction to the Points List Parent topic The Points List stores a set of points associated with a 2D section Points List Loading the Points List You can load points into the Points List in any of the following ways Clicking new points in the 2D viewer Importing new points from a file containing Geographical Information Systems GIS data or other binary located data Editing a set of points in the 2D section 3D GeoModeller makes a copy of them in the Points List Entering new point data into the Points Table Points list operations The Points List enables you to Contents Help Top Input new data by clicking locations in the 2D viewer Import Geographical Information Systems GIS data or other binary located data such as INTREPID vector datasets Enter new data or edit existing data directly in a table Create a section by defining it by its trace Create or edit geology and structural data Geology contact and orientation data axial surface contact and orientation data hinge line data Control the rate of display rendering for dense imported data Generate point coordinates to use as inputs for subsequent dialog boxes 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 54 Contents Help Top lt 4 Back gt Notes about the Points List
289. nus Parent topic The Project Explorer shortcut menus for Faults generally and for individual faults Project enable you to work on those objects together or individually Explorer The Fault shortcut menu in the 2D Viewer enables you to work on individual faults These menus are similar so we describe them in the same section E G Tutorialag 8 5w NE Faul Ble a TutorialA4 H Gi Formations H a Form ations Hira l ae if Faults ce g Mode W Create a Fault Soy 2 Delete g Models we Attributes Er Attributes nE aa Sectii Dy Appearance Ei E Sections Appearance Appearance ng Ey Drillholes Delete Options in these menus Option Description S Create a fault See Create or Edit Faults dialog box Appearance Edit the appearance of the object or type of object See Appearance of objects dialog box family Attributes see Fault Properties attributes dialog box see Create or Edit Faults dialog box Delete the fault Project Explorer Models shortcut menus Parent topic The Project Explorer shortcut menus for the current 3D Model and its components ee enable you to work on those objects 1n groups or separately Explorer l Ne Se fle E Tutorialad ee E TutorialA4 ag a are A yii ni iy Formations ci FJ Formations ci FJ Formations H i Faus E i Faut ci i Faults m E modes a Models EF g Models H Sectior Hide E B IntrusiveSeries e B IntrusiveSeries Vol
290. o Editing operations completed on the current drillhole Explore Edit Drillhole log Left Side Panel tree Drillhole interactive editing in the left side panel of the Drillhole Properties dialog supports the following operations Edit a Drillhole Collar location by clicking on Collar location and editing the coords in the popup dialog or by clicking on X or Y or Z individually Edit a Lithology From To Edit the Lithology of a From To using the drop down Formation list Define a Lithology interval as Relaxed or Not Relaxed Default Delete a Numeric field ie Fe assay etc Edit the Appearance of a Numeric field Profile colour Vertex Symbol Hide Display a Numeric profile Calculate and Display the histogram of a Drillhole numeric field Save Undo any Edits or Visual changes to a Drillhole The Fields assays right click context menu has the following options Multi Cross Plot Analysis Also available under Meshes and Grids once the drill numeric fields are converted to a Vertex Mesh Show All Numeric Fields Generalise these Graphic Aspects Delete All Numeric Fields Create Fields on Constant Support Also available from the context menu accessible from the Drillholes item in the main Explore tree None of these options are saved until the user selects the Drillholes gt Save option in the Top level menu as described above Any of these operations can be undone by selecting Undo in the top level Edit menu Contents Help T
291. o the true dip calculation at seismic lin intersections A true dip orientation is calculated for each horizon that has points within a user specified radius around each seismic line intersection An orthogonal regression plane is fitted to the points and the dip and dip direction are then calculated from the plane The true dip is calculated using the raw input data not the thinned data that Geomodeller uses as 3D interface points 8 Click Finish gt 9 The import will proceed while displaying an oscillating progress bar On completion the following dialog will display At this point the Formations horizon picks and orientation data will have been loaded into the GeoModeller project batch TASK file which replicates this job has been created for you D Testing Geomodeller CapelFaust empty _capel_faust_ NavNew HRZ_CF_CretRift_Baserment ase_seismic audit task The saved task file is intended for use in batch mode to automate the import of a large number of navigation and horizon files to a prexisting GeoModeller project independent of the requirement to have GeoModeller running 10 At this point the use can visualise the imported data using the GeoModeller 3D viewer as shown below y 1 1 i i M 1 k ths Se 4 L ou i Sa E Ti aT ET a Y 1 i k i 4 iT i i 3D view of Seismic picks for the Basement horizon 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User
292. oModeller concepts Parent topic 3D GeoModeller Reference This section contains a number of explanations of concepts that you may need to understand when using 3D GeoModeller In this section e Dynamic selection e Precision in representing curves and surfaces e Overturned geology e Orientation data plot symbols e Vertical exaggeration e How to select items from a list Dynamic selection Parent topic 3D GeoModeller concepts If you enable this feature you can automatically select objects in the 2D Viewer when you point to the object You can edit or delete selected data objects using the shortcut menu When enabled you can select an object in the 2D Viewer by pointing to it When not enabled to select an object you need to be in Select mode see 2D Viewer toolbar and then click the object In this state you can select a number of objects After selecting the first object hold down SHIFT to select more You can turn dynamic selection on and off in the Project Properties dialog box See Project Properties dialog box Precision in representing curves and surfaces Parent topic 3D GeoModeller concepts Contents Help Top 3D GeoModeller represents curved lines in the 2D Viewers and 3D Viewer by a succession of rectilinear segments discretisation and manages them to give the best possible rendering of their shape In the same way 3D GeoModeller represents surfaces an assemblage of triangles of vari
293. of h and the third one on the N S component zonal anisotropies Stationarity Property An important assumption made is that any trend in the spatial variability of the geology can be removed or detrended The aim in detrending the geology is to achieve a state where any remaining variability is essentially random and the geology is stationary This allows cokriging to be performed in the framework of a random function model Formally the mathematical function used to model geology T x is assumed to be a random function with a polynomial drift and a stationary covariance K h Detrending geology Since the vertical usually plays a special role the degree of the polynomial drift can be higher vertically than horizontally and the covariance can be anisotropic Not all geology is layer cake An intrusive geological body that has the shape of an ellipsoid can be detrended assuming a quadratic drift use ten coefficients for the drift function with degree less than or equal to two So in general a three dimensional quadratic drift function is the current practise In theory other detrending methods like sinusoidal terms could be used but in usual applications geology is not regular enough for that It is also important to note that as no attempt is being made to follow the genesis of the geology there is no need to try and mass balance on a section by section basis We are modeling what is observed not simulatin
294. og File operations see Project menu Project toolbar and dialog boxes Save CTRL S Save as CTRL SHIFT S Print CTRL P Quit CTRL Q Points list see Points List toolbar docked Points List Editor floated Go back 10 points Go to previous point Go forwards 10 points Go to next point Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 194 Contents Help Top Back gt a Command Keystroke Delete selected points DELETE Move selected points up in list Move selected points down in list Reverse the order of points Float or dock the Points List Editor CTRL L 2D viewer controls see 2D Viewer toolbar Section controls see Section menu toolbar and dialog boxes Create a section from its trace CTRL T Create a horizontal section CTRL U 2D structural data see 2D Structural sub menu and Structural toolbar Create geology data CTRL G Create geology orientation data CTRL R Fit a plane to points and create orientation data CTRL F Create axial surface data an axial trace on a map CTRL B Create axial surface orientation data CTRL K CTRL H Create hinge line data Model see Model menu toolbar and dialog boxes Compute CTRL M Plot the model settings CTRL D Project data onto sections CTRL I Plot the model along section intersections CTRL E Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald
295. ogram Analysis Kriging e Domain Kriging Sequential Gaussian Simulation SGS 3D GeoModeller Operations How to instructions Geoscientific Principles and Underpinnings Copyright and acknowledgments Toolbar guide Project toolbar See Project menu Project toolbar and dialog boxes Section toolbar See Section menu toolbar and dialog boxes Structural toolbar See 2D Structural sub menu and Structural toolbar Points List Editor toolbar See Points List toolbar docked Model toolbar See Model menu toolbar and dialog boxes 2D Viewer toolbar See 2D Viewer toolbar 3D Viewer toolbar See 3D Controls sub menu and 3D Viewer toolbar 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 3 Contents Help Top lt 4 Back gt Introduction to 3D GeoModeller the geological editor Parent topic 3D GeoModeller Reference Contents Help Top Three dimensional modelling of the geology formations of the earth is an essential step towards effective understanding of complex geological phenomena In order to be relevant such 3D modelling must be based not only on the whole of knowledge and the data available for the study area maps sections terrain models drillholes etc but also on geological interpretation 3D GeoModeller was designed to assemble together into the same 3D space data from various sources 1n order to ensure geometrical coh
296. ogy menu See e Geology menu and dialog boxes user interface reference e Project Explorer Sections shortcut menus user interface reference Structural data operations How to instructions Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 6 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt The stratigraphic pile Parent topic Elements of a 3D GeoModeller project Sections Parent topic Elements of a 3D GeoModeller project Contents Help Top The stratigraphic pile defines the sequential order of geology formations or events This order of events makes it possible to manage the relations between the geology formations in the computation and interrogation of 3D model In a sedimentary terrain it defines the chronology of the stratigraphic sequence The stratigraphic pile is sub divided into series Each series comprises one or more geology formations 3D GeoModeller interpolates geology formations of any given series so that they remain generally parallel You can define the relationship of each series with older series as on lapping or erosional cross cutting This is an important switch which controls the nature of the contact between the formations when interrogating the model and generating model outputs such as model geology on maps and in sections The Reference Top or Bottom of t
297. onal grid of zero values as a reference for the forward model It is defined by number and size of cells in X and Y k Geophysical grid definition X Field definition Grid name zero Grid Grid properties Px 200 Mx 51 Py 200 My 51 af OK Fd close Controls in this dialog box Field definition ranm oae Grid properties Px Py Cell size in metres in each dimension Nx Ny Number of cells in each dimension 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 131 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Physical Properties of Geological Formation dialog box Parent topic A group of tables in which you can assign physical rock properties for each formation Geophysics menu and a Physical properties of geological formation X dialog boxes Density g cm Formation E Basement Normal 2 67 0 100 Normal 67 0 100 Normal 67 0 100 Normal 67 0 100 me Uppercover Normal 2 67 0 100 General parameters Density Reference density glem 2 67 Operations that use this dialog box e Geophysics operations Controls in this dialog box Density distribution law for each formation Susceptibility and remnant magnetisation distribution laws for each formation Thermal Thermal conductivity
298. ontact and orientation data points Beyond the Range a data value has no influence on the model calculation The default value is the length of the diagonal of the bounding box of the project Nugget Effect on Geology Data Balance of model smoothness against honouring the contact data The larger the value the smoother the model and the less 3D GeoModeller honours the contact data Geology Orientation Balance of model smoothness against honouring the Data orientation data The larger the value the smoother the model and the less 3D GeoModeller honours the orientation data Drift Degree Anisotropy The anisotropy definition consists of e A set of 3D axes with defined ranges of influence in each dimension Angles of rotation of the set of axes that defines the anisotropy Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 124 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Control Purpose The default Azimuth of 0 is north the direction of the Y axis A positive Azimuth rotates the Y axis in a clockwise direction around the Z axis in the horizontal plane The angle of downward rotation of the Y axis in the direction of the azimuth of the Y axis Dip is positive down in this direction in 3D GeoModeller not negative as defined in GSLIB see diagrams in Model interpolation parameters The third rotation angle Pitch leaves t
299. op 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top 2D Grids Context Menu 3D GeoModeller Reference 256 4 Back gt e Right clicking on an individual 2D grid in the Explore tree produces the following dialog of choices for the Model_Grid_2D Elevation grid Three extra operations are available for 2D and 3D Grid or Voxets that are not available for the Irregular Vertex Meshes discussed above One of these 1s only available for 2D Grids and is highlighted in red and discussed below The other two options highlighted in magenta are discussed under the 3D Grids Context Menu in the next section i Model_Grid_2D i Hide All Views of this Mesh Grid g Add Current Model Field Create Coordinates T Z Fields Compute New Field cre Multi Crossplot with Group Fields Flow Rate Pressure Plot Delete fe Properties e Add Fields from 2D grid e Selecting this operation produces the following dialog 2D grid fields can be imported into an existing 2D Grid from any of the grid formats listed below Import Fields from 2D Grid Look ine i rn Recent ferme F Meiwork Contents Help Top di Bas Of Basin igmesh_ong Ji bdgub5_rp_dean amp d Old_MeshGrids l BassO4Basin igmesh di Lig cast Casi Joint L Cael Joint LawRandom di Case Jomt_Lawandom J Casl_LawMean I Casi LawRand Ji Casel_TestLa
300. op 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top e Edit a Lithology From To 7 Log Intervals From 0 To 13 6 i Not relaxed From 13 6 207 9 i Not relaxed 3D GeoModeller Reference 28 q Back gt From 13 6 e Tor 205 4 Notrelaxed From 207 9 7 From 7205 1 Le Tor 284 5 Edit the To depth for ORE2 from 207 9 to 205 1 and press the ENTER key to update the ORE2 To depth to 205 1 This change will force an update of the WAST From depth to 205 1 to match the updated To No gap will be created e Editing the Lithology of an existing From To Interval nia z E P Easy Log Intervals e Left Click on the Interval Formation Icon and select a Formation from the dropdown list e Define a Lithology interval as Relaxed or Not Relaxed Default Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd Click on the Not relaxed item at the foot of a Lithology interval and it will change to Relaxed as shown in the example for TOP below This option is not available for the last interval in a drillhole since the end point is not a real contact ie the hole stops within this unit This depth point is always relaxed but is available for use with the Compute Inequality option discussed in the Note below If a lithology interval is relaxed the contact point at this inte
301. op e m m m m m m p e a i ee eee et ee pese eom am ae oe af on oe oe ae an a oe 40 45 a bow 15 24405567 a os 2000 558 ARRE J eo 36 FOU 000 600 Sour S00 400 400 _ F300 Leena OO 500 IT Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top Contents Help Top Histograms of the isotropic kriging result for all 3D GeoModeller Reference 296 q Back gt formations and for the ORE2 formation alone using the drop down formation menu This menu is available when the Lithology field is available in the grid Be Histogram of FeRegl0_Isol n a l tatistics Histogram of FeRegi0_Isoi n aii 15 1 00 a a i nffAectve 095 1100 nthi oso auis Dg 1 000 Pin os yo faeoMean 4883553 O m OT wo Sid Deviston iS 14155 5 oss 7 ey ae Kurtosis 0 S452 a an J Ti ono os ert Remain neice ae a phevress AN i 7 Wanane 225 266708 i ih O88 7 m i rs 646 oo y 2 0 8 on E E d a EL 400 i O30 O25 3 i O20 0 15 a 6 10 me cco _ lo ii 15 20 25 a0 5 20 S 50 55 eo 25 70 ALL FaRegi0_isot I p Histogram of weer NST ba x Stabe hes Histogram of FeRegi0_Isol m Property Value a n Total i072 125 mEffectve 10792 riiki k 400 Huls Ds 3 75 hie 15 244056 350 Max e858 71 Mear E SIA
302. or comparing the model formations with Model menu drillhole data 3D GeoModeller displays special symbols above drillholes whose data taolyar ana do not match the model formations dialog boxes Controls in this dialog box Precision Maximum a anoda ede mea e e distance along the drillhole between the drillhole contact and the model contact TE Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 129 Contents Help Top lt 4 Back gt Geophysics menu and dialog boxes Parent topic 3D GeoModeller main menus Contents Help Top Use the Geophysics menu items to configure and performs geophysical processing in the project space Tog Ta lt Model Geophysics Interpolation Import Export View Window Help Res ST Create Grid with Zero Value Field lt lt p gt ge een 3 on Ba 4k Define Physical Properties DOUET section E4 2D Geophysics _ 3D Geophysics t Forward Wizard m Intrepid Geophysical Worms Fert hiodel Ten Examine Geophysical Grids e Inversion Wizard Summary Voxets fre i Create Movies from See the following table for an overview of the E menu Element Description S Create zero value field See Geophysical Grid Definition dialog box Define physical properties See Physical Properties of Geological Formation dialog box 2D Geophysics Forward modellin
303. orientation data from structural field These functions are obtained by a dual co kriging of equi potential data geological interfaces and their gradients orientations Lajaunie et al 1997 The combination and truncations of these functions in a geological model allows a full description of geological shapes Moreover each geological formation can be assigned to a potential field in order to define its internal geometry given these functions this geometry is represented inside formations as a set of 1so potential values Figure 2 Walking on an isopotential between 2 points A and B along the shortest path we will define a coordinate pair dg 0 where the coordinate dg represents the geodesic distance between A and B along this shortest path and 0 the azimuth of this walk The coordinate normal to these isovalues will define a pot coordinate we call it pot 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 301 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt because it represents the value of the potential field function The dg 0 coordinate is in this case the distance between 2 points along an isovalue of the potential field geodesic distance and is the azimuth of the section Using the azimuth is a way to study the anisotropy in the plane XY using only the dg coordinate and not 0 we use the hypothesis of isotropy in the XY plane T Ni l l l iif ial
304. ostatistics to realize kriging of a variable inside a geological unit or a geological series set of conformable units there are three main possibilities Kriging using 3 coordinates x y z or polar coordinates p 0 y allowing the study of anisotropy in 3D the three directions x y z Kriging using only 2 coordinates polar coordinates p 0 limiting the study of anisotropy to 2D the plane XY Kriging using only 1 coordinate p where the study of anisotropy is not possible 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 300 Contents Help Top Contents Help Top q Back gt D 1 Cartesian and Polar coordinate system used in Classical Kriging To enable kriging to take geology into account we will compute the semi variogram Wp using pairs of points belonging to the same geological unit or geological series In this case 7 p 1s defined by Nip a y p 1 2N p gt 2 p 2 p p jm Where e 2 p represents the value of the variable to estimate at a point p and e 2 p h is the value of the variable of a point at distance h from point p N p is the number of point pairs separated by a distance A Space definition pot dg 0 Calcagno et al 2008 have applied an implicit method based on potential field functions in order to model geological bodies using the location of the geological interfaces and
305. ou want the estimation to honour the sample data This is difficult to do if you have two samples at the same location Also samples too closely spaced for the chosen kriging analysis can cause instability during interpolation This type of calculation takes exactly twice the time of a corresponding varlogram analysis since it must pair every sample up with every other sample both ways Mearest Neighbour Analys P Merge Paranelirs inf Fri null Merge Radus re 5 0 Crignal Grid Mame HM _CondttonedFe Regii S877 12 g Maths ph mr a ax E545 5675 5 Mean 22537361 GeeMeen 10500 Std Deviation 787 23278 Kurtoss 4 532581 Sharvruri ELSES ariano 1975 45 2S AST Sige n TAP 23174 a a 7 a E be 750 1 000 1280 1400 1740 2 000 258 2500 2755 3 000 3250 4 500 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 273 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt The Nearest Neighbour Merge parameters panel is shown below e Merge Radius The Info panel auto updates as the Merge Radius is changed Samples within the merge radius are combined using an inverse distance weighting procedure e The user chooses the name of the new Conditioned field Merge Parameters Info Merge Radius m 5 0 Original 1729 Grid Name NM Conditioned Fe Regi0 Result 1728 Removed 1 The St
306. ourhood search parameters Fixed or variable cell size and the grid extents options are available in the top two panels sane Taran aia nd Defrrton for Krigng Rare E D Fived 7 Variable Cini tion oe a m ai r nv HF re 15 Budd 30 Limit Min 13435 eMac 2193 75 m y Use Puts Min 458 75 Man Bone 75 m ew Pots Zein 750000 Zax 850 00 ew Poets EB Project Zone Neighborhood Definition Masa Panle in Meghbeheded d 5 15 25 35 45 55 65 75 85 95 Minimum Prints in Meighborhead ji 2 iz Masdrure Padia of Heighbarhosd The Neighbourhood options are e Maximum Points in neighbourhood The algorithm does a radial search for points from the centre of the cell to be interpolated It stops searching once the Maximum Points limit is reached e Minimum Points in neighbourhood The minimum number of points in the radial search required to calculate a value for the cell If the minimum is not reached then the cell value is set to Null Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 283 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt e Maximum Radius of Neighbourhood The maximum radial search distance used to scan for points to include in the estimation of a cell value Step 3 Define a name for the new interpolated Field Sheps Interpolated Feki and Standard Deviation Feld Definition L Oie Target Grid
307. ove down EJ Remove from Series Remove from Series BE constrants BE constrants Constraints yf Commit Ed close Controls in this dialog box Name of the series Name of the series Revert to the default name for the series The default the series name is the name of its highest formation with Series appended Relationship Type of relationship for this series Erode or Onlap The default value is Onlap Available Formations Available geology formations to add to the series Add to Series Add the formations selected in the Available ATEEN Formations list to the Formations in Series list Remove from Series Remove the formations selected in the Formations in Series list After you choose this button they appear in the Available Formations list Formations included in the series being created or edited Move up Move down Set stratigraphic order of geology formations in the d Move up Vv Move down series Ce Remove From Series Constraints Select formations outside this series that partly conform to it and use contact or orientation data from them in modelling it See External Constraints dialog box Save the changes you have made 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 94 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt External Constraints dialog box Parent topic You can use data from other formations to help co
308. ow This enables you to obtain the dip direction and the dip of the best fit plane fitted to several data points This is useful for example when you have outcrops of a formation or the boundary limits contacts of this formation on the DTM but do not have any orientation measurements By recording these geology data points and doing this calculation 3D GeoModeller fits the average plane through the selected points You can capture the result dip and dip direction in the form of new geology orientation data at one or all of the points used Controls in this dialog box Geological formations _ formations The geological hesel k ona na eena aa at the surface of which you want to fit the plane to the points data Observation ID Your label for the data 3D GeoModeller provides this space for your notes It does not use the data in calculations Section Section containing the points that you are using Provenance Source of the geology data See Provenance Editor dialog box to see the default settings or to create or edit new categories Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top Contents Help Top Control Orientation of the fitted plane Dip direction Dip Compute Assign orientation value Polarity Automatically update coordinates Update now Create or Edit 3D GeoModeller Reference 100 4 B
309. p VV Move down P Help Save CSV file x Close Controls in this dialog box Reference Reference of the stratigraphic pile Top or Bottom Determines whether the geology observations represent the top or the bottom of defined geological formations Create new geology series Displays New Geology Series dialog box See Create or Edit Geology Series dialog box Edit the selected geology series Displays Create or Edit Geology Series dialog box Delete the selected series Reposition the selected series up the stratigraphic order Move down Reposition the selected series down the stratigraphic order Save CSV file Save the stratigraphic sequence as a csv comma separated variable text file Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 93 Contents Help Top q Back gt Create or Edit Geology Series dialog box Parent topic Geology menu and dialog boxes Contents Help Top Use this dialog box to create and edit a geological series Before creating a series starting you need to have already created the formations that belong to the series See Geology formations and series operations Edit Geology Series a x Properties Name of the series UpperSeries Default Relationship loniap x Contents Available Formations Formations in Series Arow Arow up tb Add to Series V M
310. p orientation data The Y axis Azimuth angle is set to the average dip direction of the dyke outcrops and the Dip angle is set to the average Dip of the dyke The means that the Y range is down dip the X range is along strike and the Z range is perpendicular to the planar body of the dyke You need to set the Y range to a very large number so that the body extends to the base of the project model The reason for this is not well understood Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 228 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt f lt 4 SurfaceTopography X 4 amp 7 LevelPlan 2000 X Anisotropic surface plan Soegararsees Punxv een oe Anisotropic 3D axial view north west You can also apply the above strategy to data on widely separated vertical cross sections where only drill hole intersections are available but geophysics indicates continuity Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 229 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Notes about interpolation anisotropy Parent topic Anisotropy is assumed to be constant over the whole project area for the chosen Model Series You need to take care when setting these parameters as they can have interpolation dramatic results parameters Unexpected geometries ca
311. p 4 Back gt e Colour Lookup table Drop Down List e Note User can copy any ERMapper format LUT file into the 3D GeoModeller lut directory it will automatically be added to the Colour dropdown list on a restart PYOcCale legend LT newgrey phase E Pseudocolor 2 e Display Colour Table e Displays the colour table used to visualise the current mesh or grid as a bar scale with the colour axis labelled in mesh or grid data values The Colour bar can be saved as a png image for inclusion in presentations maps or reports Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 270 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Mesh and Grid Field Statistical Analysis Parent topic 3D The Mesh and Grid Field context menu functions are GeoModeller Reference wah Histogram id G utenberg Richter Plot i Nearest Neighbour Analysis Variogram Analysis Cross Plot with Another Field Ag Multi Crossplot with Multi field Analysts e Histogram The histogram function displays a standard histogram of the mesh or grid field values with an automatically generated bin spacing based on the data range The dialog also displays the mesh or grid field summary statistics Ifthe mesh or grid contains a model lithology field in numer
312. pace Controls in this dialog box Geological formations _ formations Formation or R EE E A on which the point is located and faults Observation ID Your label for the data 3D GeoModeller provides this space for your notes It does not use the data in calculations Section Section containing the geology data points Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 96 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Control Purpose Source of the geology data See Provenance Editor dialog box to see the default settings or to create or edit new categories Provenance Associated orientation data If you don t have specific orientation points available you can associate geology orientation data with the geology data points For information about orientation data symbols and conventions see Orientation data plot symbols Compute Methods of computing the associated orientation data Orthogonal Associated orientation data points are perpendicular to the section plane Dip constant Associated orientation data points have a constant dip that you specify Dip direction is perpendicular to the formation contact that the points are defining Plunge dip and Associated orientation data points have a constant direction plunge and plunge direction that you specify Dip and dip direction Associated orientation data points have a co
313. play options are shown in the snap below The user can choose the Display Colour Table Edit Colours and Clips or display Contours View on Sector Vewon Sectonin 30 CantgursanSechen Cantours on Section 30 G amp gp E e Example 2D DTM on Surface Topo section and draped on the topography in the 3D viewer Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 265 Contents Help Top lt 4 Back gt som EF Ncs EJ wc fg an 0 ts g i00 e 8D Grids Geological model Kriged resource inversion geology or rock properties S30 Pant E D Volume Y WewGidin 3D View Isoorfaces in 3D certo View ewan Seion wew oA Sched in 30 Parana ters Display Color Table Contouring Edit Colours and Cips Examplel 3D Domain kriging pot of Fe on vertex mesh example drill holes above The Kriging domain was confined to the Ore2 formation Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 266 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Example2 3D Geology grid of the model pile user the 3D viewer clipping to show section C23 Domain pot interpolated Fe grades regularised to 10m are shown in section C23 on left Colour table of the Fe grades is above 2D section display on left Aa Me Or Or Ox Ar a ri
314. plorer see Project Explorer Some more recent 3D Viewer functions are summarised below 3D Viewer graphic object selection Contents Help Top Object selection works as follows e Mouse selection Double click on any object in the 3D Viewer to select and make active When an object is selected all other 3D objects become semi transparent to highlight the active object This is shown in the images below The image on the left has the red Granite unit selected The image on the right has no object selected 3D View m m 3D View o When an object is active the context sensitive sub menu will change according to the type of activated object For example in the left and right images above the two context sensitive sub menus will correspond to the left and right menus shown below 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 43 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt E Granite 3D Viewer jh Hide pad Show Interface Data G Wireframe ES Show Orientation Data D Appearance ES Show Apparent Dip Data i Show Drillholes 3 Delete Presentation F Eackground Colour If a drillhole was active then the sub menu would be that of the corresponding drillhole from the Project Explorer tree Similarly if a section 1s selected and so forth 3D Viewer Clipping Plane Tool The 3D viewer also supports clipping planes There are three cli
315. polation Anisotropy Angles The default Azimuth of 0 is north the direction of the Y axis A positive Azimuth rotates the Y axis in a clockwise direction around the Z axis in the horizontal plane Dip is the angle of downward rotation of the y axis in the direction of the azimuth of the Y axis Dip is positive down in this direction in 3D GeoModeller not negative as defined in GSLIB see diagrams below in this section The third rotation angle Pitch leaves the principle direction or vector defined by Azimuth and Dip unchanged The two directions perpendicular to the principle vector are rotated clockwise relative to the principle vector when looking towards the origin The Pitch rotation appears to be anticlockwise since the view is away from the origin see diagrams below in this section 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top First Angle ang1 Y axis Marth Principal Direction Rotated Y axis N30E angle angi 30 horizontal maximum range a_hmax 20 horizontal minimum range a_hmin 10 First Step X axis East zi Rotated X Axis N120E Plan View azimuth correction Second Angle ang2 Z axis Vertical Rotated Z axis 20 degrees toward N30E w angle ang2 20 vertical range a_vert 6 7 second Step Horizontal MS0E Rotated Principal NS0E at 20 degrees down Vertical Cro
316. port to the GeoModeller project s Datum Projection Note GeoModeller requires cartesian coordinates Nav Database Nav DDF The name of the DDF file to save during the import stage Nav Database Nav DDF Output file name for the Intrepid database containing the imported Nav data 9 Set the number of points to use for a section after thinning The number of points required to accurately define the section will depend on the straightness of the incoming seismic line 10 Set Datum Projection of the incoming dataset ie WGS 84 if Geodetic Lat Long Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 147 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt and choose DMS Convert to reproject to the GeoModeller coordinate system during import Make sure the formats for Latitude and Longitude match the ascii data being imported ie ddmmess ss dddmmess ss 11 Click Finish gt 12 The import will proceed while displaying an oscillating progress bar On completion the following dialog will display and the sections will be drawn on the Surface Topo section in the GeoModeller 2D viewer a He batch TASK file which replicates this job has been created for you D Testing Geomodellen CapelFaust empty capel_faust NAV_CF CretRift_Nav ase_seigmic audit task o The saved task file is intended for use in batch mode to automate the import of a large
317. pping planes one on each axis The control dialog for the clipping parameters can be opened via the 8D viewer toolbar icon gt The clipping control parameter dialog shown below allows you to turn on off the clipping planes and move them through the project volume 2000000 0 2000000 0 2005000 0 2010000 0 4 100000 0 105000 0 110000 0 99999 0 mx xz Pr NOTE The 3D volumes produced by GeoModeller are not solid volumes They are in fact surface shells of the geological unit and therefore contain no interior data When clipped a hollow structure will result as shown on the left below A voxet MeshGrid shown on the right below 1s regularly sampled and as such contains interior data It Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 44 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt will be solid when clipped g 3D View e LEFT The 3D mesh products produced via Delaunay or MarchingCubes These are a close approximation to the implicit model but contain no interior data They appear hollow when clipped RIGHT This is a regular sampled voxet grid of the implicit model Although less accurate than the surface shells it does provide interior data and can be clipped as a solid object Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller R
318. pply Ed close Colour eS eS Polygon filling Transparency jo Vertex symbol x Y Appearance Vertex symbol size f Line type Solid Line width fi Material Stone 0 Display mode Shading Gridding No of u isolines No of v isolines f p Help wf OK wf Apply Fd close Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 186 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Controls in this dialog box Control Purpose Appearance Colour Single formation or fault properties only Colour of formation See Colour Palette dialog box Polygon filling Single formation or fault properties only You can select a different fill colour for the formation If you set the main colour for the formation 3D GeoModeller overwrites this setting with the new formation colour Transparency Single formation or fault properties only Transparency of fill in 3D Viewer Display mode Shading or wireframe Material Reflective properties of fill in 3D Viewer Vertex symbol size Contact data Radius of symbol Vertex symbol Contact data Shape of symbol Line width Width of plotted geological model lines Line type Line type solid dotted dashed of plotted geological model lines Orientation symbol Size of orientation data symbols size Orientation symbol Type classic standard map of orientation data s
319. r Unique index number identifying each provenance Create new To create a new provenance enter new provenance name and provenance choose Add Save JPG Save image of provenance table asa jpg file Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 116 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Model menu toolbar and dialog boxes Parenttopic 3D Use the Model toolbar options to calculate the model and specify how you want 3D GeoModeller GeoModeller to display the model main menus File Section Geology Model Geophysics Import Export View Window Help Model j amp Compute Ctrl M CB O E K Potthemodelsettins caro A em 7 fee Plot the model on the current section l gi Plot the model on all sections a iiaiai 5 J Fak Fa Build 3D Formations and Faults ki ai a Ka Erase all model geology m g tajaa p Froject Data Onto Sections Ctrl I m a sale ha El Plot the model along section intersections Ctrl E m a T at Compare Model with Drillhole Observations JANDA aP See the following table for an overview of the Model menu Compute See Compute The Model Interpolate See Comite tie Nne tamale clas ce crRie M and Structural Data dialog box For model interpolation parameters see Model Interpolation Parameters dialog box Plot the model See Plot the Model Settings dialog box CTRL D settings Plot the
320. r and conventions for spatial coordinates The name of the geology formation on whose surface the points lies The properties of the stratigraphic pile determine whether the points are on the top of the formation or the bottom See Create or Edit Geology Series and the Stratigraphic Pile dialog box e Optionally associated geology orientation data For more information about properties see Create or Edit Geology Data dialog box Geology orientation data dip and dip direction A geology orientation data point represents the dip and dip direction of a geology surface at that point It has the following parameters The dip direction and the dip using Hoek s convention the line of maximum slope e The u v coordinates of the point For an explanation of u v see Status bar and conventions for spatial coordinates The polarity normal or reverse See Overturned geology e The geology formation with which this data point is associated For more information about properties see Create or Edit Geology Orientation Data dialog box You need to input geology orientation data one point at a time For more information about properties see Create or Edit Geology Orientation Data dialog box Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 9 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Axial surface data axial traces An axi
321. r each point of the list of geology data East x coordinate e North y coordinate lt integer gt ASSOCIATEDORIENTATIONS Total number of associated geology orientation data in the following list of points These are geology orientation data which are associated with the preceding list of geology data points lt real gt lt real gt lt real gt lt real gt lt integer gt lt string gt For each associated geology orientation data point East x coordinate e North y coordinate Dip direction between 0 and 360 e Dip between 90 and 90 e Polarity normal 1 or reverse 1 Name of the associated geology formation lt integer gt FOLIATIONS Total number of geology orientation data points lt real gt lt real gt lt real gt lt real gt lt integer gt lt string gt For each geology orientation data point East x coordinate e North y coordinate e Dip direction between 0 and 360 e Dip between 90 and 90 e Polarity normal 1 or reverse 1 Name of the associated geology formation Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 233 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Example file To make this example easier to read we truncated the real numbers removing the decimals scans ia nS cn se ns Ra a CU A Cr an S E EE start of file 2 INTERFACES IN
322. r software Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top Contents Help Top 3D GeoModeller Reference 272 4 Back gt e Nearest Neighbour Analysis This tool has two purposes analyse the spatial distribution of samples by examining the distances of each sample from all the others to obtain an average sample separation and view the binned separation distance distribution in a histogram plot remove or average samples within a user chosen distance from each other e Discussion When analysing spatial data one of the most important types of information required is the spacing between samples This helps the user to choose search radii in interpolation routines so as to balance density of sampling against computation time A large search radius will ensure the inclusion of large numbers of samples However if too large a radius is selected the software will spend more time in eliminating the excess samples than in finding the relevant ones The inter sample distance is also useful in determining the grouping intervals lags for variogram calculation If the sampling is extremely irregular it may be difficult to establish an optimum distance interval empirically Another use of nearest neighbour analysis is the identification of duplicate or very closely spaced sampling before kriging Kriging routines assume that y
323. r structural and geology data to compute the 3D geometrical model To create a hinge line e With the Points List input points which define the hinge line on the map or a section view e Choose Hinge line 3 in the Structural toolbar Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 347 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Model operations Parenttopic 3D For reference information about this area see anne e The 3D model e Model menu toolbar and dialog boxes In this section Computing the 3D model e Plotting the model in a section e Building 3D shapes of model geology Tips for faster model plotting Computing the 3D model Parent topic Main menu Model gt Compute Model operations Having created or loaded geology data and geology orientation data faults fold axial data you can compute the 3D geometrical model Plotting the model in a section Parent topic 2D Viewer toolbar Plot the model amp J Model operations Having computed the 3D model you can plot render or draw the model geology on the topographic surface map or any other section In effect this plot is simply the intersection between the mathematical model and the selected map or section Building 3D shapes of model geology Parent topic 3D Main menu Model gt Build 3D formations and faults GeoModeller Operations Having
324. r this data 3D GeoModeller provides this space for your notes It does not use the data in calculations Section Section containing the geology data points Provenance Source of the geology data See Provenance Editor dialog box for the default settings or to create or edit new categories Coordinates X Y u v coordinates of the orientation point in the section This point is at the intersection of the baseline and pointer of the symbol You can enter coordinates automatically from the Points List See Automatically update coordinates below in this table Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top Contents Help Top Control Polarity Automatically re edit Automatically update coordinates Update now 3D GeoModeller Reference 98 4 Back gt Purpose Dip and Dip direction of the orientation point See Orientation data plot symbols for further information You can enter Dip direction automatically from the Points List See Automatically update coordinates below in this table If the geology at the orientation point is overturned select Reverse If the geology is not overturned select Normal see Overturned geology When checked 3D GeoModeller does not empty the Points List when you choose Edit or Create This enables you to continue editing the data See Editing geological data wi
325. r two quadratic tends to parabolic The default is 1 tendency to planar For sedimentary series this 1s generally true at most mapping scales and this parameter is seldom changed Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 210 Contents Help Top Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Anisotropy You can change the default isotropic interpolation behaviour to anisotropic This allows the geometric properties of a formation to be different in all directions which can be useful for controlling the geometry of thin bodies such as dykes or pipe like intrusives It may also reduce the number of observations required to model them Six Anisotropic parameters are available The first three are angles Azimuth Dip and Pitch These allow you to orient the 3 axes of the ellipsoid to fit the geometry of the body being modelled The default values of zero for Azimuth Dip and Pitch define ellipsoid axes parallel to the X Y amp Z coordinate axes of the project Normally X is East Y is North Z is Up Elevation The last three parameters X_Range Y_Range and Z_Range are the interpolation range values in metres in the direction of each ellipsoid axis as defined by the three angles above The range is the distance at which an observation or measurement is no longer spatially correlated with others has no further impact on the inter
326. raw Shapes after building Resolution Render quality ore We hee ie ie ah A Site Medium High Cell dimension Fixed Variable Y 1000 Z 1000 m nY 10 nz 10 Build 30 limits xMin 100000 XMax 110000 m a Use Points YMin 2000000 YMax 2010000 m a Use Points zMin 5000 zZMax 2000 m a Use Points a Project zone M Limit by topography Advanced mesh parameters Warp mesh I to topography Help yf 0K vf Apply Fd close Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 126 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Controls in this dialog box Control Purpose Build 3D Formations or Faults or both so that they are available for display Type Build formations as Volumes a closed volume or Surfaces a series of geology interfaces or surfaces only Faults are always built as surfaces For a quick display of formations only as an assemblage of columns or vertical parallelepipeds select Columns Draw shapes after When checked display shapes in 3D Viewer after building calculating them Resolution Resolution of the sampling grid Higher resolution yields Render quality more detail but requires more time and memory Cell dimension Fixed 3D GeoModeller renders the model in cells of fixed size Variable 3D GeoModeller renders the model in cells whose siz
327. real gt lt real gt The three real values for each line represent respectively the East X coordinate the North Y coordinate and the elevation value Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 231 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt GDM BRGM grid format GDM is in house BRGM software used for drillhole data management The software includes a binary file format for the representation of grid data For detailed information on this format refer to the GDM Reference Manual or contact GDM technical support DXF AutoCAD ASCII vector format The ASCII version of the DXF vector drawing format created by Autodesk for interoperability between AutoCAD and other software can be used as a DEM source for a 3D GeoModeller project The primitives supported include 3D faces and 3D polylines or points The 3D data is extracted from the DXF file and gridded prior to import to 3D GeoModeller File Formats Images Parent topic The 3D GeoModeller Image Manager can load images onto sections in the following File formats image file formats BMP gt GIF gt JPG PNG e TIF only 8 bit and 24 bit not 16 bit For more information about loading images on sections in 3D GeoModeller see e Image Manager dialog box e Edit and Align Image dialog box File Formats Structural data Parent topic The format for storage of structural
328. rface will not be used to compute the model When the Lithology interval is relaxed a new column appears beside the modelled geology column in the right hand panel This is the User Defined Data column and the horizontal black bar indicates that the contact between TOP and ORE2 is relaxed as shown in the example figure below A Relaxed Interface is also added to the User Defined Data section of the Explore Edit Drillhole Log panel see below 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 29 Contents Help Top Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Note Drillhole lithology contact points are added to the geological model data as 3D contact points if the drillhole is selected in the Model gt Compute dialog Any orientation data added to the drillhole is also used in the Compute The last lithology interval To point at the drillhole bottom is also added as a lithology constraint point but 1s only active if the Inequality toggle is selected in the Model gt Compute panel Collar location K 1210 Y 1568 Z 631 28 a Log Intervals From L To 13 6 Hot relaxed To 207 9 i i Nok relaxed i From 207 9 i T 284 5 y tiie User Defined Data Relaxed Interface S Interface At 13 6 is relaxed Relaxed i AT 13 6 Colar location La Xi 1210 1558 b Z 631 28 E o Intervals SA TOP From 0 T 13 6 e Delete
329. rights reserved No part of the contents of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without the written permission of the publisher BRGM and Desmond FitzGerald amp Associates Pty Ltd reserve the right to make improvements in the products described in this manual at any time and without notice BRGM and Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd make no warranties either express or implied with respect to 3D GeoModeller software and associated manuals their merchantability or their fitness for any particular purpose The following are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries e Microsoft e Windows All logos and trademarks in this manual are property of their respective owner The authors of this manual are Philippe Calcagno Gabriel Courrioux Antonio Guillen Phil McInerney David Stephensen The original English translation was by Phil McInerney This manual is copyright 2010 BRGM and Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt
330. rma X Y Fa Direction Dip Polarity i Diorite 104950 0 _ 6504000 0 2000 0 180 0 90 0 ji 2 Diorite 104950 0 6506000 o 2000 g 180 0 90 0 ti i 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd i eh a 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 214 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Interpolation example 1 Ilsotropic Parent topic This example shows the use of isotropic settings Model interpolation 3 Model interpolation parameters parameters Range 000 Nugget effect on Geology data Geology orientation data Drift degree anisotropy C Anisotropic Azimuth The following illustrations show the model in 3D perspective looking north west and views of the front looking north top and right looking west 3D axial view north west CEs Be ee a i f amp B m Front looking north Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 215 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Top looking down Ei ws BS 2 ee ooganbarnlipee Right looking west Interpolation example 2 Anisotropic No Axes Rotation Limited Z range Parent topic This example uses anisotropic settings with default angles of zero and limited Z Model range interpolation parameters Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitz
331. roject components in the tree structured Project Explorer list Project storage 3D GeoModeller stores projects in XML format 3D GeoModeller stores all components in a folder The main file of the project has the same name as the folder and a xml extension Project operations All project operations appear in the File menu and the commonly used ones in the Project toolbar See e Project menu Project toolbar and dialog boxes user interface reference e Project and file operations How to instructions Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 5 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt The topographic surface Parent topic In 3D GeoModeller there are two ways to generate a 3D topographic surface for the lt e ofa project GeoModeller e From a digital terrain model DTM in a variety of available grid formats See project Load Topography from a DTM dialog box e By using a horizontal plane located at a specified height in the project model space See Define Topography as an Horizontal Plane dialog box For the properties of the topographic surface see Topography Properties dialog box To perform topographic surface operations use the Project Explorer or options in the Section menu See e Section menu toolbar and dialog boxes user interface reference e Project Explorer Sections shortcut menus user interfa
332. roperties all formats except semi gdm and dxf 3D GeoModeller GeoModeller compares these properties with those of the 3D GeoModeller project imports the DTM If the DTM datum and projection does not match the one defined in the 3D GeoModeller project 3D GeoModeller displays the Reproject DEM dialog box asking if you want to reproject the DTM DEM is an alternative term for DTM digital elevation model Reproject DEM X h DEM Datum Projection is eo DATUM WGs584 PROJECTION GEODETIC Geomodeller Datum Projection is DATUM M poraloko PROJECTION UTM zone 32N Do you want to reproject your DEM 3D GeoModeller supports SRTM DTMs in the WGS84 GEODETIC Latitude Longitude datum and projection in the reprojection process It supports most datums for Transverse Mercator UTM projections although there may be a lack of support for less common datum and projection pairs If you require a particular datum and projection please contact our support service If you choose Yes 3D GeoModeller reprojects the DTM into the project s datum and projection If the required transform parameters are not available 3D GeoModeller displays an error message To override the datum and projection mismatch choose OK 3D GeoModeller attempts to load the DTM without reprojection If you choose No 3D GeoModeller returns to the Load topography from a DTM dialog box see Load Topography from a DTM dialog box Use Browse or type the path of
333. ross sections created have the full vertical extent of the GeoModeller project Import Drillhole Import Export View Window p 7D GIS Data to Section 939 3 Files Collars Surveys Geology 2D Geology to Section faa BROM ASCI Format 3D Geology H Ma BRGM GDM Format 2D Section Create 359 Assay Data into Existing Drillholes Drillhole GeoSciML Borehole Grid and Mesh d Seismic d For all details see Importing drillholes and drillhole geophysical logs and assays Import Grid and Mesh Contents Help Top Import Export View Window p gt 2D GIS Data to Section eS 2D 3D Observations 2D Geology to Section 4 2D Grid 3D Geology k 2D Section Create al as aaa Drillhole gt un 3D Grid Voxels Grid and Mesh Seismic This option allows the user to import 2D and 3D Observations 2D Grids 2D and 3D Triangulations and 3D Grids Voxets as shown in the following table SubMenu Option 2D 3D Observations Import surface airborne geochemical geophysical data in CSV format using the CSV data import wizard For information about the wizard see CSV data import wizard 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 141 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Import geophysics geochemistry elevations isopachs 2D grids available supported formats Triangulations Import 2D surface triangulations or 8D triangulations of volu
334. rpose Section o Section to which you want to apply the current settings Plotting resolution 3D GeoModeller applies a mesh grid to the section to determine the level of plot detail You can specify the number of nodes cells in each dimension of the section 3D GeoModeller assigns a different value from the model to each node or cell and then smoothly fills the gaps between them If you specify a finer mesh larger number of nodes you will get a more detailed result but it will take longer to draw it If you specify plotting limits 3D GeoModeller divides the areas within the plotting limits according to the mesh that you specify Hence if you specify 50 by 50 nodes cells 3D GeoModeller divides the area defined by the plot limits into 50 by 50 nodes cells Show More or Hide Less the Plotting limits panel Plotting limits Limits of the model plotting space in the section Specify the extents uMin uMax vMin yMax vMin You can Enter them manually e Enter dimension extents from the Points List e Specify the Plotting limits as the section extent Uses the appropriate coordinate value u or v of the last most recent two points in the Points List as the Min and Max Reset Sets the Plotting Limits to the section extent Limit by topography When checked 3D GeoModeller does not plot any model data above the topography in a section Plot model geology When checked 3D GeoModeller plots the selected
335. s Help Top 4 Back gt CSV data import wizard Map import fields to project fields Parent topic Use this page to map the fields in the import data to the fields and object types in CSV data your 3D GeoModeller project import wizard x 3P CSV Data Import xj Steps Map CSV colums to data structure Step 3 of 4 Steps Map CSV colums to data structure Step 3 of 4 1 Select data type to import 1 Select data type to import 2 Parse CSV fil 2 Parse CSV file 3 Map CSV colums to data structure 4 Map geologic objects in project data 166477 166416 166730 123 895 Purnamal Fault 507161 166639 129 6 Purnamal Fault 166544 131 14 Purnama Fault 166943 153 589 Purnamal Fault ile 3 Map CSV colums to data structure 166730 123 895 Purnama Fault 166639 129 6 Purnamal Fault 166544 131 14 Purnama Fault 166943 153 589 Purnama Fault 166879 141 744 Purnama Fault 167341 Import all Import selected only Import all Import selected only lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel Controls in this wizard page Data table Table of fields and records that 3D GeoModeller has obtained from the import data file based on your parsing specifications see CSV data import wizard Parse import file Column width alae size Auto Reset controls See Column width
336. s e 8D geological and geophysical property voxets 3D geological model outputs from GeoModeller s Cokriging interpolator e 2D surface meshes triangulations e 8D meshes triangulations and 3D voxets of geology potential and gradient 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 238 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Mesh Grid Concepts and Types Parent topic 2D The mesh types managed in Geomodeller and 3D Meshes and Grids In 3D Vertices 2D 3D GeoModeller Triangles 2D 3D Tetrahedrons 8D Vertices 2D 3D A Mesh of vertices in 2D or 3D is a mesh of points 2D x y and 3D x y z This type of mesh is used to store and manipulate observations measured points There is no link between the points Triangles A Mesh of triangles in 2D and 8D is a mesh built using triangles sharing the vertices This type of mesh is used to represent the boundary of a unit in 8D for visualisation purposes Tetrahedrons Meshes of tetrahedrons 8D only are meshes to describe the lithology units as solid objects We will add properties values to some elements of this mesh vertices tetrahedrons using interpolation techniques inverse distance kriging Grid primitives managed in Geomodeller e Quadrangles 2D e Hexahedrons 3D Quadrangles 2D These grids are used to represent 2D fields or intersections of a 3D grid with a 2D surface
337. s those used in the isotropic kriging interpolation E Validate kriging 1 0 It 5 0 70 Di0 A scattergram of the original observations plotted against the isotropic kriging interpolation results is generated The scattergram points are colour coded by formation and the result illustrates the poor fit resulting from the kriging of all the values using the variogram generated from the ORE2 formation only Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 298 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Bg Linear Regression q ca co uo g lation_Fe_Fegi th cL 2 TI z 7 pi m S k i Fe Regil SUB ORE WAST ORE2 TOP Fe Reg10 1 72391 69922083973 CrossValldatedinterpolmion_Fe_Regi0 40 515178995495524 Domain Kriging Parent topic Mesh and Grid Field Interpolation Contents Help Top The following section provides a theoretical overview of the two Domain kriging algorithms available in GeoModeller This section is followed by an example and a description of the variogram modelling and kriging dialogs used in these operations Abstract Estimation of a variable related to a geological unit can be done using geostatistical methods To solve the problem we need to define a geological distance since each geologi
338. s with faults Structural data operations With this function you can specify that one fault stops on another Using the table you can define a network of faults Creating axial series Parent topic Main menu Geology gt Axial series gt Create or Edit Structural data operations To create a new axial series 1 Input the name of the series 2 Choose the colour by clicking on the coloured zone The RGB tab on the colour palette allows you to set a specific colour by choosing numerical RGB values 3 Confirm by choosing Add Creating axial surfaces Parent topic Main menu Geology gt Axial surfaces gt Create or Edit Structural data operations To create a new axial surface Input the name of axial surface e Choose the colour by clicking on the coloured zone The RGB tab on the colour palette allows you to set a specific colour by choosing numerical RGB values e Choose the type of fold Anticline or Syncline e Select the associated axial series If this axial surface cannot be associated with any of the existing axial series you can create a new one by choosing New axial series e Choose Add Creating axial surface data axial traces Parent topic Structural toolbar Create axial surface data Axial traces Structural data operations When you know from outcrop the trace of a fold axis you can input this on a map or a section view This information will be used together with other structural and geology d
339. shows the difference between kriging that takes into account geometry on the left a c and classical kriging using only the Euclidian distance on the right b d Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 310 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt As the original data where generated takes into account the geological structure the next figure shows the difference in the variance of estimation The variance is much smaller when geometry is taken into account a than when using classical kriging b References BERTONCELLO A CAERS J K BIVER P CAUMON G 2008 Geostatistics on stratigraphic grids in Ortiz J et Emery X Proc 8th Geostatistics Congress 2 677 686 BOLTCHEVA D YVINEC M BOISSONNAT J D 2009 Feature preserving Delaunay mesh generation from 3D multi material images Computer Graphics Forum 28 1455 14645 Note Special issue for KLUROGRAPHICS Symposium on Geometry Processing BOISSONNAT J D COHEN STEINER D VEGTER G 2008 Isotopic implicit surface meshing Discrete and Computational Geometry 39 138 157 CALCAGNO P CHILES J P COURRIOUX G GUILLEN A 2008 Geological modelling from field data and geological knowledge Part I Modelling method coupling 3D potential field interpolation and geological rules Physics of the Earth and Planetary Interiors Volume 171 Issues 1 4 December
340. sion OF Clipped to project extents Yes Segments imported 5 of 46 Segments clipped 41 Controls in the GIS and other binary located data area GIS and other binary Show or hide the GIS and other binary located located data data controls File Browse Path and filename of selected GIS or other binary located import file Choose Browse to select a file Display attribute data for the current segment line or polygon of the loaded file Segment navigation Select a segment of the file to examine 3D GeoModeller loads one segment at a time into the Points List and displays it in the Points Table and the 2D Viewer 3D GeoModeller shows the selected segment and the number of segments available To select a different segment enter a segment number and press ENTER Go back 10 segments Go to the previous segment Go to the next following segment Go forward 10 segments Threshold Filtering Control the density of the data available in the Points List Select None to include all data As you slide the control towards High 3D GeoModeller samples fewer data points for inclusion in the Points List Points table Parent topic The points table in the Points List Editor provides information about the contents Points List and state of the Points List and enables you to edit the data Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Ref
341. size window Reset view Reset viewer window to include full E extent of its contents Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 174 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt 3D Viewer Keyboard Shortcuts and Mouse Operations Table 1 Keyboard Shortcuts ey ton essiton pr Resetview Reset view Zoom to full extents graphic item under cursor Hover cursor over graphic item and hit keyboard x Set Focal point Focal point is active in Joystick mode only Table 2 Mouse Operations Mouse Event Button Trackball Rotates model in the drag direction Trackball Middle Pans model in the drag direction Joystick Left Drag Rotates camera around Focal point in direc tion of cursor movement at a speed relative to the distance from Focal point projected onto viewport Joystick Middle Drag Pans model in the direction of cursor move ment at a speed relative to the distance from Focal point projected onto viewport Either Double Selects the first object found under the cur Click sor All other objects are set partially trans parent If no object is found under the cursor location the background is selected Dese lect object by repeating action outside the 3D Viewer frame Either Click Popup context sensitive sub menu depend ing on the object currently selected or whether no object is selected Contents
342. smond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 50 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt 2D Viewer Geology orientation data shortcut menu Parent topic 2D The geology orientation data shortcut menu appears when you right click a geology Viewer shortcut orientation data point that is visible in the 2D Viewer It enables you to edit and cata configure data point Granite Dip 75 towards 327 S Delete TEY attributes Pi Dy Appearance Options in this menu Option Description S Edit See Create or Edit Geology Orientation Data dialog box Delete the object or data Edit the attributes of the associated formation See Create or Edit Geology Formations dialog box Appearance Edit the appearance of the associated formation See Appearance of objects dialog box family 2D Viewer Axial surface shortcut menu Parent topic 2D The axial surface data shortcut menu appears when you right click a set of axial Viewer shortcut surface data that is visible in the 2D Viewer It enables you to edit and configure the menus set of data mrfi l f Delete er Attributes Pi D Appearance Options in this menu Option Description See Create or Edit Axial Surface Data an Axial Trace on a Map dialog box Delete the object or data Attributes See Axial Surface Attributes dialog box See Appearance of objects dialog box family Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM
343. solute value of the difference between pot A and pot B Variogram pot dg 0 It is necessary to recall some features that can be expected using a multi coordinate varlogram Geometric anisotropy range changes with direction while sill remains constant e Zonal anisotropy sill changes with direction while range remains constant To deal with changes of range and sill with direction we need to identify the anisotropy axes using varlogram surface maps or knowledge of the phenomenon Here the distances dg and pot are two different distances and they are not comparable so one solution is to normalize them by the range In many cases if we ignore 0 then pot dg will present a combination of geometrical and zonal anisotropy y pot dg ce ig C2 Mod pot r wor dg E CP C _C Mod pot not AE CF 0 CP C Mod pot dg r3 y pot dg CR Coe CP Mod pot r CP C CH Mod por not AE Ty 2 L E CF C CR C Mod 0 dg r Where Mod x y Mod 4x y Mod h CoP is the nugget effect C is the sill value pot is the distance along the coordinate potential and rp is the range of the model Mod for the component pot e Co dg is the nugget effect and C28 is the sill value dg is the distance along the coordinate potential and rg is the range of the model Mod for the component dg Here is an example of such a variogram
344. ss e Back transform the simulated values reverse the anamorphosis transformation We use arandom path Equation 1 to avoid artifacts induced by walking through the grid in a regular fashion We include previously simulated grid nodes as data in order to preserve the proper covariance structure between the simulated values SR 1 R mod 5R _ 1 2 SR 1 im SL Lom 1 Where R is a random indicator for node i m is a large number which makes 2 greater than the number of network s nodes Gomez Hernandez and Srivastava Brately 1988 Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 323 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Calculate histogram Transform data into Gausslan space Enge a value at each node of data Calculate zi model ranlogram of Gaussian data Choose a Saree path Define Gaussian Sunulation Cross validation of Results Simulate other nodes sequentially Back transform of simulated value Fig 1 The basic steps in SGS algorithm Deustch C V Journel 1992 Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 324 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt e Gaussian Simulation e Step 1 Histogram and Statistical Analysis of t
345. ss Section Along N30E dip correction Third Angle ang3 Rotated 2 axis 20 degrees towards M30E angle ang3 10 Mew Rotated Z axis 20 degrees towards N30E Third Ste 10 degrees towards MEGVA New Rotated X axis P wn wN N120E at 10 degrees up i neg ben Rotated X axis N120E Section Looking N3O0E at 20 degrees down plunge correction 3D GeoModeller Reference 211 q Back gt GSLib convention for axis rotations Source Deutsch and Journel p 28 Note that the third step has been corrected Diagram is from Angle Rotations in GSLIB by Chad Neufeld and Clayton V Deutsch Centre for Computational Geostatistics Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering University of Alberta Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 212 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Anisotropy Angles example Consider the deposit shown in the diagram below We want to align the X Y and Z axis to be along strike down dip and perpendicular to the structure respectively This allows us to better characterise the anisotropy of the deposit The azimuth correction is the first rotation Setting ang1 25 aligns the Y axis with the dip and the X axis with the strike The dip correction is the second rotation Setting ang2 40 aligns the Y axis down dip and the Z axis perpendicular to the dip The plun
346. surface such as the top of a formation or a specific fault To create geology data points Using the Points List mark one or more points to define the position of a given geology feature on the map view or in a section In the 2D Viewer toolbar choose Create geology data y Creating geology orientation data Parent topic Structural toolbar Create geology orientation data y Structural data operations You can input or edit geology orientation data on a map view or in a section This information will be used together with other structural and geology data to compute the 3D geometrical model Geology orientation data are input individually one point at a time To create geology orientation structural data dips and dip directions as orientation data points e Using the Points List mark either one point a position only or two points defining position and dip direction on the map view or in a section Inthe 2D Viewer toolbar choose Create geology orientation data Fitting a plane to Points create orientation data Parent topic Structural toolbar Fit a plane to points Structural data a operations This button computes the dip and the dip direction of a plane fitted through several points This is useful when you have outcrops of a formation or the limits of this formation on the DTM but have no dip and dip direction measurements For this computation 3D GeoModeller fits a plane repr
347. t 2D Viewer toolbar Parent topic 2D Tht a Viewer l Ow N The 2D Viewer toolbar provides convenient access to many operations that you N carry out in the 2D Viewer S Element Icon Select objects Create Add points to the Points list by clicking their positions in the 2D Viewer See Points List Pan and zoom See Pan and zoom controls Vertical see Vertical exaggeration submenu and Exaggeration toolbar a lt Ba A i iQ 7 H FA i F Fi Move objects Select and move objects See Objects in the 2D Viewer After selecting the objects drag them to the required location Move individual points Select this tool and drag the individual points one at a time to the place you require Move points i lt i Delete objects Select and delete objects See Objects in the 2D Viewer 3D GeoModeller lists the objects to be deleted Confirm the operation Delete individual points Select this tool and click the point you want to delete Confirm the operation Delete points Add points Add points within not at the ends of an object that has several points Select the tool and then click the position in or near the object to add the point Split an object into two Select this tool and then click the object between the points where you want to split it Tape measure See Tape Measure Split apart Contents Help Top 2013 BRG
348. t Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 279 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Mesh and Grid Field Interpolation Parent topic 3D GeoModeller Reference In this section Introduction to mesh and grid field interpolation Inverse Distance Interpolation e Variogram Analysis Kriging e Domain Kriging Introduction to mesh and grid field interpolation Parent topic Mesh and Grid Field Interpolation Contents Help Top Interpolation by Inverse Distance Kriging or Simulation Based on the Meshes and Grids infrastructure 3D GeoModeller provides a set of functions to interpolate estimate and simulate variables in 2D or 3D space the user can choose whether or not to constrain the kriging interpolators using the extents and properties of the geological model The interpolation functions take their input from a vertex mesh This kind of mesh handles scattered datapoints with different values of measurements fields This mesh can be a 2D or a 3D mesh The interpolation output is stored in a regular 2D or 3D grid Concepts Kriging results will be a 2D 3D grid with 2 fields the interpolated measurements and the variance of the estimation Inverse Distance output is just one field the interpolated variable Prior to Kriging the user must do a variogram analysis of the selected field in 2D or 3D Then use the resultin
349. t GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 367 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Importing a single BRGM ASCII file Parent topic See File Formats Drillholes for details Importing drillholes and drillhole geophysical logs and assays Importing a binary GDM data record BRGM software format Parent topic You can import drillholes from a GDM project database A drillhole is represented in Importing 3D GeoModeller as a section which consists of a succession of segments each one ea ane corresponding to an interval of geology intersected in the drillhole ibe The geology formations intersected in the drillhole must be identified by a code ose ane assays indicating the base name of the drillhole When loading the drillhole 3D GeoModeller adds the data to the list of the known geology data for the project If the names of geology formations for the drillhole data are not identical to those already defined in the project but the formations are the same use the Merge function available in the Create or Edit geology data dialog box see Create or Edit Geology Data dialog box To load a drillhole Choose Open and specify the GDM project database containing the drillhole to load Select the name of the drillhole in the list Select the field containing the geological formations field code in the GDM database Input a name for the section into which the drillhole will be loaded Input a direction for t
350. t The SurfaceTopography Section in 3D GeoModeller is the section on which you either import or digitise all surface geological mapping data The plot of the modelled geology on the SurfaceTopography section is essentially the geological map for the project If you have a digital terrain model DTM you can import it to 3D GeoModeller For details about DTM import see How 3D GeoModeller imports the DTM C Load topogra phy from a DTI X Name SurfaceTopography Filename Browse Projection N GD49 New Zealand Map Grid Unit jm Project bounding box Min 1630000 XMax 1750000 m YMin 6210000 YMax 6350000 m ZMin 10000 ZMax 1000 m Grid bounding box Min 1630000 XMax 1750000 m YMin 6210000 YMax 6350000 m X cell size D Y cell size 0 m No of points on X 0 Noof points on Y 0 Subsampling Rate 0 Output Description ___ Topography of the model P Help wf OK Fd close Supported DTM file formats E R Mapper Format ERS GeoSoft Grid Format grd geotifF 16 bit only tiF DMF dxF Simple ASCII Grid Format semi BRGM Grid Format gdm ASCII Arc Grid Format grd Geotiff Format tiF All Supported Formats ERS ord tif dxF semi gdm Open Cancel e ERMapper and INTREPID grid datasets ers e Geosoft grids grd e GeoTIFF 16 bit grids tif Simple ASCII grid format semi BRG
351. t Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 219 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Interpolation example 4 Anisotropic no Axes Rotation Large X Range Parent topic This example has default angles of zero a greatly expanded the X range and a limited Model Z range interpolation parameters Nugget effect on Geology data Drift degree 1 anisotropy tt W Anisotropic Azimuth 0 Dip 0 Pitch ol X range 30000 Y range 4000 m z range 1000 The following illustrations show the model in 3D perspective looking north west and views of the front looking north top and right looking west EIEE E Ea se nae 3D axial view north west ACE ENEE sera Front looking north Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 220 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt egarsesautseBOnv penn Top looking down a ae Ov eer a Right looking west Interpolation example 5 Anisotropic No Axes Rotation Large X amp Z Range Parent topic This example has default angles of zero and a greatly expanded the X range and Z Model range interpolation parameters Range 4000 m Nugget effect on Geology data Geology orientation data r t dere
352. t items from a list Plot the model on selected section in 2D Viewer and then close the dialog box Apply Plot the model on selected section in 2D Viewer Apply to all Plot the model on all sections in 2D Viewer Close Close the dialog box without plotting the model but retain the settings for use with Plot the model ona section and Plot the model on all sections amp Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 123 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Model Interpolation Parameters dialog box Parent topic Use this dialog box to control how 3D GeoModeller interpolates data associated with Model menu a series when calculating the model toolbar and dialog boxes For a detailed explanation and examples see Model interpolation parameters To display this dialog box in the Compute The Model tInterpolate Geology and Structural Data dialog box select the series required and choose Parameters See Compute The Model Interpolate Geology and Structural Data dialog box q Model interpolation parameters Range Nugget effect on Geology data 0 000001 Geology orientation data oot Drift degree fi anisotropy Anisotropic Azimuth D Dip Pitch x range 17000 m Y range Z range 17000 m P Help af OK Fd close Controls in this dialog box Range Zone of influence for c
353. t from a different folder In some circumstances the last project that you worked on may not be the one that you want to recover For example you may have recently saved the project to a new name using Save As To restore an Autosave for the project from another folder 1 Choose File gt Autosave gt Recover Saved Project 2 Use Browse to navigate to the project directory you require 3 Select the automatic save you require and choose OK 2 Automatic Saves E Testing Geomodeller w2 List of automatic saves PC le TSB tune 20087 SSS 2 SS dune 200817 50 15 BSB dune 20081734515 EE 5 SB tune 200817 38 14 6S dune 200817 30 14 7 Sune 2008 20 18 21 Bt dune 2009 20 13 21 2 1 Sune 2008 20 08 20 10 Sune 2008 20 03 20 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 340 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Topography and section operations Parenttopic 3D For reference information about this area see GeoModeller f Operations The topographic surface e Sections e Section menu toolbar and dialog boxes In this section e Defining the topographic surface e Creating a section e Using the Tape Measure Defining the topographic surface Parent topic e Main Menu Section gt Topography gt Load from a DTM using an ASCII file See Topography File Formats Digital terrain model and section i i i operations e Main Menu Se
354. t or detrending functions above for example 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 378 Contents Help Top Contents Help Top 4 Back gt If the polynomial drift functions include the first coefficient f 1 x x first coordinate fL x 1D x due to the presence of a linear trend of the potential field and we have good reasons to suspect not only a discontinuity but also a change of slope of the drift when crossing the fault it is advisable to also introduce an additional drift function such as A finite fault can be modeled with a drift function with a bounded support and whose fL 2 x xID x value vanishes on the support boundaries inside that support the function takes on positive values on one side of the fault plane with a maximum at the centre of the fault and negative values on the other side The fault plane is unlikely to be a planar surface It 1s often only known by some points on its surface and unit vectors orthogonal to it Its geometry can thus be modeled by a potential field too Currently faults are not honored in inversion 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 379 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Copyright and acknowledgments Parent topic 3D GeoModeller Reference Contents Help Top All
355. tal number of grid cells after subsampling that 3D GeoModeller uses to generate the surface topography section Your note about the source of the DTM data 3D GeoModeller provides this space for your notes It does not use the data in calculations 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 80 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Define Topography as an Horizontal Plane dialog box Parent topic If you don t currently have topographic data you can simply define the topography as Section menu _ _gq horizontal plane toolbar and dialog boxes Zz Define topography as an horizontal plane xX Name SurfaceTopography Projection Local Unit m Plane elevation 7 D Project bounding box AAA Min 0 xMax 1000 m YMin 0 YMax 1000 m Min 1000 2Max 0 m Description Topography of the model 2 re Jo Egoe Controls in this dialog box Name of the surface topography section The default is SurfaceTopography but you can use any name You cannot use spaces 1n section names Projection Projection of the project coordinate system 3D GeoModeller dispays this for your information You cannot edit it here Distance unit of the project coordinate system 3D GeoModeller dispays this for your information You cannot edit it here Plane Z level altitude or RL of the plane t
356. td q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 173 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Vertical exaggeration submenu and toolbar Parent topic Use items from this submenu to control the vertical exaggeration displayed in the 2D View menu Viewer or 3D Viewer cascades shortcut menus apolar hel Increase Vertical Exaggeration by 1 nah py Reset Vertical Exaggeration ai Pal Set Vertical Exaggeration RA Se the following table for an overview of the Vertical Exaggeration menu and tools Elements pumos fem Increase vertical Increase the vertical exaggeration factor by 1 exaggeration by 1 See Vertical exaggeration Set vertical See Vertical Exaggeration dialog box exaggeration Reset vertical Reset the vertical exaggeration factor to 1 See exaggeration Vertical exaggeration Pan and zoom controls Parent topic Use the 3D pan and zoom controls in the menu and toolbar to pan zoom and rotate View menu the display in the 3D Viewer cascades shortcut menus and toolbars Pan Middle Recentre Display via Mouse click oom Fit Section to Window SE E Reset View ES See the following table for an overview of the 3D Controls submenu and shortcut menu e e a Drag in the required direction using MIDDLE left mouse button MOUSE Recentre Not available in 2D Viewer LEFT CLICK display via mouse click Zoom fit Not available in 2D Viewer Fit map selection to or section to current window
357. te considerably and also speeds up matrix Inversion Minimum Points in neighbourhood The minimum number of points in the radial search required to calculate a value for the cell If the minimum is not reached then the cell value is set to Null Maximum Radius of Neighbourhood The maximum radial search distance used to scan for points to include in the estimation of a cell value Anisotropic Ratio This parameter is not currently relevant to this procedure and should be left as the default of 1 Click Next gt to continue to next Step Step 3 in Simulation Dialog Steps Define New Simulated Grid Grid DeGritien for kriging Fixed C Variable Sine 30 m mx 69 nv Build 3D Limits Ain 131 40 Aiax 2153 80 Yin 355 50 Yeiax 3018 80 iin 250 00 fTdax 650 00 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 329 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Step 7 Define Domain Unit within which the Simulation will be computed and the variogram model that will be used EZ Conditional sequential gaussian simulation in domains Define Unit Where Simulation Belongs DrilholesFields Gauss Anam FeRegil_OREZ Potii DrilfholesFields_Gaussinam_feRiegil_ORE2 Pott DrlfholesFiedds GaussAnam FeRegit ORE Pot1i DrltholesFiells GaussAnam_Feftegl0_ORE2 Potll DrillholesFiekds_GaussAnam_FeRog b0_OREZ Poth e Step 8 Define the Si
358. te or Edit geology formations dialog box you can create edit or delete Geology menu geology formations and dialog boxes Tip If you are editing a formation before opening this dialog box select the formation that you want to edit Create Edit geology formations X Geology Formations Attributes Blue Appearance E UpperPink Delete EE UpperGrey EE LowerGrey Plum E LowerPink Create a new geology Formation Name Add ou as Fd close p Help Operations that use this dialog box e Creating geology formations e Editing geology formations e Deleting geology formations Controls in this dialog box Geology formations Formations in the project Select click a formation for editing or deleting Edit the attributes of the selected formation Displays the Project Properties dialog box Appearance Edit the attributes of the selected formation Displays the Appearance of objects dialog box family Delete the selected formation Create a new geology formation Colour Click in this field to select colour for the new formation Uses the Colour Palette dialog box Add the new formation Choose this after you have named it and selected a colour Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 90 Contents Help Top lt 4 Back gt Edit Geological Formation Attri
359. th the Points List for more information When checked 3D GeoModeller automatically e Updates X and Y with the coordinates of the most recent point in the Points List Updates Dip direction with a direction that it calculates using the most recent two points in the Points List When not checked e 3D GeoModeller does not automatically update X Y and Dip direction from the Points List When you choose Update now 3D GeoModeller updates X Y and Dip direction from the Points List as described above 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 99 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Fit a Plane to Points Create Orientation Data dialog box Parent topic If you are certain that a formation contact is planar and know four contact points ae then 3D GeoModeller can calculate orientation data Enter the points into the and dialog hores Points List and use the Fit a Plane to Points Create Orientation Data dialog box 3 Fit a plane to Points create orientation d ata x Geological Formations Z Granite Observation ID Section Section2 7 Provenance Unspecified ka Orientation of the fitted plane Dip di D Dip 30 Compute Assign orientation value f to all points in Points List f to one paint x o Y o Polarity f Normal f Reverse Overturn W Automatically update coordinates E Update n
360. the Import section of the manual e 2D 3D Observations Files of type Al Acceptable Files xyz csv vtu vip DIR Comma separated Values CSV with Metadata xyz Comma separated Values CSV csv VW1KUnstructuredGrid File Format vtu VTK PolyData File Format vtp Intrepid Dataset DIR All Acceptable Files xyz csv vtu vtp DIR e 2D Grid Files of type A Acceptable Files ers gasc grd gxf semi mm JER Mapper Grid ers ASCII ESRI Grid gasc Geosoft Grid grd Geosoft GXF Grid qxf Semi Grid semi All Acceptable Files ers gasc grd gxf semi Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 246 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt e 3D Grid Voxels Files of type Gocad Voxet vo Gocad Voxet vo VTK regular grid vti VTK rectilinear grid semi regular or regular vir UEC Voxet mesh Semi Grid semi Binvox Voxelizer binvox sgrid sq All Acceptable Files vo vti vtr mesh semi binvox sq e Triangulations Gocad TSurf ts VTK PolyData File Format vtp VWTKUnstructuredGrid File Format vtu Vulcan 00t All Acceptable Files brep dxf ts vtp vtu 00t e Delete e Deletes all mesh grids from the 3D GeoModeller project Contents Help Top
361. this number For example if you set it to 100 and create new points 3D GeoModeller creates points with coordinates that are multiples of 100 When you are selecting points in the 2D Viewer Radius in pixels within which you can select a nearby point using the mouse If this is a small number you can only select a point when the mouse pointer is close to it If there are several nearby points 3D GeoModeller selects the one nearest to the mouse pointer 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 191 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Points List Visualisation dialog box Parent topic The Points List Visualisation dialog box enables you to specify how points appear in View menuand viewers when you create them in the points list dialog boxes 2D Display Element Size Thickness pixels Points Straight Lines ol Spline Line Spline Degree Spline Degree 1 3D Display JV Show in 3D Viewer Help S OK S Apply Ed close Controls in this dialog box 2D display Colour of current point in the Point List and colour and thickness of straight line from previous point to current point in the sequence of entry To hide the current point and previous line segment set the slider to Off Lines joining each pair of points remain unchanged Straight lines Colour and thickness of lines joining each pair of points in
362. ting Grid and select from the list of existing grids with the desired characteristics 1e cell voxet size and extents The Kriging result will be written to the existing grid in a new field e Click Next gt to continue Define Target Grid T New Grid Grid Hame FeRegl0_UVTIL Add to an Exeting Grid crid Fetteg 10Pat Step 2 Grid Definition Define the output grid resolution and extents and neighbourhood search parameters e Grid Definition for Kriging Define output grid fixed or variable cell sizes or the number of grid cells in the X Y amp Z directions in the top panel e Build 3D Limits Interpolate a subset of the 3D GeoModeller project by entering new X Y Z min max limits or accept the default of the full project area The project extents can be reset by clicking on the Project Zone button e Use Points You can use points digitised on a section in the 2D Viewer or captured in the Points list editor to set the X Y Z min max limits by clicking on the Use Points buttons D Fixed O Variable Sint z m mila Y ao ny 5 i5 25 35 45 55 65 75 85 95 p 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 318 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt e Neighbourhood Definition options are e Maximum Points in neighbourhood The algorithm does a radial search for points from the centre of the cell to be interpolated It stops searching o
363. tion Computing a 2 5D forward model Defining physical properties for a formation Parent topic Before performing geophysics operations you need to define geophysical properties of Geophysics the formations involved operations gt gt To define geophysical properties 1 From the main menu choose Geophysics gt Define physical properties See Geophysics menu and dialog boxes The Physical properties of geological formation dialog box appears See Physical Properties of Geological Formation dialog box Select the tab you require Gravity Magnetic Thermal or Seismic Double click the cell of the table corresponding to the formation and property you want to configure The dialog box for the property appears 3P Susceptibility x Susceptibility Law Definition Definition of the mode component Parameters Mean 0 SI v Modes Standard deviation 0 Mono modal Bi modal Trimodal Statistical law Normal Log normal Equal Poisson Equal Plus Equal Minus Percentage of Population 100 Description Unit SI Law simulation Normal 0 0 100 2 Help yf OK X Cancel 4 Set the Statistical law Mode Parameters and Percentage of population parameters as required For example Statistical law Log normal Mean 05 Standard deviation 05 5 Repeat steps 3 4 for other tabs as required 6 Choose OK Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty
364. tion Horizon2 The elevation of the seismic pick for numeric horizon1 relative to project DTM elevation at that x y location Horizon The elevation of the seismic pick for numeric horizon relative to project DTM elevation at that x y location etc While the number of horizons is arbitrary there must be at least one in the input dataset 5 Click Next gt to move to next Page Wizard Step 3 6 Map the fields to the correct Data names L007 1008 1009 i010 Source Style Source nit Conversion Fie LineID Fie Shotparnt File Bas Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 151 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt 7 Click Next gt to move to next Page Steps j Step 4 of 4 Select data type to import P CSV fle k cekme Import Map CSY colume to data sabaran Horizon Pointe 15 he Chip to project Intersection Radius a Fick Z is positive depth Hardon Cis tebe Harian DOF 0 Testing Geamedeller CapelFaustempty capel faust Nawiew seismic horizons m uput DyTestingiteomodeler Can F austiempty capel faust_Naview setanic_horizons ais Mav Database List iD Testing Geomodeler CepelFaustlenoty_cepel_ fauctiseisnic_nev2 OR rer 4 PLRMOVE s Gear AY Required Horizon DOF Hormon output database and one or more nawigaton fires Wizard Step 4 The items in th
365. to take care when measuring steep terrain e xyz takes vertical distance into account e uv takes only horizontal xy distance into account Points list editor Angle with respect to the v direction in degrees clockwise positive Tape measure Absolute angle with respect to the previous line segment in the list where 180 is the direction of a continuation of the line of the two previous points and 0 is the direction of the line from the previous point to the one before in degrees in the range 0 180 Bearing Tape measure Angle with respect to the v direction in degrees clockwise positive L Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 14 Contents Help Top q Back gt Project Explorer Parent topic User interface overview In this section Project Explorer Introduction Common shortcut menu options Project Explorer Project Explorer window and Project shortcut menus Project Explorer Formations shortcut menus Project Explorer and 2D Viewer Faults shortcut menus Project Explorer Models shortcut menus Project Explorer Sections shortcut menus Project Explorer and 2D Viewer Drillholes shortcut menus Project Explorer and 2D Viewer Drillhole Visualisation Project Explorer and 2D Viewer Drillhole Edit Project Explorer Surface meshes shortcut menu Project Explor
366. u can Enter them manually Enter dimension extents from the Points List Specify the Model limits as whole project zone Uses the appropriate coordinate value x y or z of the last most recent two points in the Points List as the Min and Max Sets the Model Limits to the full Project extents Simplification radius Control the density of project data to use in the calculation Within the diameter that you specify in metres 3D GeoModeller averages out multiple data points to a single value This enables 3D GeoModeller to operate faster in cases where you have dense data or you want to sacrifice model precision for speed of processing Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 120 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Plot the Model Settings dialog box Parent topic Use this dialog box to specify how you want 3D GeoModeller to plot the model on a Model menu section including toolbar and dialog boxes e Density of plot points along contact lines The region of the project space to plot e Whether to plot lines fill or trend lines or a combination and which of them to plot With this dialog box you can Immediately apply settings to a selected section 3D GeoModeller plots the model on the section according to your settings Immediately apply settings to all sections 3D GeoModeller plots the
367. ume Granite I UpperSeries gt Hide E it Drillhole Wireframe I B LowerSeries B Wireframe Lo Sia Surface Delete fe Hide E P UpperSeries Delete iI za LowerSeries Wireframe iy E BasalSeries Appearance shading B Hi Sections Delete Options in these menus Option Description S Show Hide Shading Wireframe See Common shortcut menu options Appearance Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 18 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Project Explorer Sections shortcut menus Parent topic Project Explorer Contents Help Top The Project Explorer shortcut menus for Sections generally individual sections or topography and images attached to a section enable you to work on those objects at different levels of grouping or individually This section describes the Sections shortcut menu for all sections together and the shortcut menu for images attached to sections For information about the shortcut menu of topography individual sections and axial surfaces see 2D Viewer sub menu and main shortcut menu Project Explorer Section menus twee FA ta E i lt 2 TopoMap Explore m Topography El Ns E Gp Tutoriala4 YN saec z SEES E G HoxRoxProject E E TutorialA4 E P Formations Ei a Format
368. un Bernard_Krige_Tests G30_RP1 Iritrept 630D_ RFI Intrepid xml De Bernand_Krige_Tests G30_RP1_BRGM_Mar2017 G30_RP1_BRGM_Mar2012 xml Den Bernand_Krige_Tests G30_RP1_BRGOM_Sep12 G3D_ RPL BRGOM_Sepl2 xml Le Mastts_Inversion_Test NewStutt3 bdgsub gt _np_cleanibdgsub gt _np_cleanxml Dra Wale DAP GeohlodellerModelModel3_simplyfied New_Project srml Quit Ctri Q See the following table for an overview of the Project menu The table also shows the icons from the Project toolbar Option Desenin roo res on rete nev pre See Crer eee fa oe New Project Create a new project from a GOCAD voxet Pf from Voxet See New Project from Voxet Open opne CO CTRL SHIFT S Save the current project with its current CTRLtS name replacing the previous version If it is a new project 3D GeoModeller uses Save As See Save a project and Save As lid Save As Save the current project with a new name Autosave gt Recover a previous version of the project that Recover Saved 3D GeoModeller automatically saved See Project Automatic Saves dialog box Autosave gt Set autosave preferences See Autosave Preferences Preferences dialog box Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 64 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Option Description Toot keys Delete Current Delete the current project Project De
369. ur for the new axial series family Uses the Colour Palette dialog box Add a new axial series Choose this after you have named it and selected the colour Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 107 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Create or Edit Axial Surfaces dialog box Parent topic Create or edit axial surfaces Geology menu and dialog 3 Create or Edit axial surfaces X boxes Axial surfaces i Arnticline1 UES Attributes Dy Appearance 8 Delete Create anew axial surface Name Janticline2 do Add oor ss Axial series Fans E new axial series Polarity Anticline Syncline P Help Controls in this dialog box Axial surfaces Axial surfaces in the project Select click an axial surface for editing or deleting Edit the attributes of the selected axial surface See Axial Surface Attributes dialog box Appearance Edit the appearance of the selected axial surface See Appearance of objects dialog box family Delete the selected axial surface Create a new axial surface Name Name of a new axial surface Colour Click in this field to select colour for the new axial surface Uses the Colour Palette dialog box Add a new axial surface Choose this after you have named it and selected the colour axial series and polarity Axial series Axial series to which the new ax
370. ural data Geology menu and dialog boxes The inputting of geology on the map or in sections consists of creating the structural data geology data contacts and fault locations geology orientation data fold axial surface data axial traces axial surface orientation data locally the axial plane and hingelines which 3D GeoModeller uses to compute the 3D model In this section Contents Help Top Creating geology data Creating geology orientation data Fitting a plane to Points create orientation data Creating faults Linking faults with geology series Defining a network of faults Creating axial series Creating axial surfaces Creating axial surface data axial traces Creating axial surface orientation data Creating hinge line data 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 344 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Creating geology data Parent topic Structural toolbar Create geology data Structural data operations When you have geology contacts or interfaces or fault locations known from outcrops etc you can input these geology observations on the map view or ina section view These data will then be used together with other structural data to compute the 3D geometrical model You can input geology data points either one by one or as a group of data points provided that all points belong to a single geology
371. uring geophysical forward modelling and inversion Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 75 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Edit menu and dialog boxes r H Copy Ctrl C i Paste Ctrl V These menu items are used for the purpose of copying and pasting graphic items or selected GeoModeller objects to and from the Clipboard GeoModeller has other copy and paste menu items under objects in the Explore Tree for copying and pasting items from one GeoModeller project to another They are useful for transferring basic geological items from an existing project when it is found necessary to change the project extents ie enlarge or reduce the coverage of a project The supported items are e Copy Paste Formations e Copy Paste Stratigraphic Pile e Copy Paste Dykes e Copy Paste Faults e Copy Paste Sections The DTM is not copied with the Surface Topography Section Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 76 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Section menu toolbar and dialog boxes Parenttopic 3D Use the Section menu to manage the topography and sections in your model GeoModeller main menus File Section Geology Model Geophysics Import Export View Window Help p5edion a EA Topography Load From a DTM CS 4r gt
372. utorialA4t Ly 1 i Formations 4t Faults g Models E Sections wy Drillholes l aua Surface Meshes E Load Surface Mesh Options in this menu Load Surface Mesh See Load Surface Mesh 3D GeoModeller s 3D Viewer enables you to visualise and work with the 3D objects in your model 3D View m 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd lt 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 42 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt The 3D Viewer opens automatically at the time of project creation and when a project is loaded The 3D Viewer window displays the model in 3D You can show or hide project elements in the 3D Viewer and pan zoom and rotate the image The 3D Toolbar is active whenever the 3D Viewer window is selected You can minimise but not close the 3D Viewer window The 3D Viewer window is detachable from the main GeoModeller GUI and can be moved to a separate monitor The controls for manipulating the 3D view are discussed in detail under the following headings e 8D Viewer toolbar and Mouse Operations See 3D Controls sub menu and 3D Viewer toolbar e Keyboard Shortcuts See 3D Viewer Keyboard Shortcuts and Mouse Operations e 8D Graphic Object Selection See 3D Viewer graphic object selection e 8D Clipping Planes See 3D Viewer Clipping Plane Tool e Shortcut menu operations See 3D Viewer sub and shortcut menu e Shortcut menus in the Project Ex
373. w title to any window edge and then drop In the following diagram e The dotted red lines show possible target edges to where you can drag a window The red arrow shows an example We move the lower 2D Viewer window so that it is beside the upper 2D Viewer window The image at the bottom shows the new positions of the two 2D Viewer windows Antonio J D i E Y Section 44 2 926 002 23774073 958 407 U V G14 Points list operations Parent topic 3D For reference information see Points List GeoModeller Operations In this section Adding a set of points to the Points List Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 336 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Adding a set of points to the Points List Parent topic In the Points List Points list operations To activate the Create mode In the 2D Viewer toolbar choose Create The mouse cursor changes to a cross To exit from Create mode Choose Select The mouse cursor changes to an arrow For information about the way 3D GeoModeller displays the contents of the Points List in the 2D Viewer see How the Points List coordinates with the 2D Viewer gt gt To add points to the Points List 1 Enter Create mode 2 Select a 2D section to contain the points 3 Click a series of points in the 2D section view 3D GeoMod
374. wRandom_clonedl J Cas LawRandom3_ GUI Cas _LawRandomd I cs InputGrids Ay huts MethGrids 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd Old luts Fie nam Files afte T 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 257 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt 3D Grids or Voxets Context Menu Right clicking on an individual 2D or 3D grid in the Explore tree produces the following dialog of choices for the Fe_KrigInt regular grid Fe_Krigint Hide All Views of this Mesh Grid Add Current Model Field Fe Create Coordinates X Y Z Fields f Export ww Compute New Field PELE w Mult Crossplot with Group Fields Flow Rate Pressure Plot z Delete es Properties This dialog includes two extra operations for 2D and 3D Grids or Voxets that are not available for Irregular Vertex Meshes e Merge this Grid with Another e This operation allows two 2D or 3D grids with different geometries to be merged with one another The user selects a grid the Master and selects Merge this Grid with Another A second grid is selected from the available list The Master will govern the merge process The Master may be an empty grid created for the purpose of combining grids of different resolutions and or extents The fields of the second grid are sampled on to the Master Finally a new 3D
375. wvwMax 2000 m P Help Fd close Controls in this dialog box Name Nameofseston o Bounding box Section extents in 3D real world coordinates u v extensions Section extents in 2D local u v coordinates Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 177 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Section Display Parameters dialog box Parent topic Use this dialog box to specify how you want a section to appear in the 2D Viewer View menu and dialog boxes q Section display parameters x Selected section Section Update in the 3D Viewer Display control of section elements Data Geology Structure _ Other data J Geology orientation data i Drillholes Geology data W Section markers Axial surface data J Background J Axial surface orientation data Presentation fv Hinge line data Model Geology Geology lines Geology Filled W Trends interpolator Details of section elements Element None Details P Help Controls in this dialog box Selected section Name of selected section Update in 3D Viewer When checked 3D GeoModeller updates the 3D Viewer when you change data in the section Display control of Types of elements for display section elements Other data Types of data for display that do not belong to the section Model geolog
376. xport view Window Help muta E 2D Viewer Section3 H Y ae 3D Viewer 3D Controls Topog ai Fr F F F Vertical Exaggeration pi Formations Edit All Appearances PL Faults Edit All Appearances G Foint Acquisition Parameters ep Points List Visualisation Dim unavailable options See the following table for an overview of the View menu feiements Purpose 2D Viewer See 2D Viewer sub menu and main shortcut menu Project Explorer Section menus See 3D Viewer sub and shortcut menu 3D Controls see 3D Controls sub menu and 3D Viewer toolbar Vertical Exaggeration See Vertical exaggeration submenu and toolbar Formations edit all See Appearance of objects dialog box family appearances Faults edit all See Appearance of objects dialog box family appearances Point acquisition See Point Acquisition Parameters dialog box parameters Points list visualisation See Points List Visualisation dialog box Dim unavailable When checked 3D GeoModeller dims menu options that options are unavailable in the current context When not checked 3D GeoModeller displays warning messages when you select options that are unavailable in the current context default setting Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual Contents Help Top 3D GeoModeller Reference 167 4 Back gt 2D Viewer sub menu and
377. y Types of model geology for display Details of section Details of section elements Select a type of element then elements choose Details Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 178 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Image Manager dialog box Parent topic Use this dialog box to manage the images associated with a section You can import View menuand geolocate show hide or delete an image dialog boxes q Image Manager X Section Images E cuit le Delete Select All Deselect All Invert x Close Controls in this dialog box Section Section to which the image is imported List of the section s imported images See How to select items from a list New See Edit and Align Image dialog box a Se Baan Align imag devon Show Pipoy seet image onseoion me Miesdectstimage Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 179 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Edit and Align Image dialog box Parent topic Use this dialog box to geolocate an image on a section Locate and mark three points View menuand gn the image whose section coordinates you know dialog boxes Edit and Align Image j Reverse the order of Points Image D GeoModeller GeoModeller1 3 1
378. y takes the form of a series of logical And s within an enclosing If statement e The method was designed for use in microseismic analysis The Group Fields dialog appears below Sirkis Property FreTcim rE Heches huir Min Max Moai Gm Fan AINN 14 urani Moda Grid A Faka EOS 21 624 Ffeher 015 1 11a Eiman 11M Futra PEE Emmm eh Naranca EREE Mie sare Sige I Me E 2 ro ii SU OAH EGO HR eza yE RSA Egg Re RAE EE ll J a m a ei Laid ani Ld Fakk urni A i a 4 Max Miri 6 Bas TAg Lae Atigi bo eae rare of ce Eon e Flow Rate Pressure Plot e This a specialised plot designed for microseismic analysis e Delete Delete the selected mesh grid from the 3D GeoModeller project Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 255 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt e Properties The Properties dialog contains the following information Name The mesh or grid name can be edited here e Description Edit or enter a description history or source Manage MeshGnid Properties Hame Fe_Krigint e Purpose Choose the mesh or grid purpose from the drop down list Purpose e The lower dialog panel summarises the mesh or grid type regularity number of fields the origin and the cell voxet dimensions where appropriate Contents Help T
379. ymbol type See e Orientation data plot symbols e Overturned geology No of u v isolines For topography number of lines in a grid that shows the topographic surface For other uses Contact our support service for information Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd q Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 187 Contents Help Top Colour Palette Parent topic View menu and dialog boxes Contents Help Top 4 Back gt dialog box Whenever you choose a colour for something 3D GeoModeller displays the Colour palette dialog box Colour palette x A Recent _ E O a a a T E TENNENT See HERR HE T HH Preview m E fe Sample Text Sample Text Pag Ej C Sample Text Sample Text Cancel Reset Controls in this dialog box Control Purpose Swatches tab Select the required colour from the palette HSB tab The Hue Saturation and Brightness tab Set values using the text boxes spin boxes or selection panels In the square selection panel Brightness corresponds to the vertical location and Saturation to the horizontal location The tall narrow panel is for selecting Hue 3D GeoModeller displays the corresponding RGB values for your selection RGB tab The Red Green Blue tab Set Red Green and Blue using the sliders text boxes or spin boxes Preview T
380. ystem 3D GeoModeller dispays this for your information You cannot edit it here Distance unit of the project coordinate system 3D GeoModeller dispays this for your information You cannot edit it here Project XMin XMax YMin YMax ZMin and ZMax parameters are the bounding box Project extents of the 3D GeoModeller Project in the X east Y north and Z up directions respectively 3D GeoModeller dispays this for your information You cannot edit it here Description Your note about the surface topography section 3D GeoModeller provides this space for your notes It does not use the data in calculations Contents Help Top 2013 BRGM amp Desmond Fitzgerald amp Associates Pty Ltd 4 Back gt GeoModeller User Manual 3D GeoModeller Reference 82 Contents Help Top 4 Back gt Create a Section from its Trace dialog box Parent topic If you have a set of points in the points list you can use them to create a section Use Section menu this dialog box to specify the section to be created toolbar and dialog boxes U Create a Section from its Trace X Section Name SectionName Orientation amp Vertical f Dipping at 90 degrees First Point First Point ak U 0 v 0 Section Limits zMin D zMax m P Help lf Create Fd close Controls in this dialog box Section name name Name acme eaa a aaa section cat Dip of the line of greatest slope from 90 to 90

"Structural data" in 3D GeoModeller Reference

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

&quot;Structural data&quot; in 3D GeoModeller Reference

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

"Structural data" in 3D GeoModeller Reference